AEMail 2.40/AEMail v2.40.iso/documentation/aemail.doc

Text File | 2001-03-19 | 498KB | 10,964 lines

                                AEMAIL.DOC


Name of Program: AEMail (Amiga E-Mail)

Version: 2.40
Release Date: March 31, 2001

Written By: John F. Zacharias

AEMail is copyright (c) 1996-2001 by John F.  Zacharias, all rights
reserved.  Permission is given to unregistered users to test and evaluate
the program in return for feedback on the use of the program and reporting
of any bugs encountered.

     AEMAIL SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE;
     NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE.  ALL USE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK.  NO LIABILITY
     OR RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED.

Installer and Installer project icon (c) Copyright 1995-96 Escom AG.  All
Rights Reserved.  Reproduced and distributed under license from Escom AG.

INSTALLER SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE;
NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE.  ALL USE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK.  NO LIABILITY
OR RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED.

ClassAct Copyright (c) 1995,1996 Christopher E.  Aldi.  All Rights
Reserved.

This documentation is divided into the following Sections and sub-topics:

    I. PROGRAM PURPOSE

    II. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

        REQUIREMENTS
        RESTRICTIONS
        REGISTRATION
        NOTIFICATION REQUESTER

    III. INSTALLATION

        CONFIGURING USERS
        OTHER CONSIDERATIONS
        SETTING THE TIME ZONE FOR AEMAIL

    IV. CONFIGURATION

        TOOL TYPES
            INTERLACE=YES
            MAIL_DIR=directory-path
            CONFIG=configuration-file
            USERID=UserId
            PASSWRD=your_password
            PASSPROTECT=YES             (registered users only)
            DOMAIN=Domain_Name
            FROM=your_email_address
            REALNAME=your_real_name
            REPLYTO=reply-email-address
            ORGANIZATION=organization-name
            POP_SERVER=your_POP_host
            SMTP_SERVER=your_SMTP_host
            EDITOR=call_line_for_your_editor
            TCPLOG=name_of_log_file
            DELETEMAIL=YES
            FULLHEADER=YES
            STRIPDUPS=YES
            HDRINREPLY=YES
            STARTNET=call_line_for_your_startnet_script
            STOPNET=call_line_for_your_stopnet_script
            AUTOCONNECT=YES
            FLDRFONT=fontname
            FLDRFONTSZ=fontsize
            AREXXPORT=portname
            HELP=full-path-name-to-"AEMail.guide"-file

        CONFIGURATION SETUP WINDOW
            Identity Page
            TCP/IP Page
            Paths Page
            Viewer Page
            ARexx Page
            Fonts Page
            General Page

    V. USING AEMAIL

        Starting AEMail
            Starting AEMail from the Shell
            Activating AEMail from the Workbench
        Getting Help with AEMail
        Using AEMail as a "MailTo" Agent
        Using Keyboard Hot Keys
        Editing String Entry Gadgets
        Using the Clipboard with AEMail
        Using Web and Email addresses embedded in messages
        Filtering Messages with AEMail
        Viewing Message Lists on the POP Server

    VI. COMMAND ICON TOOL BAR

        Display Folder List
        Display Address Book
        Retrieve Messages
        Display Previous Message
        Display Previous Folder's Message List
        Display Current Folder's Message List
        Display Next Folder's Message List
        Display Next Message
        Compose A Message
        Queue Message For Later Delivery
        Send Message Immediately
        Save Message To File
        Print
        Delete/Undelete Message
        Copy Messages to a New Folder
        Transfer Messages to a New Folder
        Start TCP/IP Network Connection
        Terminate TCP/IP Network Connection

    VII. AEMAIL MENUS

        Project menu
            Configuration...
                Open...
                Edit...
                Save
                Save As...
                Restore Default
            Send Queued Mail
            Iconify AEMail
            Send Notification...
            Getting Help
            About...
            Quit...

        Folders menu
            New...
            Edit...
            Delete
            Move...
            Set Sort Key...
            Folder List
                Display
                Backup
                Restore
            Remove DELETED Msgs

        Messages menu
            Show
                Deleted Messages
                UnRead Msgs Only
            Compose...
            Reply
                Use Reply-To...
                Use From...
            Forward...
            Edit...
            Select None
            Select All
            Last Selected
            Export...
            Copy...
            Transfer...
            Print
            Delete/Undelete...
            Lock/Unlock
            Display Full Hdr
            Fwd Body Txt Only
            Incl Hdr in Resp

        Retrieve Msgs menu
            From POP Host
            From Local File...
            View Message List on Server
            Excl Dup Msgs
            Delete Host Mail

        TCP/IP menu

            Start Net
            Stop Net
            TCP Logging File
                Active
                Purge
                Display/Edit...

        ARexx/DOS menu

            Send AREXX/DOS Command...
            Send Last Command

            Commands Specified by ARexx Configuration Page
            . . .
            . . .

    VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS

        Configuration Setup Window
        Folder List Window
        Message List Window
        Folder Configuration Window
        Filter Selection Window
            Examples of using Message Filtering
        Set Sort Keys Window
            Examples of Setting Sort Keys
        Address Book Window
        Message Display Window
            Attachment Requester
        Compose Message Window
            Add Attachments Requester

    IX. AEMAIL AREXX INTERFACE

        Introduction
        Synopsis of ARexx Commands
        ARexx Commands
        Error Messages

    X. AEMAIL FILES

        mailcap
        configuration (s:aemail.cnfg)
        folder.config
        [folder_Name].config
        .addrbook
        .signature
        Messages
        TCP Trace Log File (TCPLOG)

    XI. BUG REPORTS & SUGGESTIONS

    XII. REFERENCES

    XIII. IN CONCLUSION


                           I. PROGRAM PURPOSE

AEMail is a mail client designed to read, process, compose and send e-mail
from an Amiga computer over the Internet.  It provides an easy to use
graphical interface designed specifically for the Amiga.  It connects to
an Internet server through AmiTCP or any TCP/IP stack compatable with
AmiTCP.  This includes TermiteTCP and Miami.  It uses the AmigaDOS editor,
ed, or any other editor of the user's choosing for developing email
messages.  No other external programs or modules are required.  The POP3
and SMTP protocols are built into the program.

AEMail does use the ClassAct Boopsi classes for building some of it's GUI
(Graphical User Interface).  The ClassAct classes required by AEMail are
included with the AEMail Release. If you are using the Amiga OS 3.5,
ClassAct is built into the OS and will not be installed with this
release.

The current version of AEMail supports attachments following the MIME
(Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension) outline in RFC 1341, 1521, 1524
(Mailcap files), and 1806 as well as UUENCODED attached files.  Not all of
the features of MIME headers are fully supported and exceptions will be
noted in the documentation.

AEMail can also be used as a "MailTo" agent in web browsers, such as
AWeb, IBrowse, and Voyager, which allow the user to specify such an agent
for composing and sending email.

You can also call AEMail from another program to send a message created by
that program.


II. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:

                               REQUIREMENTS

This program can run on any Amiga Operating Systen 2.1 and above.  It uses
the ClassAct Boopsi Classes which are provided with the Installation
script for installations below 3.5.  If you are using Amiga OS 3.5,
ClassAct is built into the OS and does not have to be installed.

This program requires a TCP/IP stack compatable with AmiTCP.  It has been
tested with the 4.0 Demo Version of AmiTCP, but will possibly run on
earlier versions at level 2.0 or greater.  It also has been tested under
TermiteTCP and Miami which use a TCP/IP stack that is compatable with
AmiTCP.

Other TCP/IP software may or may not be compatable with AmiTCP.  If the
software uses a socket library (bsdsocket.library) with calls that are
compatable with AmiTCP, it possibly will work.

If you wish to display MIME attachments from within AEMail, you will also
need a 'Mailcap' file.  You can define and/or edit entries in the
'Mailcap' file through the "Viewer Page" of the "Configuration Setup".
The actual specifications for the mailcap file are given under the X.
AEMAIL FILES section below.  It is possible to display attachments with
either AmigaDos 2.x or 3.x.  Depending on the program you select to
display the attachments, datatypes may not be required for this display.

A sample mailcap file is also provided in the archive and will be
installed when you install AEMail.  This sample mailcap file can be used
without modification on any system running under AmigaDos 3.0 or later
since it uses Multiview (which does use datatypes) as the display agent.

If you are using a version of AmigaDos before 3.0, you will have to modify
the mailcap file to specify your own favorite display program for specific
"Content Type/Subtypes".  You can use the "Viewer Page" of the
"Configuration Setup" to do this.

                               RESTRICTIONS

Only one version of AEMail can be running at a time.  If you are using
AEMail as a "mailto:" mail agent in a browser and you set it up to be
called directly (not through an ARexx script), you can not have AEMail
running when you invoke your browser if you expect to send any email from
your browser.  This is because AEMail will be automatically loaded from
the browser when you click on a "mailto:" link.  This can be avoided if
you call AEMail through an ARexx script which has been provided in the
ARexx directory called "mailto.aem".  Consult the "mailto.readme" file,
also in the ARexx directory, on how to use this script.  Using the ARexx
script allows you to have a running copy of AEMail when your browser is
invoked.

This same restiction applies if you call AEMail from an external program
to Queue or Send a message created by that program.  However, if you use
and ARexx Script (or command) you can interface with a running copy of
AEMail.

                        AmigaDOS 2.1 Restrictions
                        -------------------------

ClassAct does not correctly handle mouse clicks in button gadgets or
listviews under AmigaDOS 2.1 when these mouse clicks occur within a
"tabbed" page.  The mouse clicks work fine outside the page environment so
that the [use], [save], [save as], and [cancel] gadgets work fine as do
the tabs at the top of the screen.  The problem with mouse clicks does not
effect string gadgets, either.

This means that under AmigaDOS 2.1, the "Viewer", "ARexx", and "Font"
pages of the Configuration Setup do not work nor does the [Printer
Setup], [Set Screen Mode], [Set Minimum Headers], or [Set Menu Flags]
buttons on the General page.  The [CLR], [DEFAULT], [Set Password] and
call file requester buttons also do not work, but this version has
provided alternate key commands to activate these while editing strings.
(see "Editing String Entry Gadgets" under Section V. USING AEMAIL.)

The "Drag Select" option for message list will only work with AmigaDOS 3.0
or above.

                       Other ClassAct Restrictions
                       ---------------------------

If you are using a Workbench screen that is restricted to 640 by 200
(HIRES) with versions of the OS before 3.5, you will find that there are
some portions the Configuration Setup Window that appear to be cut off.
All the gadgets on the Configuration Setup Window do work correctly,
however.  This problem does not exist with OS 3.5.

If you are using a HIRES screen for your Workbench, you can make the
Configuration Setup Window fit correctly by using text overscan to
increase your visable area.  This is not necessary with OS 3.5.


                        System Addon Restrictions
                        -------------------------

While AEMail appears to work fine with a standard configured AMIGA, there
are some possible problems with "system addons" that might not behave
correctly with AEMail.

One such problem had been with hacks or commodities that moved a window to
the front when you clicked into it such as the "Click-To-Front" commodity.
The folder window disappeared.  That problem has been corrected.  Any
other hack or commodity that automatically brings the current window to
front either when you click on it or when you pass the cursor over it,
should work now.  Please let me know if you are still having problems.

Another commodity that causes problems with AEMail is one that
automatically activates the window under the mouse pointer (AutoPoint).
Since AEMail uses multiple windows, it controls which window is active at
any point in time.  It is not always the window under the mouse pointer
since that might not cause AEMail to react properly.  As a result, if
you activate AutoPoint while AEMail is active, you will experience
flashing windows as AEMail switches control away from the window under the
mouse pointer.

Other system configurations may also cause problems with AEMail.  If you
encounter one of these, please send me e-mail describing the problem and
what "add-on" you were using.  If it is a public domain program, it would
be helpful if you included the program as an attached archive to your
message.  (see Section VI, Command Icon Strip:  Compose A message).


                           Other Considerations
                           --------------------

When you call an editor that requires a stack size larger than the default
stack size and that program does not create it's own stack, you will have
to create a script for that editor and set the stack size from that
script.  Increasing the stack size of AEMail will not work because AEMail
establishes it's own stack size and called programs do not inherit stack
size from the calling program.

If you are having problems with editors and stack size, you can use the
supplied script for CED (s:AEMced.scr) and modify it to your
specifications.  One warning, however, if you call a word processor you
will need to ALWAYS save the file as ASCII and that program must be able
to accept an already existing ASCII file when it is called.

You can send me e-mail by using the Address Book Nickname AEMAIL.  (see
also Section X, Bug Reports and Suggestions)

                               REGISTRATION

AEMail is shareware.  Versions prior to 1.15 were "freeware".  A shareware
fee of $30 is requested for AEMail.  The shareware fee (US Funds only)
should be sent to:

    John Zacharias
    10004 Vanguard Drive
    Sacramento, CA 95827
    USA

You must include your Real Name and email address with your remittance.  A
handy form has been provided in the file "registration.form" which you can
print out and use for this purpose.

The "registration.form" has an icon which, if you double click on it, will
use the "PrintFiles" program in your SYS:Tools directory to print out the
registration form.

Your registration will be acknowledged by email that must be received by
AEMail.  AEMail version 2.40 does have several features that are not
implemented for un-registered users.

The features in AEMail 2.40 that are not available to un-registered users
are:

    Ability to use multiple signature files.
    Ability to add user defined headers to a message.
    You will not be able to shrink/expand group displays in the Address
        Book displays.  The standard Address Book display will have
        expanded group displays and the Compose window address book
        display will have only the group header displayed.
    Password protection for separate configurations.
    Filtering messages on "Other Message Hdrs".
    Filtering messages on the content of the message body.
    Certain ARexx commands (see Section IX.  AEMAIL AREXX INTERFACE or
        consult the AEMail-ARexx.doc)
    Saving font changes.
    Saving function key and menu assignments for ARexx commands.
    Ability to disable the "Notification" message requester.

Future versions of AEMail may also have enhancements that will only be
available to registered users.

The display speed is now the same for both registered and unregistered
users.  You may notice, however, that if you select a proportional font for
your message display, you may have a slower message display, especially if
the message contains lines that are too long to fit in the display window.

For the un-registered "Freeware" version, permission is given to test and
evaluate the program in return for feedback on the use of the program and
reporting of any bugs encountered.

I do ask, however, that, in return for the use of this product, you inform
me of any suggestions you have and of any bugs that you encounter.  You
can do that by sending e-mail to me using the Nickname AEMAIL which can be
found in your Address Book when you first load AEMail.  (see also Section
X, Bug Reports and Suggestions)

AEMail no longer automatically sends the special "Notification" message
when you send your first message.  Instead, when you first load a new
version of AEMail, a special requester will appear asking if you want to
send the notification message for notification of updates and giving you
the ability to select what information you want to send.


                          NOTIFICATION REQUESTER

When you first load a new version of AEMail, a special requester will
appear asking if you want to send a notification message for notification
of updates and giving you the ability to select what information you want
to send.  You can cancel this message, but if you do, the requester will
appear each time you load AEMail.  Tf you are a registered user and you
cancel, you will be given the opportunity to suppress the message the next
time you load AEMail.  For unregistered users the requester will appear
each time you load AEMail whether or not you send the notification or
cancel.

The requester looks like this:

  =======================================================================
  [o] Send AEMail Notification Request                                  |
  ====================================================================  |
  |  ---------- ---------                                             | |
  | | Identity | Options |                                            | |
  | |          |_________|___________________________________________ | |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || Please complete if you want notification of updates sent to you || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  ||  Email Address: [ userid@domain                              ]  || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  ||        Version: [ 2.20         ] Serial Number: [nnnnnnnnn   ]  || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || ----------------------Optional Information--------------------- || |
  |||                                                               ||| |
  |||    Name: [                                                  ] ||| |
  |||                                                               ||| |
  ||| Address: [                                                  ] ||| |
  |||                                                               ||| |
  |||    City: [             ] State: [         ]   Zip: [        ] ||| |
  |||                                                               ||| |
  ||| Country: [      ] [ ] Do not continue to show this on startup ||| |
  || --------------------------------------------------------------- || |
  | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |_|
  | [       Queue       ] [      Send Now      ] [      Cancel      ] |/|
  ======================================================================|

The Email Address will be filled in with information from your
configuration data, Version by the current version number of AEMail, and
Serial Number by information your registration data.  If your version of
AEMail is unregistered, the words UNREGISTERED will appear in the Serial
Number.  The Version number and Serial Number can not be changed, but you
can change the email address.  All of this is required information.

Below this is optional data although your name will be filled in with
either your real name from the configuration data (if unregistered) or the
name from your registration data.  You can clear or change this data if
you wish.  You can also add your address, city, state or province, zip or
postal code, and country.

At the bottom of the screen are three buttons: [Queue], [Send Now], and
[Cancel].  [Queue] will queue the notification message in the QUEUED folder,
[Send Now] will send the notification message immediately provided you are
connected to the Internet.  If you are not connected, [Send Now] will
queue the message.  [Cancel] will cancel the notification requester unless
"Do not continue to show this on startup" is checked.  Unregistered users
will not be able to check this item and the notification request will
continue to appear when you startup AEMail regardless of whether you
have previously queued or sent the request.  However you can cancel it at
any time.  The close gadget at the top of the window will act the same as
[Cancel].

The Options page (indicated by the Options tab) will send optional
information about your configuration if you so desire.  It is primarily to
provide me with information about your setup in the event you have
problems using AEMail.  The Options page looks like this:


  =======================================================================
  [o] Send AEMail Notification Request                                  |
  ====================================================================  |
  |  ---------- ---------                                             | |
  | | Identity | Options |                                            | |
  | |__________|         |___________________________________________ | |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] POP Server is: your-POP-Server-name                         || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] SMTP Server is: your-SMTP-Server-name                       || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] SMTP Domain Name is: your-domain-name                       || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] Editor Call is: the-call-line-for-your-editor               || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] Exec Version is: exec-version-number                        || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] Display ID is: display-ID-for-your-screen-mode              || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] Current Config file is: path-and-name-of-your-config-file   || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  || [ ] Mail Directory is: path-to-your-mail-directory              || |
  ||                                                                 || |
  | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |_|
  | [       Queue       ] [      Send Now      ] [      Cancel      ] |/|
  ======================================================================|


Checkmark those items you want sent with the notification message.
Perhaps the most inmportant items are your Editor Call (if you are having
problems with your editor), the Exec Version, and the Display ID.
However, you do not have to send any of this information.

When the notification message is received your email address is placed in
a database for informing you of updates.  If you do not want to be so
informed, cancel and do not send the notification message or send email to
"AEMail" to that effect and your name will be removed from the database.

Please note that the notification message requester will appear when you
upgrade to a new version of AEMail even though you may have previously
sent a notification message for an earlier version.  This lets us know
which version you are using.  Some of the data in future notification
messages may also change to help give feedback on how AEMail is being used
and what setup you are using.

Also, if you are using multiple configuration files, a separate
notification message will appear the first time you you load any
particular configuration.  If you re-install AEMail for any reason you may
have an additional Notification message request.


                            III. INSTALLATION


The AEMail Install Script uses the Installer program first provided by
Commodore and later revised by Amiga Technologies.  You should use the
Install_AEMail script to install AEMail.  It is not recommended that you
attempt to install AEMail by hand since some actions are necessary through
the install script.  This is especially true if you are attempting to
install a registered version of AEMail!

    Installer and Installer project icon
    (c) Copyright 1995-96 Escom AG.  All Rights Reserved.
    Reproduced and distributed under license from Escom AG.

    INSTALLER SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE;
    NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE.  ALL USE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK.  NO LIABILITY
    OR RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED.

Starting with Version 2.00 of AEMail, the Installation script was
completely re-written from previous versions.  You can now define multiple
users with the install script and use the install script to add or update
users as well as delete users (Version 2.30 and above).

The script was further modified for Version 2.20 to place additional edits
when naming configuration files and your mail directory.  The script also
installs the ClassAct classes required by AEMail if you are installing with
an OS prior to 3.5.  If you are installing to OS 3.5, it is not necessary
to install the ClassAct classes since they are built into the OS.

In OS versions prior to 3.5 you will be asked if you want to install
ClassAct.  It is not necessary to do this if you are already have ClassAct
installed on your system (either by a previous AEMail install or with
another program using ClassAct).

Other changes to the Version 2.20 installation script include:

    Changing RAM: to T: for saving temporary files.  On most Amigas, T: is
    in RAM:  However, in some low memory situations, a user may assign T:
    to a hard drive.  By changing RAM: to T:, users with low memory
    conditions can still install AEMail.

    If you have previously installed a version of AEMail 2.00 or above, you
    can bypass the "Configuring Users" portion of the script as long as you
    do not want to add to your users or update a user.

Further changes to the Version 2.30 installation script include:

    The ability to delete users.

    The installation script now asks what type of installation you are
    performing: a demo version, a previously registered version, or a new
    registered version.

Please read these instructions before attempting to install AEMail.

If you have the diskette version of AEMail, you will find that it is now a
two disk set.  Place Disk_1 in your drive to start the installation.  At
the appropriate time you will be asked to insert "AEMail_V2.30-Disk_2".

If you are installing from a version obtained over the Internet or from the
AEMail CD-ROM, you will not get this message.

To install AEMail simply double click on the "Install_AEMail icon".  The
install script provides two user levels that the user can choose:

    Intermediate    (control of configuration parameters only)
    Expert          (control of configuration and where files are placed)

See below for actions that are different between the two user levels.

The first thing that the Install script will ask is what type of
installation you are performing:

    A Demo Version
    A Previously Registered Version
    A New Registered Version

If you are installing a new registered version you will need a key code
which was provided when you purchased AEMail.  You will not be able to
continue with the installation if you can not provide the correct key code.
In this event you should re-install using the Demo Version and contact the
author at [e-mail] for further instructions.

Likewise, if you are installing a previously registered version, the
installion script will attempt to locate your registration information in a
file called .registration in you main AEMail program directory.  If your
previous installed version was prior to 2.00, it will look for the
registration file in AEMail:.registration.  If it can't be found you will
be instructed to install at the Demo Version level and to contact
[e-mail] for further instructions.  Before doing that, however,
execute your newly installed AEMail and see if it is a registered version.

The Install script then makes an attempt to determine which TCP/IP stack
that you have installed.  This controls which defaults will be taken.  The
way the install scripts knows which TCP/IP stacks are present is as follows
(you must have installed the particular stack before installing AEMail):

    AmiTCP:     This is controlled by the presence of the AmiTCP: assign
                statement and the presence of the AmiTCP:bin drawer.  The
                AmiTCP:  assignment and the AmiTCP:bin drawer were
                automatically created when you installed AmiTCP.


    Miami:      This is controlled by the presence of the Miami: assign
                statement.  When you installed Miami you should have let
                the install create the Miami: assign.  This was only
                available under later versions of Maimi.

                While the Miami:  assign is not an absolute requirement
                if you are using Miami, it is required if you intend
                to use the supplied "startnet.miami" script without
                modification.  This script locates Miami with Miami:Miami
                which depends on the Miami assign.  If the Miami assign is
                not present you would have to modify the script to use the
                full path name of where Miami is located.

    TermiteTCP: This is controlled by the presence of the TermiteTCP.prefs
                envronomental variable.  Also, if you want to pick up
                some of the other TermiteTCP variables, such as email
                address, you must have run TermiteTCP prior to installing
                AEMail (TermiteTCP does not have to be online, however).

The install script will ask you to verify which TCP/IP stack you are using.
A fourth alternative "Other" is provided if you have another TCP/IP stack
or you have not as yet installed your chosen stack software.

If you have multiple stacks installed, the initial stack selection is made
in this priority:

    Miami
    AmiTCP
    Termite-TCP

You can, of course, change this with the requester.

If you select the Intermediate user level, the following actions will be
taken:

    If you have previously installed AEMail with a version 1.10 or greater,
        the install script will determine where AEMail was previously
        installed from the ENV:AEMail_Dir environmental variable.

    If you have not previously installed AEMail or you are updating from
        an AEMail version prior to 1.10, the AEMail executable file will be
        placed in AmiTCP:bin if the AmiTCP stack was selected or, if one of
        the other stacks was selected, on the largest partition on your
        hard drive.

        Note: No special directory will be created if AmiTCP is
        selected, otherwise a directory called "AEMail" will be created
        for containing the AEMail executable.  When the installation
        script terminates it will tell you where it placed the AEMail
        executable.

        The reason that AEMail is placed in the AmiTCP:bin drawer if the
        AmiTCP:  assignment is present and you selected AmiTCP as your
        TCP/IP stack, is that the "startnet" and "stopnet" scripts for
        AmiTCP should be in the same directory that contains AEMail if they
        are to work without modification.  The AmiTCP installation places
        these scripts in the AmiTCP:bin drawer.

    For OS Versions prior to 3.5, the ClassAct classes will be normally
        installed to your SYS:Classes drawer.  You will be asked if you
        want the 020 optimized version of the classes.  If you are running
        on an 020 or greater processor, reply "yes".  With OS 3.5, the
        ClassAct classes will have been installed when the OS was
        installed.

    The documentation files that you want copied will be copied to a drawer
        called "documentation" in the drawer which contains the AEMail
        executable.

    A special ARexx documentation file (which is also part of the
        AEMail.doc and AEMail.guide files), is placed in a drawer called
        "ARexx" in the drawer which contains the AEMail executable.  This
        drawer will also contain some sample ARexx scripts.

    If you want the AEMail.readme file, it will be copied to the directory
        containing your AEMail executable.

    The ARexx scripts StartNet.Miami and StopNet.Miami will be copied to
        the directory containing your AEMail executable providing they are
        not already there.  This prevents copying over scripts that may
        have been previously modified.

    A handy registration form called "registration.form" will be available
        in your main AEMail directory.  It has an icon which, if you double
        click on it, will use the "PrintFiles" program in your SYS:Tools
        directory to print out the registration form.

    You will be asked how many users you want configured.  See the section
        below on Configuring Users to see what happens here.

    If you are updating a user, you can change their mail directory.
        However, if you are creating a new mail directory rather than using
        an existing one,  you will start out with a blank address book and
        empty standard folders.

    If you are running under AmigaDos 3.0 or greater, the supplied
        mailcap file will be copied to the mail directory for each user
        unless a mailcap file already exists in that user's mail directory.
        No mailcap file will be copied if one already exists in the user's
        mail directory or if you are using AmigaDos 2.1.

    An AEMAIL2: assign statement pointing to the drawer containing your
        AEMail executable will automatically be placed in your
        S:User-Startup file.

    An "ASSIGN C: SYS:REXXC ADD" will also be added to your s:User-Startup
        file to provide a path to your AREXX commands.

The following additional capabilities are provided when you install at the
Expert level:

    You will be able to choose which directory AEMail will be installed in.
        If you are installing AEMail for first time, this may be desireable
        rather than installing in the largest partition on your hard drive.
        The default directory that is selected will be the one that would
        have been selected under the Intermediate level.

    You will be able to choose which directory you wish to install your
        Documentation files in.  WARNING: for the Help function to properly
        work, the AEMail.guide file must be in the "documentation" drawer
        within the drawer which contains the AEMail executable.  You can
        change the location of the .guide file by using the "HELP=" Tool
        Type.  This must be done manually.  The Install script WILL NOT set
        this tool type.

    You will be able to choose which directory you wish to install your
        ARexx files in.  You might want to select the Rexx: directory for
        this so that the supplied ARexx scripts become immediately
        available.

    If you want a mailcap file other than the one provided, you can select
        where you want this file copied from.  If you want to use the
        alternate mailcap provided in the ARexx drawer for displaying HTML
        documents with your browser, you could specify the AEMail ARexx
        drawer for the source of the mailcap.

As noted above, the default drawer in which your documentation is placed is
a drawer called "Documentation" in the drawer containing your AEMail
executable.  This is different from versions prior to 1.50 where the
documentation files were placed in the same drawer as the AEMail
executable.  Documentation files located in the drawer containing your
AEMail executable WILL BE deleted by the installation script.  If you want
these retained you will have to re-name or save them yourself.

Towards the beginning of the script, after you have identified your TCP/IP
stack, the script will determine if you have already installed the current
version of AEMail.  If you have, you will be asked if you want to do a Full
Install or want to add, delete and/or update users.  If you just want to
add, delete or update users, you will go immediately to the "Configuring
Users" section described below.


                             Configuring Users
                             -----------------

You can set up multiple users of AEMail from the Install Script.  Each user
will be provided a Project Icon named as the user wishes.  This project
icon will point to the AEMail executable and will be created with certain
required Tool Types as "configuration" items.  The Project icons will be
created with the Install_AEMail script.

If you have previously installed a version of AEMail 2.00 or above, you
have already established your users.  In this situation all of the users
that have been previously defined will be displayed and you will be asked
if you want to "Add/Delete/Update Users" or "Accept Current Users".  If you
reply with "Accept Current Users", the user configuration section will be
bypassed.

If you have not installed AEMail previously or your previously installed
version is prior to 2.00, you will be asked how many users with different
email addresses you wish to configure AEMail for.  You must have at least
one user.  Certain questions will then be asked for each user so that
appropriate Project icons can be created with the appropriate Tool Types.

If you already have established users and replied "Add/Delete/Update Users"
you will first be asked if you want to delete any users.  If you do, your
existing users will be displayed and you can select the one you want to
delete.

The script will determine the Configuration file used by the user you want
deleted.  It will display a requester asking if you want to delete this
configuration file.  Unless you want to use this configuration file again,
you will want to delete it.

The script will then determine the Mail directory for the user you want
deleted.  Again it will ask if you want this mail directory deleted.  If
the mail directory is being used by another user you should not delete it.

After that user is deleted you will be asked if you want to delete
another user. If you don't, you will then be asked how many users you want
to add or update.  You can reply 0 to this message which will then bypass
establishing or changing any users.

As each user is processed you will get a message asking you to select the
name of the icon you want your user to have.  Since you can both create a
new user or update an existing user, you will be present with a list of
choices that looks like this:

    Create new icon
    name-of-previously-defined-user-1
    name-of-previously-defined-user-2
    ...........
    name-of-previously-defined-user-n

Only the names of previously defined users will appear in this list.  If
you select any of the users or the "Create new icon" entry you will get a
message asks you to enter (or confirm) the name of the user (icon name)
that asks you want the user to have.  When you select "Create new icon" a
default name will be used that will be one of the following:

    AEMail_User_1
    AEMail_User_2
    AEMail_User_3
    ...........

    AEMail_User_n

You can change the name or use the one provided.  You will then be told if
the icon already exists or not and asked to confirm that this is the
correct name.  If you are editing a previously created icon, that icon, of
course will exist.  You will be given an opportunity to re-enter the name
if you decide it is wrong.

If you are updating from a previous version of AEMail (before 2.00), you
will already have a "Tool" icon for AEMail.  If you select "AEMail" as the
name, the "tool" icon will be turned into a Project icon for your primary
user and all existing Tool Types will be obtained as default values.  If
you choose to change the name of the icon, the "AEMail" tool icon will
remain.

WARNING:  Do not try to DELETE any icon called "AEMail" (tool or project)
AFTER you have installed AEMail using the workbench "Icons/Delete..."  menu
item.  This will delete the AEMail executable as well.  If you don't want
the "AEMail" icon it is best to delete it BEFORE installing AEMail or use
the delete function described above to delete the icon.

The required Tool Types that will be created for each user's Project icon
are:

    CONFIG=
    MAIL_DIR=
    PASSPROTECT=YES

The CONFIG= Tool Type points to the configuration file for that user.  This
configuration file must be unique for each user.  Under both install
options (Intermediate and Expert), a file requester will appear for you to
select the configuration file name.  If you are not updating an existing
user, this configuration file will not exist so you can enter whatever you
like (providing a file with the same name is not present).  You can select
any drawer, but either the drawer containing the AEMail executable or the
s:  directory are recommended.

If you start AEMail from the shell without any arguments, you will need to
name your primary user's configuration file aemail.cnfg in the s:
directory.

If you are doing a full install and you have a s:aemail.cnfg file, this
file will automatically be selected as your default configuration file for
your first user provided no configuration file was previous specified in
the "AEMail" Tool Types.  If you install at the "Expert" level, you will
be able to copy and/or rename this file to another location.

The MAIL_DIR= Tool Type is used to specify where your mail directory is
located.  In versions of AEMail prior to 2.00, the AEMail:  assign was used
to specify the mail directory location and the Tool Type was only used if
the mail directory differed from that.  This is no longer the case.  With
version 2.00 and above, the AEMail:  ASSIGN statement is no longer used,
the mail directory will always be specified by the MAIL_DIR= Tool Type.
After installing a user you can change their mail directory by either
changing this Tool Type or by running the Installation script again to
update this user.

If you are updating from a version of AEMail prior to 2.00, the AEMail
ASSIGN will be used to specify the default MAIL_DIR unless a MAIL_DIR=
Tool Type was previously specified in an updated icon.

For new users, you will be given an opportunity to accept the default as
the mail directory or specify a new mail directory location for each user.
The MAIL_DIR does not have to be unique to each user.  Two or more users
can share the same mail directory.  If the mail directory you specify is
not present, it will be created.

The PASSPROTECT=YES Tool Type is used to password protect the mail
directory for a particular user (only available for registered users).  You
will be told whether the mail file is currently password protected or not
and then be asked if you want to password protect the mail directory for
this particular user.  If the file was previously password protected, you
can turn that feature off by replying 'No'.  To continue password
protection you will have to reply 'yes'.  The password that is used to
password protect the directory is the same one that is used to access the
POP server by that particular user.

Previously an INTERLACE=YES Tool Type was used to specify the screen mode
that AEMail would initially open on.  This Tool Type is now obsolete.
AEMail will now initially open on whatever screen mode is set for your
Workbench screen.  After initially loading AEMail, you can change the
screen mode through the Configuration Edit screen, General page.

You will also be able to provide additional configuration data for each
user that will be stored in the Tool Types parameters of the AEMail Project
icon for that user.  If the user has an existing Configuration file, you
will be asked if you want to re-configure this user's data.  If you do, the
existing configuration file will be renamed with ".old" appended to it.  If
the user does not have an existing configuration file, you will be asked if
you want to configure now or wait until AEMail is first loaded.

Since you can change the configuration data from AEMail, the Configuration
file always takes precedence over the Tool Types.  The only exceptions to
this are the name of the configuration file (CONFIG=) and the name of the
mail directory (MAIL_DIR=).  That is why any existing configuration file
is renamed to avoid resetting the configuration data when AEMail is first
loaded.

Certain configuration parameters must be provided before AEMail will run.
These configuration parameters are provided either by Tool Types in the
AEMail icon or through a special Configuration Setup Window when you first
run AEMail and saved in the user's configuration file.

If these parameters are not provided by Tool Types (through the
installation script) or by an existing configuration file, the
Configuration Setup Window will be displayed upon the initial startup of
AEMail.  You can not proceed beyond this configuration setup until certain
required configuration parameters are provided.  The absolute minimum
configuration parameters that must be provided are:

    POP3 UserID
    Password
    Your email Address
    POP Server Name
    SMTP Server Name
    Domain Name
    Edit Call

If you decide to configure using Tool Types, the installation script will
try to automatically configure certain items to default values.  These
include the switch for deleting mail from your POP Server once it has been
transferred to your Amiga and the switch for stripping duplicate messages.
The edit call will default to c:ed and will open the editor on the
Workbench.  Also, if you have your TCP/IP stack loaded (not necessarily
on-line), it will obtain certain default items from environmental variables
stored by the stack software.

The installation script will allow you to provide additional configuration
parameters as Tool Types in your AEMail icon or to change the default ones.

A POP Server name and a SMTP Server name must be provided.  However, if
they are missing AND, if the Domain Name has been specified, default
values will also be assigned to these items.  These default values will
prepend 'POP.' to the domain name for the POP server and 'SMTP.' to the
domain name for the SMTP Server as defaults.  Please note:  these may NOT
be correct for your POP and SMTP servers.  If they are not, you will have
to change these items with the installation script.  Some Internet Service
Providers use mail.  prepended to the domain server for both the POP and
SMTP servers.

If you have a problem understanding what should be entered with the
install, use the HELP function of the Install script.  Here is some of the
help information from the script:

  "The domain name is usually the part of your e-mail address that follows"
  "the '@' sign.  If something else is required by your Internet Provider,"
  "provide it here."

  "As an example, my email address is:"

        "[e-mail]"

  "The domain name for my Internet provider is therefor 'calweb.com'."


  "POP Server.  POP stands for 'Post Office Protocol' and your "
  "POP Server is the name assigned to the host computer that holds "
  "your Internet mail.  Normally this would be 'pop.' or 'mail.' "
  "prepended to your Domain name."

  "Consult your Internet provider if the POP Server is called "
  "something other than the above."


  "SMTP Server.  SMTP stands for 'Simple Mail Transfer Protocol' and "
  "your SMTP server is the name assigned to the host computer that "
  "sends your Internet mail.  Normally this would be 'smtp.' or 'mail.' "
  "prepended to your Domain name"

  "Consult your Internet provider if the SMTP Server is called "
  "something other than the above."


If you have installed and ran your TCP/IP stack before you installed
AEMail, the only configuration parameter you may have to provide is your
password.  If you are using TermiteTCP, the POP3 UserID and the SMTP Domain
Name are extracted from the email address that you gave TermiteTCP.  Other
stacks provide environmental variables to store this information.  If these
are not the correct values you will have to change them in either with the
Installation script or through the Identity page of the Configuration
Setup Window.

One of the things that is needed to run AEMail is an editor.  By default
AEMail will use the AmigaDOS editor, ed, which comes with all Amigas.
However, you can change this through the install to any editor that you
want provided that you have specified that you want to configure AEMail
when you do the install.

                           Other Considerations
                           --------------------

If you are using Miami as your TCP/IP software, special startnet.miami and
stopnet.miami scripts have been provided with the install of AEMail.  If
you select Miami as your TCP/IP stack and the Miami assign is present, the
install script assumes the Miami startnet and stopnet scripts should be
used.

If you are using AmiTCP, that software provides its own StartNet and
StopNet scripts.  They are usually in your AmiTCP:bin directory.  It is
recommended that you place AEMail in the same directory that contains these
AmiTCP StartNet and StopNet scripts, although this is not an absolute
requirement.  If AEMail is placed in a different directory, you might have
to modify these scripts to work properly.  If the directory containing your
StartNet or StopNet scripts is NOT the AmiTCP:bin directory or the scripts
have names different from "startnet" or "stopnet", you will have to change
the default values for the STARTNET and STOPNET tool types.  You can do
that with the installation script.

If you are using TermiteTCP, there are no Start Net or Stop Net scripts.

SPECIAL NOTE FOR MIAMI USERS:  In the TCP/IP Settings page on Miami, the
"Down when Offline" item should be checked and the settings SAVED.  If this
item is not checked, it will take AEMail 80 seconds to determine that Miami
is offline if Miami is loaded but not online.

WARNING:  If you are updating and you change the mail directory for a
specific user, you will lose all previous folder configuration data.  You
might also lose your registration information if you are a registered user.
In versions prior to 2.00, the registration information was stored in your
mail directory.  Version 2.00 and later stores it in the AEMail program
directory.  The installation script will attempt to copy this information
from the mail directory to the program directory.  If the installation
script can not find your old mail directory (usually by the AEMail:  assign
statement, you will need to copy this data yourself from your old
mail directory to the new mail directory.

The mail directory can start out empty.  The AEMail program will generate
any necessary configuration and support files required.  The mail directory
directory can be anywhere on any one of your hard drive partitions (or on a
floppy or other read/writable media); it does not have to be in any
specific directory; but it must be mounted when you execute AEMail.

As stated above, you will need a "mailcap" file if you want to display MIME
mail attachments.  A sample mailcap file is provided on the AEMail program
disk which uses MultiView to display audio, images, and video content types
provided that you have the appropriate datatypes loaded into your system.
This, of course, requires AmigaDos 3.0 or higher.  If you are using
AmigaDos 2.1, the mailcap file needs to be modified to reflect the display
programs that you want.  The installation script at the Expert level will
help you do this or you can do this with the "Viewer" page of the
Configuration Setup Window.

If you are running under AmigaDos 3.0 or higher, the installation script
will automatically move the supplied mailcap file to the mail directory
for each user unless a mailcap file already exists there or unless you
specified a different location for a pre-existing mailcap file (Expert
level only).

The mailcap file specifications are given in AEMail documentation and guide
files.

A special mailcap file is provided in the "ARexx" drawer to allow you to
display HTML attachments with your browser.  If you wish to use this
feature you will have to copy the mailcap file in the ARexx drawer to your
mail directory.  This can be done with the installation script at the
Expert level.  Read the html.readme file in the ARexx drawer for details of
this special mailcap file.

The mailcap file can also be created or edited online with AEMail through
the "Viewer" page of the Configuration Setup Window.

AEMail gets the current time zone from either the locale.prefs file that
is part of AmigaDos or the tz envronmental variable.  See "Handling of
Time Zones" below for further information on this.

When the installation script terminates it will store the directory in
which it placed AEMail in the Environmental variable "AEMail_dir".  It also
creates an assign statement in your User Startup for the AEMail program
directory called AEMail2:.  Starting with version 2.00 it will also store
the version number of the current AEMail in the environmental variable
"AEMail_Ver".  This facilitates updating to future releases of AEMail.
The version 1.30 and later installation scripts, at all installation
levels, will look for the AEMail_dir Environmental variable to try to
determine where to place AEMail.

                     Setting the Time Zone for AEMail
                     --------------------------------

AEMail will handle time zones in both full hour and half hour increments.
AEMail uses either the "tz" environmental variable, a special "aem_tz"
environomental variable, or the "locale.prefs" file that is part of
AmigaDos to determine your local time zone.  The "locale.prefs" file will
only allow for full hour time zone offsets.  You can use the "tz"
environmental variable for half hour time zones, but, if this variable is
used by other programs in your system it is suggested that you use the
"aem_tz" variable instead.

To set the time zone in the "locale.prefs" file, execute the Locale
program under your Prefs directory by double clicking on the Locale icon.
At the bottom right of the Locale Preferences window you will see a world
map with a white line through it that indicates the time zone that you are
in.  To change this, click on the country you are in.  The white line will
move to that position and the Time Zone heading at the top of the map will
reflect the time zone offset for your part of the world.  Then click on
the [Save] gadget at the bottom of the window.

Currently AEMail first looks for the environmental variables "aem_tz" or
"tz".  The format for "tz" is dictated by SAS_C and should be aaabbbccc
where aaa is the abbreviation for local standard time, bbb is the offset
in hours from GMT (-11 to 12) which is SUBTRACTED from GMT to get the
local standard time.  ccc is the abbreviation for local daylight savings
time or "summer time" (in the United Kingdom or Europe).  If the time zone
has daylight savings time this should be present even if daylight savings
time is not currently in effect (contrary to the specification for "Tz"
for the SAS-C compiler).  AEMail automatically determines when DST or
"Summer Time" is in effect.

AEMail also recognizes an alternate form of "tz" where aaa and ccc can be
abreviations longer than 3 characters.  This is desireable in some
European countries.  AEMail will also recognize time zones in increments
of one half hour.  To specify an half hour time zone, specify it as + or -
hhmm.  As an example:  +230 would specify a time zone in which 2 and a
half hours are SUBTRACTED from GMT.

You can enter the above with the "tz" environmental variable, but since
this variable might be used with other programs in it's strict sense, an
alternate environmental variable has been provided called "aem_tz".

If "aem_tz" is present it will take precedence over "tz".

If the "tz" or "aem_tz" environmental variables are not present, the
system then attempts to get the time zone offset from the "locale.prefs"
file.  Only the time zone offset is present in this file.  The
abbreviations for local standard time and daylight savings time are
obtained from a table that is by no means complete.  Only the time zone
abbreviations for the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom are
contained in this table, so one of the environmental variables is
preferred.

if neither the "tz" nor "aem_tz" environmental variables nor the
"locale.prefs" file are present, the system defaults to CST with an offset
of 6.

NOTE:  the standard header in an email message has the time zone offset
sign reversed from that of the "locale.prefs" and the environmental
variables.  AEMail automatically makes this reversal, so the offset should
be set to positive for US time zones and negative for European time zones.
They will appear as negative (for US) and positive (for Europe) in the
Date:  header.

You can set the "tz" or the "aem_tz" environmental variables by using the
SETENV AmigaDos Command.  This must be done from the shell.  The syntax to
use is as follows:

    SETENV tz aaabbbccc                            (for tz) and
    SETENV aem_tz aaaaaaaaabbbbbccccccccc          (for aem_tz)

aaa, your local time zone abbreviation must always be present.  If you
don't know your abbreviation (or don't want it in the header), use "xxx".
If AEMail sees xxx it will assume that no abbreviation is present and it
will be left off the Date:  header

bbb is the time offset in hours from GMT.  Plus indicates that you are
west of GMT and minus indicates that you are east of GMT.  Acceptable
values are -12 to 24.  If you want to specify a half our time zone it can
be entered as hhmm.  If AEMail sees a value of 30 or above it assumes that
a half hour increment is being used.  In this case -1200 to 2400 are
acceptable.

If your time zone observes daylight savings time, ccc is the abbreviation
to use for daylight savings time.  If ccc is not present, no adjustment
will be made during the times of the year that daylight savings time is
observed.

The result of the SETENV command is only in effect while your computer is
on.  If you want to make the "tz"or "aem_tz" environmental variables
always present enter the one of the following AmigaDOS command after the
SETENV command:

    COPY ENV:tz ENVARC:tz                          (or)
    COPY ENV:aem_tz ENVARC:aem_tz

Using the "tz" or "aem_tz" environmental variables gives you more control
over which abbreviations will be used for your time zone.  However, the
locale.prefs file may be more useful for those that prefer the "point and
click" method of doing things.  To set the correct time zone for
locale.prefs, enter the Locale editor in your Prefs drawer.  You will see
a time zone map with which you can move the white strip indicating the
time zone on the map.  Click either to the left or right of the strip to
move the strip.  The correct time zone offset for standard time will be
shown at the top of the map.

Since the locale.prefs does not have any abbreviations, AEMail makes
certain assumptions as to what the abbreviation should be.  These
assumptions are as follows:

Time Zone Name           Standard    DST  -----------Time Zone-----------
                         Time             (in "locale")  (in email Date:)

Greenwich Mean Time      GMT*        BST       0              +0000

Atlantic Time            AST         ADT       4              -0400
Eastern Time (US)        EST         EDT       5              -0500
Central Time (US)        CST         CDT       6              -0600
Mountain Time (US)       MST         MDT       7              -0700
Pacific Time (US)        PST         PDT       8              -0800
Yukon Time               YST         YDT       9              -0900
Hawaiian Time            HST         ---      10              -1000

International Date Line  IDL         ---      12              -1200

--- indicates this time zone does not observe DST

*Note:  GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) is also known as UTC or Universal Time
Coordinated.

If you want to use a different abbreviation or control whether DST is used
or not, you should use the "tz" or "aem_tz" environmental variable.

DST in the United States and Canada begins on the first Sunday in April.

"Summer Time" in the United Kingdom and Europe begins on the last Sunday
in March.

Both DST and "Summer Time" end on the last Sunday in October.

                            IV. CONFIGURATION

The configuration of AEMail is provided by parameters presented as
Tool Types in the AEMail icon or by a Configuration Setup Window
that can be called up from within AEMail using the
"Project/Configuratio/Edit.." menu item.  All configuration items provided
by Tool Types can also be provided by the Configuration Setup Window with
the exception of the MAIL_DIR=, the CONFIG=, and the PASSPROTECT=
Tool Types.  These three Tool Types have special uses, as explained below,
that can not be duplicated by the Configuration Setup Window; but they are
set during the installation of AEMail.

You will also find that if you want to change your ARexx port name, that
can only be done with the AREXXPORT= Tool Type.  Adding this Tool Type must
be done manually, since it is not possible to do it with the Installation
script.

Certain configuration parameters can ONLY be provided by the Configuration
Setup Window.

Currently, setting the time zone that you are in is done outside the
AEMail environment.  To set the time zone for AEMail see "HANDLING OF TIME
ZONES IN AEMAIL" above.

If you are running AEMail from the shell or as a "mailto:" agent, it must
be either pre-configured with the S:aemail.cnfg file or you will
have to specify the config= parameter on the AEMail call line.  You can
specify an alternate configuration file (other than S:aemail.cnfg) by
using the config= parameter on the AEMail call line.  Also, the
configuration file you use must be present or AEMail will be unable to
find the mail directory.  Tool types used in a program's icon are not
available from the shell; however, a mail_dir= parameter is provided on
the shell call line to allow the mail directory to be specified.

The first thing AEMail does when it is activated is check to see that
certain configuration information has been provided either through Tool
Types or as contained in the AEMail configuration file.  The necessary
items are:

    POP3 UserID
    Password
    From Addr (your email address)
    POP Server
    SMTP Server
    Domain Name
    Edit Call


If any of these items are missing, the following requester will be
displayed:

    The following Configuration items are empty

    [list of empty items]

    They are required items!


The Edit Call item, if it is missing, will default to:

    C:ed %s

with the editor opening on the Workbench.  The only way the Edit Call can
appear in the list is if the General Parameters page of the Configuration
Setup Window had been entered and the Edit call field cleared.

If this requester is displayed, you will be given the following choices:

       [Configure AEMAIL now]               [Cancel AEMAIL]

If you were to click on [Cancel AEMAIL], AEMail will terminate.  You can
not proceed any further until you have entered these items with the
Configuration Setup Window or by providing them as Tool Types.

Clicking on the [Configure AEMAIL now] will bring up the Configuration
Setup Window which is described below following the description of the Tool
Types.

Also, if "Mail Directory" appears in the list of empty items, it means
that the the MAIL_DIR Tool Type has not been given.  Even though the mail
directory will be displayed on the Configuration Setup Window, there is no
way you can provide this information through the Configuration Setup
Window.  You will have to add the MAIL_DIR Tool Type.  If you use the
standard install script, this should never be necessary.

The three Tool Types, MAIL_DIR=, CONFIG=, and PASSPROTECT=YES have special
uses.  CONFIG= is used to specify the configuration file that AEMail is to
open with.  If AEMail is called from the shell, s:aemail.cnfg will be used
as the configuration file for the shell invocation of AEMail unless the
config= parameter is used in the shell call.  You must have executed
AEMail at least once from the workbench with the CONFIG= tool type
pointing to s:aemail.cnfg for this file to be created.

MAIL_DIR= is used to specify the mail directory that this user will use.
When the configuration file is first created, this directory will be
stored in that file and if AEMail is called from the shell without a
mail_dir= parameter in the call line the configuration file defaults to
the mail directory stored in s:aemail.cnfg.

PASSPROTECT=YES is used to password protect AEMail when you click on it's
icon.  Using this Tool Type will call up a requester as soon as you load
AEMail which will force you to enter the password that was configured for
that instance of the configuration file.  The PASSPROTECT=YES condition is
not stored in the configuration file but is only obtained from the Tool
Type and therefor is not effective when AEMail is called from the shell.

The Installation script will take care of providing all of the Tool Types
necessary so it will not be necessary to add them manually.

If you have two or more users of AEMail on the same system and you want
each user to have different locations for their mail files, you can
establish an alternate location for the mail directories.  To do this, you
will have to have two different AEMail Project icons with different names
if they are in the same directory.  You can still have only one AEMail
executable, however.

With AEMail 2.xx, all of the icons will have to be "Project" icons and
they will be automatically created by the Installation script.  It is
recommended that you use the Installation script to establish, update, or
add users.  Once you have installed the AEMail executables, the Install
script will give you the option of only configuring your users.

If you are updating from a previous version of AEMail, you will already
have a "tool" icon called "AEMail".  If you choose to, you can create an
icon with a different name for your primary user or leave the primary
user's icon as "AEMail".  If you choose to keep "AEMail" as your primary
user's icon, this icon will be changed to a Project icon.

If you want password protection (only available to registered AEMail
users) you should also add the Tool Type PASSPROTECT=YES through the
Installation script.  Do this for each user that you want to password
protect.  Password protection is not available if you call AEMail from the
shell.

Please Note:  The Project icon will also inherit the Tool Types from any
icon named "AEMail" even if it is only a Project icon; however, if there
is an identical Tool Type, the current Project icon's Tool Type will take
precedence.

WARNING:  If you are updating and you decide to use a different name for
the primary user's icon, the AEMail old Tool icon will remain.  Do not
delete this icon from the workbench after you have installed AEMail or you
will delete the AEMail executable along with it.  This is true even if the
icon has been changed to a Project icon.  If you are going to use a
different name, delete the AEMail icon BEFORE installing AEMail 2.xx.

                                TOOL TYPES

Tool Types have been provided to initially provide certain Configuration
information when AEMail is first activated without the need to build the
Configuration information through the Configuration Setup Window.

To modify or delete any specific Tool Type, select the AEMail icon and
then select the "Information" item from the Workbench menu.  You will have
to select the appropiate Tool Type and modify it when it appears in the
string gadget below the Tool Type list.

The Installation script will handle Tool Type creation and updating
automatically with the exception of the AREXXPORT= and HELP= Tool Types.
If you need to add these Tool Types, it must be done manually.  There are
default actions that are automatically performed by AEMail if these Tool
Types are missing (see the desciption of each of these Tool Types to see
what the default action is).  Also, the FLDRFONT= and FLDRFONSZ= Tool
Types are not handled by the Installation script since the action of these
Tool Types, unlike AREXXPORT= and HELP=, can be performed by the Fonts
Page of the Configuration Setup Window.

The current Tool Types utilized by the program are:

INTERLACE=YES

This Tool Type is now obsolete, and, if used, will have no effect.  It was
used to open the AEMail Public Screen (AEMAIL-1) in hires, interlace mode.
AEMail has been changed so that initially it will open in the same screen
mode as the Workbench screen.

You can actually have more control over the Screen Mode you desire by
selecting the [Set Screen Mode] button in the AEMail Configuration:
General Parameters configuration display.

MAIL_DIR=directory-path

This Tool Type is required to assign your mail directory.  This is a
required Tool Type and CAN NOT be provided with the Configuration Setup
Window.

The Installation script automatically handles providing this Tool Type.


CONFIG=configuration-file

If you do not care to use the standard s:aemail.cnfg file for your
configuration data, but want a file named something else or in a different
location, you can use this tool type.  When AEMail opens it will look here
for the configuration file.  YOU MUST PRECEDE THE FILE NAME WITH THE FULL
PATH NAME.  This parameter CAN NOT be provided with the Configuration
Setup Window, although the initial file can be created, saved, and edited from
the "Project/Configuration" menu.  (DEFAULTS TO s:aemail.cnfg)

This Tool Type is automatically created by the Installation script.


MAILCAP_DIR=directory-path

This Tool Type is now obsolete.  The mailcap file will always reside in
the mail directory for any particular user.

The mailcap file must be called "mailcap".  Since the mailcap file follows
a standard format dictated by the internet (RFC 1524), you can use the
same mailcap file used by another process.  The Installation script will
handle copying this mailcap to your mail directory if you install at the
expert level.

You can change the contents of the mailcap file with the Viewer Page of
the Configuration Setup Window.


USERID=UserId

Enter your POP3 UserId for signing onto your POP Server on your Internet
provider (ISP).  This may be the same as the one initially used to sign
into your ISP.  It is also very possibly (but not always) the part of your
email address that precedes the @ sign.  Check with your ISP for what
should be used.

Example: my UserId is "jzachar" so I would enter

    USERID=jzachar

for this Tool Type.  THIS IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided
with the Configuration Setup Window.


PASSWRD=your_password

Enter the password required for signing onto your POP3 server.  This may
or not be the same as that used to sign onto your Internet provider.  THIS
IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided with the Configuration
Setup Window.

SPECIAL NOTE:  if the password is provided by a Tool Type it can be read
by anyone that performs an "Information" on the AEMail icon.  If you
provide the password through the Configuration Setup Window, it can not be seen.


PASSPROTECT=YES (registered users only)

Use this Tool Type if you want to password protect your mail directory.
This will call up a special password window when you first load AEMail
which will require you to enter your password before you procede.  You
will be given three chances to enter the correct password.  If the
password fails validation after the third try, AEMail will terminate.
This Tool Type is ignored for unregistered users.

The Password that is used is the one required for signing onto your POP3
server (see above).

DOMAIN=Domain_Name

Enter the Domain name used by your Internet provider's SMTP server.  It
very possibly is the same as the Domain part of your email address (the
part following the @ sign)

Example:  my Internet provider's domain name is "calweb.com" so I would
enter

    DOMAIN=calweb.com

for this Tool Type.  THIS IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided
with the Configuration Setup Window.


FROM=your_email_address

Enter your FULL email address (i.e.  user@domain).  This is email address
that you are known by on the Internet.

Example:  my email address is "[e-mail]" so I would enter

    FROM=[e-mail]

for this tool type.  THIS IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided
with the Identity Page of the Configuration Setup Window.  If it is
missing it defaults to UserID@Domain.  This default action may NOT be
correct for your situation, so be sure to change it if required to.


REALNAME=your_real_name

Enter your full name.  Example:

    REALNAME=John Zacharias

This is an OPTIONAL parameter, but if it is omitted your full name will
NOT be provided in the FROM:  address of any messages you send unless you
add it yourself when you compose a message.  This parameter can also be
provided with the Identity page of the Configuration Setup Window.


REPLYTO=reply-email-address

This is the email address that you want all replies directed to.  This may
be the same as your FROM email address or it can be a different address if
you want replies sent somewhere else.  This is an OPTIONAL parameter and
can also be provided with the Identity page of the Configuration Setup
Window.

The standard REPLY-TO address provided here can also be modified each time
you compose a message to send.


ORGANIZATION=organization-name

This parameter is OPTIONAL and, if present, will provide an Organization:
header for any message that you compose and send.  This parameter can also
be provided with the Identity page of the Configuration Setup Window.


POP_SERVER=your_POP_host

Enter the name of your POP host.  This sometimes is "pop." or "mail."
prepended to your Domain name.  As an example, mine is "pop.calweb.com" so
I would enter

    POP_SERVER=pop.calweb.com

If this parameter is omitted, "pop.[domain-name]" will be generated as
your POP_SERVER name provided a domain name has been specified.  If your's
uses a different name you should use this Tool Type or change it with the
Configuration Setup Window.

This parameter can also be provided by the Identity page of the
Configuration Setup Window.


SMTP_SERVER=your_SMTP_host

Enter the name of your SMTP host.  This sometimes is "smtp."
or "mail." prepended to your Domain name.  As an example,
mine is "smtp.calweb.com" so I would enter

    SMTP_SERVER=smtp.calweb.com

If this parameter is omitted, "smtp.[domain-name]" will be generated as
your SMTP_SERVER name provided a domain name has been specified.  If
your's uses a differnt name you should use this Tool Type or change it
with the Configuration Setup Window.

This parameter can also be provided by the Identity page of the
Configuration Setup Window.


EDITOR=call_line_for_your_editor

Enter the full call parameter required to activate your editor from the
shell.  Use "%s" where you would place the file name.

You are no longer restricted to an editor call that does not remain in
control when you call it as you were with previous versions of AEMail.  In
other words, a direct call to CygnusEd (CED) is acceptable.

If your editor opens on the workbench screen rather than a screen of its
own, you should prepend "WB;" in front of your editor call.  As an
example, the standard AmigaDos ED program always opens on the workbench
screen.  An example edit call for the Amiga ED would be as follows:

    EDITOR=WB;c:ed %s WINDOW raw:0/0/640/400/AEMailCompose

The window statement in the above call is used to create a full screen
window with an interlaced display.

If you are not using an interlaced display you can remove the WINDOW
parameter or change it to raw:0/0/640/200/AEMailCompose.  You can, of
course, make other changes to the window parameters if you desire.

If you are using the Amiga ED you should probably also remove or rename
the ED-Startup file in the S:  directory so that you will have a full set
of ED menus.

If this Tool Type is missing, the following call is the default editor
call:

    EDITOR=WB;c:ed %s

This defaults to using the Amiga Ed program for your editor.

The specification for your editor call can also be provided by the
General Parameters page of the Configuration Setup Window.  A convenient
check mark item is provided in the Configuration Setup Window to open the
editor on the Workbench screen.


TCPLOG=name_of_log_file

Enter the full path, including the file name, of your TCP logging file.
If this parameter is omitted, it defaults to "tcplog" in the directory
AEMail is loaded from.

This parameter does not start TCP logging, it only establishes the name of
the TCPLOG file.  Logging can be started or stopped at any time by a menu
item (see Section VII.  AEMAIL MENUS - TCP Logging File under the TCP/IP
menu).  The Logging file can be active when AEMail is started through a
parameter in a Configuration Setup Window item.

When TCP logging is active, all sends and receives over the TCP/IP
connection are recorded to this file.  Each time an AEMail session is
started and logging is active, data is appended to this file.  As a result
this file can become quite large.  IT IS THE USER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO
PERIODICALLY PURGE (DELETE) THIS FILE.  A menu item is provided to perform
this purge and another item to display the log file with your editor from
within AEMail.

NOTE:  When there is a need to report a problem, especially with your
TCP/IP connection, the TCP Logging file should be set active and a copy of
the resultant file provided with any feedback on the program activity (see
Section XI, Bug Reports & Suggestions).  The file can be sent as an
attachment to any message that you send to AEMail.  You probably should
compress the file with LHA before attaching it as an "Applicatio/Octet
Stream" content type with "encoded binary" encoding.

I have discovered that this file comes in handy when analysing problems
with your Internet provider since it time stamps all entries to the
nearest second.

This parameter can also be provided by the Default Path Parameters
page of the Configuration Setup Window.


DELETEMAIL=YES

This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Delete Host Mail" menu item
under the RETRIEVE MESSAGES menu.  If this Tool Type is entered, the
"Delete Host Mail" menu item will be initially checked.  See the "Delete
Host Mail" item under section VII.  AEMAIL MENUS below.

This parameter can also be set by the General Parameters page of the
Configuration Setup Window or the DELETEMAIL flag can be set with the
"Delete Host Mail" menu item and its state can be saved in the
configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
item.


FULLHEADER=YES

This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Display Full Header" menu
item under the MESSAGES menu.  If this Tool Type is entered, the "Display
Full Header" menu item will be initially checked.  See the "Display Full
Header" item under section VII.  AEMAIL MENUS below.

This parameter can also be set by the General Parameters page of the
Configuration Setup Window or the FULLHEADER flag can be set with the
"Display Full Header" menu item and its state can be saved in the
configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
item.


STRIPDUPS=YES

This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Exclude Duplicate Messages"
menu item under the RETRIEVE MESSAGES menu.  If this Tool Type is entered,
the "Exclude Duplicate Messages" menu item will be initially checked.  See
the "Exclude Duplicate Messages" item under section VII.  AEMAIL MENUS
below.

This parameter can also be set by the General Parameters page of the
Configuration Setup Window or the STRIPDUPS flag can be set with the
"Exclude Duplicate Messages" menu item and its state can be saved in the
configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
item.


HDRINREPLY=YES

This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Include Header in Response"
menu item under the MESSAGES menu.  If this Tool Type is entered, the
"Include Header in Response" menu item will be initially checked.  See
the "Include Header in Response" item under section VII.  AEMAIL MENUS
below.

This parameter can also be set by the General Parameters page of the
Configuration Setup Window or the HDRINREPLY flag can be set with the
"Include Header in Response" menu item and its state can be saved in the
configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
item.


STARTNET=call_line_for_your_startnet_script

This Tool Type is used to specify the call line for your script that
starts up your TCP/IP stack.  If you are using AmiTCP, this is normally
the file "startnet" in the AMITCP:bin directory.  If you are using Miami,
an AREXX script has been provided with the AEMail archive called
"startnet.miami" and it is located in the AEMail program directory.

A full path name to that script must be entered.  If the script is an
AREXX script it should be preceded with "rx " (a space is between the rx
and the script name).  The standard AmiTCP startnet script is NOT an AREXX
script even though it uses AREXX commands.  It is an AmigaDOS script.  The
Miami script, on the other hand, is an AREXX script.

If you do not use the STARTNET Tool Type, AEMail assumes that you do not
have a script.  If you activate the "Start Net" item in the TCP/IP menu
and you don't have a startnet script, AEMail's action is to iconify and
allow you to manually start your TCP/IP stack.  Connect using the method
prescribed by your TCP/IP stack.  When you un-iconify AEMail, AEMail will
immediately check to see if any mail is present on your POP server.

If you are using a TCP/IP stack that can't use a script (such as
TermiteTCP) or you have no script to make connection to your Internet
provider, then this Tool Type should not be used.  Then if you select the
StartNet menu item, the system will automatically iconify AEMail and
present the Workbench screen.

Since AmiTCP Demo Version 4.0 puts up a requester on the workbench screen
that must be responded to, AEMail will automatically switch to the
Workbench screen before calling this script.  Although the Miami script
does not require manual intervention, the default action is to also switch
to the Workbench screen since this allows you to see the action of the
dialer.  When the connection has been made using Miami, the screen will
automatically switch back to the AEMail screen.

The Start Net script can also be set by the TCP/IP page of the
Configuration Setup Window.  The Configuration Setup Window will also
allow you to set whether or not the system switches to the Workbench
screen when the Start Net script is executed.

Note:  Check your startnet script to be sure that full path names are
specified.  If you are using the standard AmiTCP startnet script, that
script will not be executed from the Amitcp:bin directory if AEMail is in
another directory.  Therefor, you should verify that Amitcp:bin/ is
prepended to all calls to functions within the AmiTCP/bin directory within
the script.  Pay particular attention to the "online" call - it should be
AmiTCP:bin/online.


STOPNET=call_line_for_your_stopnet_script

This Tool Type is used to specify the call line for your script that
terminates your TCP/IP connection.  If you are using AmiTCP, this is
normally the file "stopnet" in the AMITCP:bin directory.  If you are using
Miami, an AREXX script has been provided with the AEMail archive called
"stopnet.miami" and it is located in the AEMail program directory.

A full path name to that script must be entered.  If the script is an
AREXX script it should be preceded with "rx " (a space between the rx and
the script name).  The standard AmiTCP startnet script is NOT an AREXX
script even though it uses AREXX commands.  It is an AmigaDOS script.  The
Miami script, on the other hand, is an AREXX script.

If you do not use the STOPNET Tool Type, AEMail assumes that you you do
not have a script.  If you activate the "Stop Net" item in the TCP/IP menu
and you don't have a stopnet script, AEMail's action is to iconify and
allow you to manually stop your TCP/IP stack.  You can then disconnect
using the method prescribed by your TCP/IP stack.  When you un-iconify
AEMail, AEMail will test to see if you are, in fact, disconnected.

If you are using a TCP/IP stack that can't use a script (such as
TermiteTCP) or you have no script to terminate your connection to your
Internet provider, then this Tool Type should not be used.  Then if you
select the Stop Net menu item, the system will automatically iconify
AEMail and present the Workbench screen.

The Stop Net script can also be set by the TCP/IP page of the
Configuration Setup Window.  The Configuration Setup Window will also
allow you to set whether or not the system switches to the Workbench
screen when the Stop Net script is executed.  Since terminating your
connection with a script usually does not require any visual interaction,
the default action is to NOT switch to the Workbench screen.

Note:  Check your stopnet script to be sure that full path names are
specified.  If you are using the standard AmiTCP stopnet script, that
script will not be executed from the Amitcp:bin directory if AEMail is in
another directory.  Therefor, you should verify that Amitcp:bin/ is
prepended to all calls to functions within the AmiTCP/bin directory within
the script.  Pay particular attention to the "offline" call - it should be
AmiTCP:bin/offline.


AUTOCONNECT=YES

When AEMail is first activated it attempts to determine if you are
connected to your Internet provider.  If you are not and this Tool Type is
present, AEMail will automatically run your StartNet script.

Before activating this Tool Type, you should check to see if AEMail can
activate your TCP/IP stack properly using the StartNet menu item.  If
there are any problems with your StartNet activation they will show up at
this time rather than constantly every time you try to activate AEMail.

WARNING:  You should not use this Tool Type if a StartNet script is not
present for your TCP/IP stack.  You should activate your TCP/IP stack
manually before you start AEMail.

You can also set the AUTOCONNECT flag with the TCP/IP Parameters page
of the Configuration Setup Window.


FLDRFONT=fontname

This allows the user to specify their own font for the folder strip.
Since the size of the folders in the folder strip is constrained by the
size of the font that you use, you can specify a different font and font
size (see FLDRFONTSZ= below) to reduce the size of the folder strip.  If
not specified the folder font will default to the standard Topaz 8 font.
When you enter the font name it is entered WITHOUT the .font suffix and it
must be found in your FONTS: directory.

If you use FLDRFONT= without FLDRFONTSZ=, the resulting font will be the
one you specify at the 8 size.  If no such size exists in your FONTS:
directory, it will be computed.  This can sometimes be unsatisfactory.

This parameter can also be set with the Fonts page of the Configuration
Setup Window.


FLDRFONTSZ=fontsize

This Tool Type is used in conjuction with the FLDRFONT= Tool Type
described above.  These two Tool Types allow the user to specify their own
font and font size for the folder strip.  Since the size of the folders in
the folder strip is constrained by the size of the font that you use, you
can specify a different font and font size to reduce the size of the
folder strip.  If not specified the folder font will default to the
standard Topaz 8 font.

If you use FLDRFONTSZ= without FLDRFONT=, the resulting font will be Topaz
with a computed font size corresponding to this parameter

This parameter can also be set with the Fonts page of the Configuration
Setup Window.


AREXXPORT=portname

This Tool Type will allow you to change the default ARexx Port Name.  By
default the ARexx Port Name is "AEMAIL1".  A "1" will be appended to
whatever port name you specify unless that port is already active in your
system.  In this event a number next in sequence will be appended to the
port name.

The ARexx Port Name will be shown in the About message obtained with the
"About" item under the Project Menu.

This parameter can only be provided with a Tool Type.


HELP=full-path-name-to-"AEMail.guide"-file

This Tool Type will allow you to change the default AEMail.guide path
name.  You should include the file name of the guide file.  By default the
"AEMail.guide" path name is "AEMail2:documentation/AEMail.guide".  If you
are using the default path name you do not have to use this tool type.

If AEMail can not find the help file, it will display a requester like
this when you first load AEMail:

                     Error: (AG) Can't Open database!

                                [Continue]

You can continue without the guide file, but the [Help] key will be
deactivated.

This parameter can only be provided with a Tool Type.

                        CONFIGURATION SETUP WINDOW

The Configuration setup window is displayed in the center of the AEMail
screen whenever you click on either the [Configure AEMAIL now] button or
when you select the "Project/Configuration/Edit" menu item.  The
configuration setup is divided into seven pages with the page name shown
with a tab at the top of the page area.  When you click on any one tab,
that tab will stand out and become bold and the appropriate page will be
displayed.

The seven pages are:

    Identity
    TCP/IP
    Paths
    Viewer
    ARexx
    Fonts
    General

When the Configuration Setup Window first opens, the Identity page will be
displayed and the first string gadget ("POP3 User ID") will be activated.
However, when you bring up another page by clicking into the tab for that
page (or using the tab hot key), the first string gadget on that page will
not be activated.  You will have to click into one of the string gadgets
to activate it.  From then on the tab and shift tab keys will work
correctly for going between string gadgets.

You will also have to re-activate the string gadgets after pressing the
[Help] key.

You will notice that several of the gadgets have underlined characters.
These are hot keys that you can use to activate the gadget rather than
clicking on the gadget.  If a string gadget is currently activated, the
hot keys will not work since it will be interpreted as a key being entered
into the string.  You can always hit return when you have finished
entering something in the string gadget and the hot keys will now be
available.

You can also use the tab key to go the next string gadget while a string
gadget is active (indicated by the cursor in the gadget).  Shift tab will
go to the previous string gadget.  Besides the normal editing keys used
for strings, each string can also copy to the clipboard (RIGHT AMIGA 'c'),
copy from the keyboard (RIGHT AMIGA 'v'), and change clipboard units
(RIGHT AMIGA 'u' and 'U') (see also "Editing String Entry Gadgets" under
Section V USING AEMAIL).

Additional editing keys have also been provided just for the Configuration
Setup Window string gadgets.  This are:  RIGHT AMIGA 'd' which will bring
the default entry into the string; RIGHT AMIGA 'f' which will bring up the
file requester for those strings that have a file requester associated
with them; and RIGHT AMIGA 'p' for the "POP3 UserId" string gadget on the
Identity page to bring up the "Set Password" requester.

At the bottom of the Configuration Setup Window is a row of buttons as
follows:


[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]


Clicking on any one of these buttons (or using the appropriate hot key)
will perform the requested action, regardless of which page you are on,
and return you to the current AEMail window.

If you want the configuration information to apply only to the current
AEMail session select [USE].  If you want to make the configuration
permanent, select [SAVE].  This will cause a new configuration file to be
written over the current active configuration file.

The configuration file is the file specified in the CONFIG= tool type for
the Project icon you selected to load AEMail.  However, if you opened
another configuration file with the "Project/Configuration/Open..." menu
item, that configuration file will be the current active one.

The [SAVE AS] button does the same as [SAVE] except that a file requester
will be displayed that will allow you to rename and place the
configuration file anywhere you wish.  WARNING:  when you use the [SAVE
AS] button, AEMail assumes that that file is now your active configuration
file and any saves occuring after that will be to that file.

To return to the base configuration (the CONFIG= file), use the
"Project/Configuration/Restore Default" menu item.

WARNING:  Any Open or Save As operations are made to what is termed
"shared" configurations.  These are configurations that generally DO NOT
HAVE a project icon and share the same mail directory (each use the same
folder setup).  You should not open a configuration that has a different
mail directory.

When AEMail opens it will always use the base configuration file specified
in the CONFIG= Tool Type.  To change this specification, you will have to
do this manually or use the Installation script which handles setting the
CONFIG= Tool Type automatically.

[CANCEL] will abort the operation without making any changes to the
configuration information.

The [USE], [SAVE], [SAVE AS] or [CANCEL] buttons are active no matter
which configuration page is currently active.  When the Configuration
Setup Window is first activated, the Identity page will be active.

Before exiting from the Configuration Setup Window with [USE], [SAVE], or
[SAVE AS] the required configuration parameters must be present.  If not,
the following requester will be displayed:

    The following Configuration items are empty

    [list of empty items]

    They are required items!

This is the same requester that is displayed when AEMail is started
without these parameters being provided.  Your choices with this requester
are:

    [Reenter Configuration Data]   [Cancel Configuration Request]

Clicking on the [Cancel Configuraion Request] will act the same as if you
clicked on [CANCEL] in the main Configuration Setup Window.  In this event
your "old" configuration data will still be active and if you did not have
the required parameters in the first place, you will not be able to do
anything but enter the data or exit from AEMail.

The one exception to the "old" configuration remaining the same is with
the .headers file.  This is always updated no matter which button is
pressed.


                              Identity Page
                              -------------

The Identity page appears as follows:

=========================================================================
[o] AEMail Configuration Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ----------
 | Identity |___________________________________________________________
|                                                                       |
|         POP3 UserID: [                  ][CLR][DEFAULT] [Set Password]|
|                                                                       |
|From (email) Address: [                                 ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|    Reply To Address: [                                 ][CLR]{DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|           Real Name: [                                 ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|        Organization: [                                 ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|          POP Server: [                                 ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|         SMTP Server: [                                 ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|         Domain Name: [                                 ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|_______________________________________________________________________|

[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]

=========================================================================

When this page is first called up, values from the Tool Types or the
current configuration file (which ever takes precedence) will be displayed
in each of the string gadgets.

Appropriate information can be entered into each of the string gadgets. Up
to 99 characters can be entered in each of the string gadgets.

The buttons to the side of each string gadget perform the following
actions:

    [CLR] will cause the string gadget to be cleared.
          (string edit key: RIGHT AMIGA 'x')

    [DEFAULT] (string edit key:  RIGHT AMIGA 'd') will cause default
        information to be loaded into the string gadgets as follows:

            POP3 UserID: information from the USERID= Tool Type if
                present; otherwise it will use information from the
                USER environmental variable or by parsing the
                ttcp-email-address environmental variable created
                by Termite-TCP.
            Domain Name: Information from the DOMAIN= Tool Type if
                present; otherwise it will use information from either
                the DOMAIN or DOMAINNAME environmental variable or
                by parsing the ttcp-email-address environmental
                variable created by Termite-TCP.
            From Address: information from the FROM= Tool Type if
                present; otherwise, if a Domain Name is present, it
                will be the combination UserID@DomainName.
            Reply To Address: information from the REPLYTO=
                Tool Type or, if missing, the From Address.
            Real Name: information from the REALNAME= Tool Type if
                present; otherwise from the NAME environmental
                variable.
            Organization: information from the ORGANIZATION= Tool
                Type.
            POP Server: information from the POP_SERVER= Tool Type
                if present; otherwise , if a Domain Name is present,
                this will be the domain name with 'pop.' prepended
                to it.
            SMTP Server:  Information from the SMTP_SERVER= Tool
                Type if present; otherwise, if a Domain Name is
                present, this will be the domain name with 'smtp.'
                prepended to it.

        The environmental variables indicated above are only available
        if your TCP/IP software has been loaded before calling AEMail.
        The TCP/IP stack doesn't have to be running (i.e., on line),
        but it must be loaded.  If the default is missing, nothing
        is loaded into the corresponding string gadget.

The [SET PASSWORD] button gadget will bring up a special window which will
allow you to set or change your password.  When you are entering your POP3
UserID you can also use RIGHT AMIGA 'p' to call up this window.

The [SET PASSWORD] window looks like the following:

                |========================================|
                |0|Enter Password                        |
                |----------------------------------------|
                |                                        |
                |     Enter your new password below      |
                |                                        |
                |  [                                  ]  |
                |                                        |
                |                                        |
                |                                        |
                |  [START OVER]            [  CANCEL  ]  |
                |________________________________________|


The string gadget will be automatically activated when the window is
displayed.  You can type in your new password, but for each character you
type an * will appear.  You must hit return when you finish
entering your password.  After hitting return, the heading:

                       "Enter your password below"

will be replaced by the following heading:

                "For verification, re-enter your password"

You must re-enter your password and, when you hit return, if the
re-entered password matches the first password, the password window will
close.  The new password will not take effect until you hit the [USE],
[SAVE] or [SAVE TO] buttons at the bottom of the Configuration Setup
Window.  If you hit the [CANCEL] button at the bottom of the Setup window
even though the new password has been accepted, the new password will not
be used.

If the re-entered password does not match, the following will appear below
the password entry string gadget:

                       Password failed Validation!

and the "Enter your password below" heading will re-appear.

If at any time you want to start over with entering the new password, you
can click on the [START OVER] gadget.  If you want to cancel the password
entry process you can either click on the close gadget at the top left of
the window or on the [CANCEL] gadget in the window.

Only 30 characters can be entered into the password string gadget.


                               TCP/IP Page
                               -----------

The TCP/IP page appears as follows:

=========================================================================
[o] AEMail Configuration Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
             --------
 ___________| TCP/IP |__________________________________________________
|                                                                       |
|Start Net Call: [                                  ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|                [ ] Start Net Opens on the Workbench [ ] ARexx Command |
|                                                                       |
|                                                                       |
| Stop Net Call: [                                  ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|                [ ] Stop Net Opens on the Workbench  [ ] ARexx Command |
|                                                                       |
| [ ] Automatic connection to Internet on AEMail Start Up               |
| [ ] Display disconnect check on AEMail exit                           |
|                                                                       |
|Disable Queued Mail Check [] on Internet connection   [] at AEMail exit|
|   Disable New Mail Check [] on Internet connection   [] at AEMail exit|
|                                                                       |
|Check for new mail every [  ]/| minutes                                |
|_______________________________________________________________________|

[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]

==========================================================================

The "Start Net Call" and "Stop Net Call" are required if you are going to
start up or stop your TCP/IP connection from within AEMail with a script.
If you are using AmiTCP, this is normally either the file "startnet" or
"stopnet" in the AMITCP:bin directory.  If you are using Miami, two AREXX
scripts, called "startnet.miami" and "stopnet.miami" have been provided
with the AEMail archive located in the AEMail program directory.

When first presented, these two string gadgets will contain the values
given in your STARTNET= and STOPNET= Tool Types or what was last stored in
your configuration file.  If these two Tool types are not present, these
two string gadgets will be blank unless a previous configuration file is
present and has these calls.

If you do not want what is presented as the default in these two string
gadgets, you can enter the correct path and script name in the string
gadgets.  A full path name to that script must be entered.  If the script
is an ARexx script you should check "ARexx command".  Do not precede the
script name with "rx ".  The standard AmiTCP startnet script is NOT an
ARexx script even though it uses ARexx commands.  It is an AmigaDOS
script.  The Miami script which comes with AEMail, on the other hand, is
an ARexx script.

The [|=|] button (a file folder glyph) brings up a file requester to allow
you to find the script you want.  When the string gadget is active you can
also use Right Amiga 'f' to bring up the file requester.

[CLR] will clear the string gadget.  When the string gadget is active you
can also use Right Amiga 'x' to clear the string gadget.

[DEFAULT] will place the script path and name from your Tool Types in the
appropriate string gadget.  When you are in the string gadget you can use
the string editing key, Left Amiga 'd', to also bring the default into the
string gadget.

If you need the "Start Net" script or the "Stop Net" script to open on the
workbench screen, click on the approriate check mark gadget for the
particular script.  When the TCP/IP Configuration page first opens the
"Start Net Opens on the Workbench" item will be checkmarked.

SPECIAL NOTE FOR USERS OF TERMITE TCP:

If you are using a TCP/IP stack that does not have a Start Net or Stop Net
script (such as TermiteTCP), you should use the [CLR] button to clear
these two string gadgets.  Starting and stopping your Internet connection
is then done manually.  Then when you use the Start Net or Stop Net menu
item, the action that is performed is to iconify AEMail.  You can then
perform the network connection in what ever manner was provided by your
TCP/IP stack software.  Once the connection is made, un-iconify AEMail and
AEMail will then check your POP Server for any available messages if that
option was selected (see below).

The "Automatic connection to Internet on AEMail Start Up" check box
provides the same capability as the AUTOCONNECT=YES Tool Type.  When
AEMail is first activated it attempts to determine if you are connected to
your Internet provider.  If you are not and this item is checked, AEMail
will automatically run your StartNet script.  However, the AUTOCONNECT
function will be disabled if you do not have a "Start Net" script.

Except when you are using AEMail as a mailto:  agent or when you use the
ARexx command "QUIT", when AEMail terminates and you are still connected
to your Internet provider, the following requester will be displayed:

            Do you wish to terminate your Host connection now?

You will given the opportunity to reply with either a [YES] or [NO].  If
you never want you Internet connection to be terminated when you exit from
AEMail, you can prevent the above requester from being displayed by NOT
checking the "Display disconnect check on AEMail exit" box.  By default,
this box WILL BE CHECKED, so, to disable the function, you would have to
click in this box.  However, this function will automatically be disabled
if you do not have a Stop Net script.

Please Note:  The way AEMail determines if you are still connected is to
check if the "bdsocket.library" is present.  This library may become
present when you load your TCP/IP stack software.  Even though you may not
be connected the bdsocket.library will then be present, so you will get
the above notification even though you are not actually connected.  In
this event replying with either [YES] or [NO] to the requester will have
no effect.

Whenever AEMail is first loaded and is connected to Internet Provider or
if you select "Start Net" from the "TCP/IP" menu, a check will be made for
any mail on your POP server or any mail that must be sent from your QUEUED
folder.  Except when you are using AEMail as a "mailto:" agent, this same
check is also performed when you quit AEMail.  You can disable any of
these checks by checking the appropriate box in the following lines:

Disable Queued Mail Check [] on Internet connection [] at AEMail exit
   Disable New Mail Check [] on Internet connection [] at AEMail exit

AEMail also has the capability for checking for mail periodically on your
POP server.  This function is performed in the background so you can be
doing other activities while this check is going on.  When mail is found,
the following requester will pop up on your screen:


                             YOU HAVE MAIL!!

                  n Messages available on the POP Server

                Do you wish to receive these messages now?


Replying [YES] to the above requester will start the retrieval of the
messages.  If you are in iconify mode when this occurs, the retrieval will
occur in the background without bringing up the AEMail screen.

You can set the time interval for this check by entering the appropriate
number of minutes in the following numeric gadget:

                  Check for new mail every [  ] minutes

The default time interval is 2 minutes.  If you enter a zero in this
numeric gadget, no check will be made.  This gadget has an up/down arrow
for incrementing or decrementing the value.  You can not decrement it
below zero.


                            Default Path Page
                            -----------------


The Default Path page appears as follows:

=========================================================================
[o] AEMail Configuration Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                      -------
 ____________________| Paths |__________________________________________
|                                                                       |
|            Mail Directory: [                                         ]|
|                                                                       |
|          TCP Logging File: [                      ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|                            [ ] TCP Logging Active on AEMail startup   |
|                                                                       |
|   Retrieve Mail Directory: [                      ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|       Save Mail Directory: [                      ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
| Add Attachments Directory: [                      ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|                                                                       |
|Save Attachments Directory: [                      ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]|
|_______________________________________________________________________|

[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]

==========================================================================

String gadgets are provided for giving the full path for each of the
default directories and or file.  The directory paths that can be
specified are:

    Mail Directory: This is the directory that contains your
        mail files.  This string gadget is read only and cannot be
        modified.  It is for informational purposes only.  To change
        mail directory you will have to change it with the Installation
        script with an update for this user.

    TCP Logging File:  This allows you to enter a file name as well
        as a path.  The default path and file name is "tcplog" in
        the AEMail program directory.  If this field is cleared, no
        TCP logging can take place.  When the [SAVE], [SAVE AS] or
        [USE] gadgets are selected, if TCP Logging was active and
        the TCP logging File name that was entered is different
        from the current log file, the current log file will be
        closed and a new file opened.  If you clear this field
        TCP logging will stop since there is no file to log to.

        Whether logging takes place or not will depend on the
        "TCP/IP/TCP Logging File/Active" menu item (checkmarked
        flag).

        You can cause TCP logging to be active when AEMail starts
        up by checking the "TCP Logging Active on AEMail startup"
        check mark gadget below the TCP Logging File string gadget.
        If this item is checked, the logging will become active
        when you exit from Configuration Setup.  You will have
        to turn off the Active flag in the "TCP/IP/TCP Logging File"
        menu item to stop logging.

        Note: none of the actions mentioned above will take place
        until you select [USE], [SAVE] or [SAVE TO] at the bottom
        of the Configuration Setup Window.  If you select [CANCEL] no
        change will be made in your TCP logging activity.

    Retrieve Mail Directory:  This is the initial path that will
        appear in the file requester when you Retrieve mail from a
        file rather than your POP Server.  The default directory for
        these files is "PROGDIR:" which is your current AEMail program
        directory.  If you regularly are trying to bring in mail that
        was previously transferred using another mail user agent such
        as AmiPOP, AirMail, or Voodoo, you should use the directory
        that was used for these agents for storing mail.  You can
        specify any directory of your choosing as the default path
        for the Retrieve Mail file requester.  You enter that
        default in this string gadget.

    Save Mail Directory:  This is the initial path that will appear
        in the file requester when you select the "Save Mail" icon
        in the command icon strip.  The default directory for this
        path is PROGDIR:, which is your current program directory.
        However, you can specify any other path of your choosing as
        the default path for the Save Mail file requester.  You enter
        that default in this string gadget.

    Add Attachments Directory:  This is the initial path that will
        appear in the file requester when you select the [REQ] button
        in the Add Attachment requester (see below under Section VIII.
        AEMail WINDOWS.  The default directory for this path is PROGDIR:.
        However, you can specify any other path of your choosing as
        the default path for the Add Attachment requester.  You enter
        that default in this string gadget.

    Save Attachments Directory:  This is the initial path that will
        appear in the file requester when you select the [Save] or
        [View & Save] buttons in the Attachment requester (see below
        under Section VIII. AEMail WINDOW.  The default directory for
        this path is RAM:.  However, you can specify any other path of
        your choosing as the default path for the Attachment file
        requester.  You enter that default in this string gadget.

When this page is first activated, the values that were last saved in the
current configuration file will be displayed.

The buttons to the side of each string gadget perform the following
actions:

    [|=|] (a file folder glyph) causes a file requester to appear for
        selecting the appropriate directory and file name (TCP Logging
        File only) to be loaded into the appropriate string gadget.
        The file requester will start out with the last path that was
        used for that particular string gadget.  If no path was last
        used, a dummy name of "VOLUMES" will be used, the requester
        will flash, and the volumes and assigns will be displayed.

        When the string gadget is active you can also use Right Amiga 'f'
        to bring up the file requester.

    [CLR] will cause the string gadget to be cleared.  When the string
        gadget is active you can also use Right Amiga 'x' to clear the
        string gadget.

    [DEFAULT] will cause default information, as described above, to be
        loaded into the appropriate string gadget except that the PROGDIR:
        designation will be expanded to the full path name of the program
        directory.  When the string gadget is active, you can also use
        Right Amiga 'd' to bring the default information into the string
        gadget.

                               Viewer Page
                               -----------

The Viewer page appears as follows:

=========================================================================
[o] AEMail Configuration Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                              --------
 ____________________________| Viewer |_________________________________
|  __________________________________________________________________   |
| | Mime Type/Subtype | Viewer Program                               |  |
| |---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| | text/*            | sys:Utilities/multiview %s                   | ||
| | message/*         | sys:Utilities/multiview %s                   | ||
| | image/*           | sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen            | ||
| | audio/*           | sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen            | ||
| | video/*           | sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen            | ||
| |                   |                                              | ||
| |                   |                                              |^||
| |___________________|______________________________________________|V||
|                                                              ________ |
| Mime Type: [ text              |<] / [                 ][*] |        ||
|                                                             |[ New  }||
|            [] Opens on Workbench [] Called with Run [] ARexx|        ||
|                                                             |[Delete]||
|    Viewer: [                                        ] [|=|] |        ||
|                                                             |[  OK  ]||
| Arguments: [                                        ] [%s ] |________||
|_______________________________________________________________________|

[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]

=========================================================================

The Viewer page is used to create and or modify your mailcap file.  When
the page is activated the currrent mailcap file will be displayed in the
listview list.  The items at the bottom of the page will be disabled with
the exception of the [ New ] button.

To create a new entry in the mailcap, click on [ New ].  At this point all
of the items at the bottom of the page, with the exception of the [Delete]
button will become enabled.  You can now enter the information for the
mailcap entry in the gadgets below the listview.

Mime Type: is a chooser box.  If you click into the body of the gadget, a
list of mime types will appear as follows:

    text
    message
    image
    audio
    video

You can choose the Mime Type that you want and it will be transferred to
the Mime Type box.  The button to the right of the box ([<]) acts like a
cycle gadget, cycling through the varies Mime Types.

The large box to the right of the "/" is for the mime subtype.  It is a
string gadget in which you can enter the subtype you want.  The gadget [*]
to the right of this brings up a list of possible mime subtypes.  You can
select from this list, or, if the one you want is not in the list, enter it
into the string gadget.  If you select from the list, it will be
transferred to the string gadget.

The boxes below the Mime Type/Subtype row are for entering information
about your viewer.  The check boxes, "Opens On Workbench", "Called with
Run" and "ARexx", indicate how your viewer program will be executed.  If
"Opens On Workbench" is checked, your viewer program will open on the
Workbench.  If the viewer program must be called with "run >NIL:", check
the "Called with Run" box, and if it is an ARexx command, check the
"ARexx" box.

The string gadget, Viewer:, contains the full path name of your viewer
program.  The [|=|] (folder glyph) calls up a file requester so you can
select the Viewer program from the file list.

Enter any arguments the Viewer program needs into the Arguments: string
gadget.  You must always have a "%s" in the argument to specify the file
that will be displayed with the viewer.  If you click on the [%s] gadget,
a %s will be placed at the end of what has so far been typed into the
argument.

Also, the normal clipboard commands (Right Amiga 'c', Right Amiga 'v',
etc) work in any of the string gadgets.

When everything is entered correctly, click on [ OK ].  Your Mime
Type/Subtype and Viewer Program will be trasferred to the listview.
Placement of the line in the listview will be according to the Mime Type
positioning (i.e., text before message before image, etc.).

As an example of how the Viewer program entry gadgets work let's assume
you have entered or checked:

    "Called with Run"
    "ARexx"
    Viewer: REXX:html.aem
    Arguments: %s

The following will be shown under the Viewer Program:

    run >NIL: rx REXX:html.aem %s

If you had added "Opens On Workbench", the following would be shown:

    wb;run >NIL: rx REXX:html.aem %s

Consult Section X. AEMAIL FILES, mailcap for a complete description of the
mailcap file.

If you want to modify or delete an entry in your mailcap file, simply
click on the entry in the listview.  Information from the listview line
you clicked on will be transferred to the gadgets below the listview.  The
Mime Type/Subtype row will be disabled allowing you to only modify the
Viewer program.

If you click on [Delete], the entry in the listwiew will be deleted.  If
you click on [ OK ] after making any changes in your Viewer program, the
line for that Mime Type/Subtype in the listview will be replaced with the
information you just modified.

If you wish to recover an entry you have just deleted, information about
that entry will remain in the gadgets even though the gadgets are
disabled.  Clicking on [ New ] and then [ OK ] will restore the entry.

You are not allowed to create a new Mime Type/Subtype that is the same as
an existing Mime Type/Subtype.

                                ARexx Page
                                ----------


The ARexx page appears as follows:

=========================================================================
[o] AEMail Configuration Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       -------
 _____________________________________| ARexx |_________________________
|                                                                       |
| ___________________________________________________________________   |
|| Event/Key|Title   |Type |FLG|Command                              |  |
||----------------------------------------------------------------------|
|| Web Addr |        |AREXX|   |AEMail2:ARexx/html.aem               | ||
||Email Add |        |AREXX|   |AEMail2:ARexx/sendmsg.aem            | ||
||          |        |     |   |                                     | ||
||       F1 |Get WWW |AREXX|   |REXX: html.aem                       | ||
||       F2 |IBROWSE |DOS  | A |IBrowse:IBrowse                      | ||
||       F3 |Place In|AREXX|   |AEMail2:ARexx/placeaddr.aem          | ||
||       F4 |Place Ad|AREXX|   |AEMail2:ARexx/placegrp.aem           | ||
||       F5 |Delete A|AREXX|   |AEMail2:ARexx/deladrgrp.aem          | ||
||       F6 |        |     |   |                                     |^||
||       F7 |        |     |   |                                     |V||
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------|
| ------------Select Event/Function Key from the above list------------ |
||                                                                     ||
|| [AREXX |<] [                                          ] [|=|] [CLR] ||
||                                                                     ||
|| Menu Title: [                    ]                            [CLR] ||
||                                                                     ||
|| [ ] Opens on Workbench        [ ] Executes Asychronously       [OK] ||
||_____________________________________________________________________||
|_______________________________________________________________________|

[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]

==========================================================================

The ARexx Page will allow you to assign ARexx or DOS commands to function
keys and to certain events that occur within AEMail.  It will also allow
you to assign a menu title for the ARexx or DOS command that will be
placed in the ARexx/DOS menu.

At the present time there are only two events that can be defined:  when
you double click on a web address in a message or when you double click on
an email address in a message.

At the top of the page is a scrolling listview that displays all of the
events and function keys on the left hand side.  Not only are function
keys included in the list, but also the shift key plus the function keys
(SHFT Fn), the control key plus the function keys (CTRL Fn), and the Alt
key plus the function keys (ALT Fn).  This gives the possibility of 40
commands being associated with function keys; although, some key
combinations may not be effective if they are used by other programs or
commodities.

The column entitled "Title" gives the Menu Title that will be used in the
ARexx/DOS menu.  If an entry in the column is blank, no menu entry will be
made for this command.

The column entitled "Type" indicates the type of command: AREXX or DOS.
The "FLG" column indicates "W" if the command opens on the Workbench and
"A" if the command executes asychronously (with RUN >NIL:).  These two
flags only apply to DOS commands.

The "Command" column indicates the AREXX or DOS command script or program
that will be executed when the function key is pressed.  This should be
the full path name for the script or program.

In the example above, the two events have been defined to call html.aem,
which calls your selected browser if a web address is double clicked, and
sendmsg.aem to send an email message to the selected address if a email
address is double clicked.

Since other action may be desireable when an email address is selected,
you will notice that the F3, F4, and F5 function keys have been defined to
call placeaddr.aem (to place address in address book), placegrp.aem (to
place address in a group), and deladrgrp.aem (to delete address from a
group) respectively.  They have also been defined with menu items ("Place
Individual Address", "Place Address in Group", and "Delete Address from
Group".

To ensure that the sendmsg.aem script is not automatically called when you
double click on the email address, you will have to hold down the CTRL key
when you double click.  This will bring up the Clipboard requester (see
Using the Clipboard with AEMail) and you can either press the appropriate
function key or select the appropriate menu item to execute the ARexx
script.

Below the listview is a boxed area which initially has the heading "Select
Event/Function Key from the above list".  Initially all of the gadgets in
this boxed area are disabled.

When you click on one of the events or function keys in the listview, the
heading of the boxed area changes to "Command for Fn", where Fn is the
function key you clicked on (or "Command for event"), and the boxed area
becomes enabled.  If there was a command already defined for that function
key or event, the information will be transferred to the appropriate
gadgets within the boxed area.

The cycle gadget (indicated by |<]) has two states: AREXX and DOS.  If you
select AREXX the checkmarked gadgets "Opens on Workbench" and "Executes
Asychronously" are disabled; they only are used with DOS commands.

The string gadget following the cycle gadget is for entering the full path
name of your ARexx or DOS script or DOS program.  The [|=|] (file folder
glyph) is used to bring up a file requester to find the script or program
that you want.  If you have activated the string gadget, you can also use
Right Amiga 'f' to call up the file requester.

The [CLR] next to the file folder glyph the will clear this string gadget;
although Right Amiga 'x' will also do this if the string gadget is
enabled.  The string gadget also supports clipboard actions.

The "Menu Title" string gadget is used to assign a menu name to the
ARexx/DOS menu that will call this command.  A maximum of 21 characters
can be used for a Menu Title.  If this string gadget is left blank, no
menu name will be assigned and you can only use the appropriate function
key to call the command.  The [CLR] to the far right on this row clears
the Menu Title.  When you are in the string gadget, Right Amiga 'x' will
also clear the string.  This string gadget also supports clipboard
actions.

The two checkmark gadgets on the second row are used for DOS commands
only.  They will be disabled for ARexx commands.

If "Opens on Workbench" is checked, a switch will be made to the Workbench
screen when the command is executed.  This is not necessary for ARexx
command since there is an AEMail ARexx command that will do this.

The "Execute Asynchronously" checkmark gadget is used to execute the DOS
command in the background.  This will allow AEMail to function when the
program that is called is being executed.  This item is, by default,
checkmarked.  If for some reason you want AEMail to freeze while the
command (program) is being executed, you can un-checkmark this item.
Since all ARexx commands automatically execute in the background, this item
is uneccessary for ARexx command scripts.

When you have completed entering the data, click on [OK].  The information
will be transferred to the appropriate entry in the listview.  If you
cleared the string gadget, any command information, including Type and
FLGS as well, will be cleared for this event or function key in the
listview.

Please Note:  If you are an Un-Registered user of AEMail, you can not save
the ARexx/DOS command list.  This means that whenever you quit AEMail the
list of commands will not be remembered.  You will need to re-enter them
the next time you load AEMail.

                                Fonts Page
                                ----------


The Fonts page appears as follows:

=========================================================================
[o] AEMail Configuration Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               -------
 _____________________________________________| Fonts |_________________
|                                                                       |
| -Configuration Page Font------------------------ ____________________ |
|                                                 |                    ||
| Font: [topaz.font  ] Size: [  8] [Ff] [DEFAULT] |AaBbCcDcEeFfGg..1234||
|                                                 |____________________||
| -AEMail Screen Font----------------------------- ____________________ |
|                                                 |                    ||
| Font: [topaz.font  ] Size: [  8] [Ff] [DEFAULT] |AaBbCcDcEeFfGg..1234||
|                                                 |____________________||
| -AEMail General Font---------------------------- ____________________ |
|                                                 |                    ||
| Font: [topaz.font  ] Size: [  8] [Ff] [DEFAULT] |AaBbCcDcEeFfGg..1234||
|                                                 |____________________||
| -Folder Font------------------------------------ ____________________ |
|                                                 |                    ||
| Font: [topaz.font  ] Size: [  8] [Ff] [DEFAULT] |AaBbCcDcEeFfGg..1234||
|                                                 |____________________||
| -Message Font----------------------------------- ____________________ |
|                                                 |                    ||
| Font: [topaz.font  ] Size: [  8] [Ff] [DEFAULT] |AaBbCcDcEeFfGg..1234||
|                                                 |____________________||
|_______________________________________________________________________|

[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]

=========================================================================


The Fonts Page will allow you to change the fonts for certain AEMail
displays.  The areas that you can change fonts for are:

    Configuration Page Font
    AEMail Screen Font
    AEMail General Font
    Folder Font
    Message Font

The Configuration Page Font will change the font for the Configuration
screen and each of the pages on it.  If you are running on a
non-interlaced Workbench screen with a width of no more than 640
characters, you might find that you will have to change this font to allow
everything to fit on the screen.  You can use any font or font size
including proportional or fixed fonts.

The Configuration Page Font will not take effect until you exit from the
Configuration Setup Window and then recall the Configuration Setup Window.

The AEMail Screen Font will change the font for the main AEMail screen and
window titles, the font used by system requesters, and the font used for
menus.  Any font or font size can be used, fixed or proportional.  This
will not effect the screen font used by the Configuration Setup Window,
however.  You will have to do that with the Workbench Fonts Preferences.

The Folder Font will only change the font in the folder strip.  It has the
same effect as the FLDRFONT= and FLDRFONTSZ= Tool Types.  Any font or font
size can be used, fixed or proportional.

The Message Font will change the font used for displaying messages.  While
any font or font size, fixed or proportional, can be used, watch out for
proportional fonts.  If the message has long lines, it may take
significantly longer to display the message than with a fixed font.

Finally, the AEMail General Font effects the body fonts used in all other
windows in AEMail.  This font has certain restrictions.  It must be size 8
and must be a fixed font.

The only gadgets that are active for each font are the [Ff] and [DEFAULT]
gadgets.  [Ff] will bring up a font requester so that you can select the
font you want and [DEFAULT] will change the font to topaz.font size 8.
The Font: and Size: gadgets are read only to show you what font is
currently being used and the boxed area to the right which shows a sample
of the font.  If you want to change a font use the font requester.

Take care when you change fonts.  If you do not choose your fonts
carefully, you could end up with windows that are too big to fit on the
ecreen or requesters that are chopped off at the bottom.  A proportional
font used as the Screen font could cause certain requesters to appear
mis-proportioned.

                         General Parameters Page
                         -----------------------


The General Parameters page appears as follows:

=========================================================================
[o] AEMail Configuration Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                       ---------
 _____________________________________________________| General |_______
|                                                                       |
| Printer Device: [PRT:        ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT]   Top Margin:[ 4]/| |
|                                                                       |
| [ ] Include Attachment List in Print Out              [Printer Setup] |
|                                                                       |
|           Editor: [                              ][|=|][CLR][DEFAULT] |
|                                                                       |
| Editor Arguments: [               ] [ ] Editor Opens on the Workbench |
|                                                                       |
| ------------------Default Reply to Message Parameters---------------- |
||                                                                     ||
|| [ ] Quote Original Message Text          Quote Prefix: [>         ] ||
||                                                                     ||
|| Quote Header: [                                                   ] ||
| --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|                                                                       |
| [ ] Clone Workbench Screen Mode                     [Set Screen Mode] |
|                                                                       |
| [Set Minimum Headers]                                [Set Menu Flags] |
|_______________________________________________________________________|

[      Use      ] [      Save      ] [    Save As    ] [     Cancel     ]

=========================================================================


The General Parameter page allows you to set up certain general type
parameters such as specifications for your printer device, the screen
mode that you want your AEMail screen to open on, the list of minimum
headers you want displayed in a message, certain default menu checkmarked
items, the specification for your editor, and the specifications for the
default message reply headers.

For the Printer Device you can specify the device that you want to do your
printing on.  By default this is PRT:, but you can specify a file if you
care to.  If you specify a file, your printer output will be sent as
standard ASCII text with form feeds and margin spacing included in the
output.  The [|=|] (file folder glyph) button will call up a file
requester through which you can enter the path and file name of this
printer file.  [CLR] will clear the string gadget and [DEFAULT] will enter
PRT:  into the gadget.  When this page is first displayed, the PRT:
default will be in the gadget.

If the Printer Device string gadget is activated you can also use Right
Amiga 'f' to call up the file requester, Right Amiga 'x' to clear the
string, and Right Amiga 'd' to bring PRT: into the gadget.

You can also specify the Top Margin of the printout with the numeric
string gadget to the right of the Printer Device.  The default top margin
is 4.

If you want the list of attachments to appear on the last page of your
printout, you can check the "Include Attachment List in Print Out" box.
By default, this box is checked when you first call up the General
Parameters page.

If you want to modify your printer setup parameters that are normally set
with your PRINTER PREFERENCES, you can click on the [Printer Setup]
button.  This will call up the standard Printer Preferences program so
that you can change your printer setup.  Please Note that, if you change
the printer preferences, the new preferences will remain in effect when
you quit AEMail.

For the Editor: string gadget you must use the full path name of the
editor of your choice.  The Editor Arguments: string gadget is used to
enter any parameters you want to use when you call your editor.  To
specify where the file name you are editing goes use '%s'.  An example
would be:

    Editor: c:ed
    Editor Arguments: %s

Next to the Editor Arguments:  string gadget is a checkmark gadget which
is used to tell AEMail that your editor will open on the Workbench screen.
If your editor of choice does not open on it's own screen, you must check
this item.  The AmigaDos editor, ED, does NOT open on it's own screen;
therefor you must check this item if you are using ED.

The [DEFAULT] for the Editor is the information from the EDITOR= Tool Type.
If the key word 'WB;' precedes the editor call information in the tool
type, the "Editor Opens on Workbench" item will be checkmarked.  'WB;'
will NOT appear in the Editor string gadget.

If the EDITOR Tool Type was not provided, the following will be the
default edit call:

    Editor: c:ed
    Editor Arguments: %s

and the "Editor Opens on Workbench" item will be checkmarked.  This
uses the default AmigaDos editor, ed.

If you need to find where your editor is located, [|=|] (file folder
glyph) causes a file requester to appear for selecting the appropriate
program file to be loaded into the Editor string gadget.

If the Editor: string gadget is activated you can use Right Amiga 'f' to
call up the file requester, Right Amiga 'd' to call up the default, and
Right Amiga 'x' to clear the Editor: string gadget.

The section below the heading "Default Reply to Message Parameters" is
used to set up the default actions when you are replying to a message.
The "Quote Original Message Text" box sets up the default action for
quoting the original text in a message.  Even though you take the default
of not quoting text, you will be given an opportunity to change you mind
about this when you compose the message.

The "Quote Prefix:" string gadget indicates what is to be placed in front
of each quoted line if an original message is quoted.  This, by default,
is '>'; however, you can use any other prefix as the derfault that you
like.

A "Quote header:" will be placed on the line in front of the quoted
material.  You can choose what you would like as the default heading and
enter it in this string gadget.  By default, the header which will
initially appear in the "Quote Header:" string gadget is:

    On &(week), &(date2), at &(time), &(name) wrote:

The & followed by a field name in parenthesis indicates substitution of
data from the original message's headers.  The values that can be
substituted are:

    &(name)     The real name of the sender of the original
                message.  If the real name is not available,
                the sender's email address will be used instead

    &(subject)  The subject from the original message.  Any RE:
                or (fwd) will be stripped.

    &(week)     The day of the week that the original message
                was sent.

    &(date)     The date the original message was sent in the form
                DD MMM YYYY, where DD is the day of the month,
                MMM is month in the form Jan, Feb, Mar, etc, and
                YYYY is the full 4 digit year.

    &(date1)    Same as &(date).

    &(date2)    The date in the form MMM DD, YYYY.

    &(time)     The time the original message was sent in the
                form HH:MM xM where HH is the hour on a 12 hour
                clock, MM is the minute, and xM is AM or PM.

    &(to)       The email address the message was sent to.  For
                mailing lists this could be the name of the mailing
                list if that is what appeared in the To: header.

The "Quote Header" is designed to be modified by the user and can be
changed with this string gadget.  This is a permanent change if you select
[SAVE] to save the Configuration data or it can be in effect as the
default for only this running of AEMail if you select [USE].  You can
always change this default, however, when you compose a message.

If you want to set your screen mode for AEMail, you can click on the [Set
Screen Mode] button.  This will call up a Screen Mode Requester which will
allow you to set whatever screen mode you wish.  Your overscan mode can
also be set.  This defaults to "OVERSCAN-TEXT".

To the left of the [Set Screen Mode] button is a checkmark gadget labeled
"Clone Workbench Screen Mode".  If you select this gadget AEMail will use
whatever screen mode is currently set for your Workbench through the Set
Screen Mode Preferences program.  If the Workbench Screen Mode is changed,
AEMail will open with that screen mode the next time it is loaded.

If the "Clone Workbench Screen Mode" is checkmarked, the [Set Screen Mode]
button will be disabled.

When you save your configuration settings, the screen mode you selected
and the overscan setting are saved in the AEMail configuration file and
will be used the next time you load AEMail.  They will also be in effect
when you return from the Edit Configuration Setup Window.

The minimum header set that you want displayed in your message can be set
by clicking on the [Set Minimum Headers] button.  This will bring up a
requester that looks like this:

                   |==================================|
                   |[o]  Set Minimum Headers          |
                   |==================================|
                   |      Select/Deselect Headers     |
                   |          to be displayed         |
                   |==================================|
                   || *bcc:                        | ||
                   || *cc:                         | ||
                   ||  Content-Transfer-Encoding:  | ||
                   ||  Content-Type:               | ||
                   || *Date:                       | ||
                   || *From:                       | ||
                   |==================================|
                   |         Enter New Header         |
                   |[                                ]|
                   |                                  |
                   |              [OK]                |
                   |==================================|

A list of possible message headers is displayed in the scrollable list.
An asterick (*) in front of a header indicates that it has been selected
for inclusion in the minimum header list.  Clicking on an item in the list
will select it with an (*).  If it is already selected, it will be
deselected (the asterick will change to a blank).

The string gadget at the bottom of the requester is used to enter a header
that is not in the list.  Be sure and end the header with a colon (:).
After entering the header, press return and the header will be placed
properly in the scollable list.  It will be deselected when it is first
entered in the list.  You will have to click on it to select it.

When you are through entering items in the list, click on [OK] and you
will be returned to the General Parameters page.  Clicking on the close
gadget at to top of the requester has the same effect as clicking on [OK].

Please NOTE:  anything you enter in the list or select/deselect will
remain in the list in that state during the current run of AEMail even if
you click on [CANCEL] in the main configuration window.  In other words,
[CANCEL] for the minimum header list has the same effect as [USE].
Clicking on [SAVE] or [SAVE AS] at the bottom of the window will
permanently save the headers you have selected.

There is no way to delete a header once it has been entered in the list
and saved except by deleting the .headers file in the AEMAIL:  directory.
This is really not a problem, however, since, if you entered an incorrect
header and haven't selected it, it will have no effect on the program.

The [Set Menu Flags] gadget brings up a window that has five check boxes
in it.  These five check boxes are:

    [ ] Display Full Header
    [ ] Forward Body text Only
    [ ] Include Header in Reply
    [ ] Exclude Duplicate Messages
    [ ] Delete Host Mail

These check boxes correspond to the flags under the "Messages" and
"Retrieve Msgs" menus.  If you [SAVE] or [SAVE AS] when you exit from the
Configuration Setup, they will set the initial values of these menu items
when you load AEMail.  When you exit from the Configuration Setup with
either [USE], [SAVE] or [SAVE AS], the corresponding menu items will be
checked or unchecked depending on the state of these check boxes.

Clicking on the close gadget of the "AEMail Set Menu Flags" window or
clicking on [OK] will close this window.

Please Note: Because of a problem with ClassAct, the [Printer Setup]. [Set
Screen Mode], [Set Minimum Headers] and [Set Menu Flags] gadgets will not
work under AmigaDOS 2.x.  There is no problem with these gadgets under
AmigaDOS 3.x.
                             V. USING AEMAIL

                             Starting AEMail
                             ---------------

AEMail can be started either from the Workbench by double clicking on it's
icon or from the shell.  It is recommended that AEMail be normally run
from the Workbench.  The shell invocation is primarily designed for
"MailTo" agents in web browsers or to call AEMail from another program
that passes a message to it.

                      Starting AEMail from the Shell
                      ------------------------------

When AEMail is invoked from the shell, there are six optional arguments
that can be used as follows:

 AEMail [email-addr-of-recipient-of-email] [config=configuration_file]
   [pubscr=browser-screen-name] [mail_dir=full-path-to-mail-directory]
   [message=full-path-name-of-message-to-send] [CONT]

If either the recipient's email address is present or the "message="
argument is present, AEMail assumes that we are using AEMail as a "MailTo"
agent or you are trying to queue or send a message composed outside of
AEMail.  AEMail will load and immediately display the Compose message
window.

If the "message=" argument was used, you will be in the "edit" mode of the
compose screen.  You can either edit the supplied message or immediately
[Save in Pending], [Queue Message], [Send Message Now], or [Cancel
Message].  You can also perform any other action on the message including
adding headers, adding attachments, or adding your signature block (see
the Section VIII, Compose Message Window).

The message that the "message=" argument points to must be a complete
message with at least one header.  It is suggested that you include at
least a "To:  " and "Subject:  " header.  These should be followed with at
least one blank line before the body of the message.

If both the "mail address of the recipient" argument and the "message="
argument are used, the "mail address" will take precedence over the "To: "
header in the message.

The recipient's name in either the mailto argument or the To header in the
message referenced by the "message=" argument, can be a nickname present
in your Address Book.  This is a convenient way to send messages to groups
where you are periodically adding or deleting members from the group.
Just use the group nickname in the "To:  " address to send the message to
the entire group.

If the "message=" argument is not present but a recipient's email address
is present, you will enter the compose window in a "new" message mode.
You must compose a message or Cancel the operation in order to procede.

When you exit from the Compose window by clicking on one of the action
requesters at the bottom of the window, AEMail will terminate
automatically unless the "CONT" keyword was present in the argument
stream.  If "CONT" is used, AEMail will continue so that you can perform
other AEMail functions.  You will then have to quit using the "Quit..."
menu item in the "Project Menu".

The "config=" keyword parameter is used to specify a configuration file
other that the default s:aemail.cnfg file.  All pertanent data on the
AEMail configuration to be used will be in this file.  If you wish to
invoke AEMail from the shell and have it run with a different
configuration file, you can use the "config=" parameter to direct AEMail
to use this different configuration file on startup.  To use AEMail in
this manner, you could simply type:

    AEMAIL config=[name_of_configuration_file]

If the "config=" keyword parameter or the s:aemail.cnfg file are both not
present a default s:aemail.cnfg file will be created.  Of course, if this
happens, your normal configuration data will not be present (such as your
POP3 UserID, Password, POP Server name, or SMTP Server name) and your
normal mail directory will not be found unless the "mail_dir=" keyword
parameter described below is present.

If your normal configuration file is not s:aemail.cnfg and you wish to
execute AEMail from the shell (or as a "MailTo" agent), you should load
AEMail from the workbench using the icon specifying the configuration file
you want to use and then do a "Save As..." from the "Configuration" menu
item of the "Project" menu.  Specify "s:aemail.cnfg" in the Save As file
requester.  This will create a vaild s:aemail.cnfg file.

The "mail_dir=" is used to specify the mail directory for the user
specified in the config= parameter.  It corresponds to the MAIL_DIR= Tool
Type.  Normally, this is unnecessary (in fact, discouraged) if the
configuration file is present since the mail directory will be stored in
the configuration file.  You must specify a full path name if the
"mail_dir" parameter is used.  Be very careful in using this parameter
since it could change the mail directory specified in your configuration
file with undesireable results.

If AEMail is used as a "mailto:" agent for your browser and that browser
passes it's public screen name along with the userid, you can use the
keyword argument "pubscn=" to specify that public screen.  AEMail will
then bring the browser's screen to the front when AEMail terminates.  If
this argument is missing and the browser opens on it's own screen but does
not, itself, bring the screen to the front when it returns from the
"mailto" command, you might have to manually bring the browser's screen to
the front with the LEFT-AMIGA M key.

When you invoke AEMail from the shell with a email address parameter or a
"message=" argument, you normally will not be able to use any of the
AEMail menus or commands unless the "CONT" key word was used.  However,
AEMail will always check for Mail on your POP Server and for Queued
messages to send before displaying the Compose message screen (see initial
AEMail action below) and ask for configuration data if required parameters
are not present in the s:aemail.cnfg file or the config= configuration
file.

If you invoked AEMail from the shell without any parameters, AEMail will
behave the same as if it was invoked from the Workbench by clicking on
it's icon except that tool types will not be utilized and the
s:aemail.cnfg file will be used by default.  If you are a new user of
AEMail and do not have an s:aemail.cnfg file (you assigned a different
name and place for the configuration file), you can create one easily.
Bring up the primary user of AEMail from the Workbench (the user you want
to activate from the shell) and perform a "Configuratio/Save As" from the
"Project" menu.  When the file requester comes up, specify the "S:"
directory and "aemail.cnfg" as the file name.  Invoking from the Workbench
is described below.

                      Running AEMail in Offline Mode
                      ------------------------------

AEMail can be run either in an offline or online mode.  This means that
you do not have to be connected to your Internet provider when AEMail is
activated.  However, to actually receive or send mail via your Internet
provider, you must have your TCP/IP stack (AmiTCP, TermiteTCP, Miami, etc)
running and connected to your provider.  You can activate AEMail before
connecting to your provider or after; it makes no difference.

Both a convenient menu item and a command icon have been provided in
AEMail to start your TCP/IP stack ("TCP/IP/Start Net") after AEMail is up
and running provided a script can be used to make this connection. If
a script is not provided for this purpose, AEMail will iconify to allow
you to start your TCP/IP stack manually.  A menu item ("TCP/IP/Stop Net")
and command icon have also been provided to disconnect your network
connection.

To cause your TCP/IP stack to be executed manually, clear the script names
in the Configuration Setup Window, TCP/IP page.

Two command icons have been provided in the Command Icon tool bar to also
perform Starting and Terminating your TCP/IP Network Connection.

You can also automatically activate your Internet connection at program
startup by providing the AUTOCONNECT=YES Tool Type described above or by
checkmarking the "Automatic connection to Internet Provider on AEMail
Start Up" in the TCP/IP Page of the Configuration Setup Window.

WARNING:  for this to work, you will need to be able to activate your
TCP/IP stack automatically by a script.

                   Activating AEMail from the Workbench
                   ------------------------------------

To activate AEMail from the Workbench simply double click on the AEMail
Project icon.  You can also activate AEMail from the shell, but, if
activated in this manner, it will not have access to the configuration
information provided by the Tool Types.  It does, however, have access to
the configuration information in the specified AEMail configuration file
(either the default s:aemail.cnfg or the file specified with config= in
the shell calling argument).

AEMail opens on it's own 16 color Public Screen.  The Public Screen name
is "AEMAIL-1".  4 of the colors are defined by the first four colors of
the workbench screen.  The following 8 colors are pre-defined with the
following colors:  Red (13R, 0B, 0G), Green (0R, 15G, 0B), Blue (0R, 0G,
15B), Magenta (15R, 0G, 15B), Yellow (15R, 15G, 0B), Orange (15R, 10G,
0B), Brown (10R, 5G, 0B), and Purple (9R, 3G, 9B).  These colors have been
preset to provide a consistant color scheme for displaying icons and
folder tab colors.  Under consideration is the possibility of allowing
these colors to be user settable in the future.

Since multiple windows are opened by AEMail, the program opens on it's own
screen to allow uniformity in being able to push the screen to the back
(with all of it's member windows) and back again to the front.  The
LEFT-AMIGA-M key can be used for this purpose.

You can also iconify AEMail with an iconify bar on the Workbench screen.
A menu item has been provided to perform the iconify action.  When this
menu item is selected, the AEMail screen will disappear and a button bar
will appear on the Workbench screen with

    AEMail (Click on Close or with RMB to restore)

in the title.  When the iconified bar is selected, clicking either on the
close gadget or with the Right Mouse Button (RMB) will restore the AEMail
screen.

There is also a hotkey provided for iconifying AEMail.  This is
RIGHT-AMIGA-I.  This same hot key will also take AEMail out of iconify
mode.  The LEFT-AMIGA-I key will also accomplish this.

Periodically during the running of AEMail, the program will automatically
switch to the workbench screen for executing certain functions and then
switch back when the function is complete.

The first thing AEMail does when it is activated is to check to see that
certain configuration information has been provided.  The necessary items
are:

    POP3 UserID
    Password
    From Addr (your email address)
    POP Server
    SMTP Server
    Domain Name
    Edit Call

If these items have not be provided, the following requester will be
displayed:

    The following Configuration items are empty

    [list of empty items]

    They are required items!


If this requester is displayed, you will be given the following choices:

           [Configure AEMAIL now]               [Cancel AEMAIL]

If you were to click on [Cancel AEMAIL], AEMail will terminate.  You can
not proceed any further until you have entered these items with the
Configuration Setup Window or by providing them as Tool Types.

Clicking on the [Configure AEMAIL now] will bring up the Configuration
Setup Window which was described previously.

If the PASSPROTECT=YES Tool Type was provided (registered users only) the
following window will be displayed:

                |========================================|
                |0|Enter Password                        |
                |----------------------------------------|
                |                                        |
                |     Enter your new password below      |
                |                                        |
                |  [                                  ]  |
                |                                        |
                |                                        |
                |                                        |
                |  [START OVER]            [  CANCEL  ]  |
                |________________________________________|


You must enter your password before you can procede.  You will be allowed
three attempts to enter a correct password.  If the correct password has
not been entered after three attempts, AEMail will terminate.  If the
password is correct, AEMail will continue.

NOTE: since activating the password protection is done by a Tool Type,
password protection is not available when you activate AEMail from the
shell.

If this is the first time AEMail has been executed after a new version has
been installed, the "Send AEMail Notification Request" will appear.  See
"REGISTRATION" under Section II, SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS for a description of
the Notification Request.

After verifying that required configuration information has been provided
and that correct password has been entered (if required), AEMail will
check to see if you are connected to your Internet provider.  If you are,
connection will be made to your POP server to see if there are any
messages available on the server in your mail box.  If there are, the
following requester will appear:

                  n Messages Available on the POP Server

                Do you wish to receive these messages now?

You will have three choices as follows:

                [YES]        [View on Server]          [NO]

If you click on the [YES] button, those message will be retrieved at this
point.  See the RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described in Section VI.
COMMAND ICON STRIP for details on this process.

If you click on [NO], no message retrieval will take place at this time.
You will need to retrieve these messages later using the RETRIEVE MESSAGES
command icon.

If you click on [View on Server], a list of all of the messages currently
on your POP Server will be displayed in a window similar to one of your
folder Message List windows.  This window will be titled "Message List for
Server Folder (Messages currently on your POP Server)" and will list all
messages currently on your POP Server.

You can directly delete messages by selecting a message or group of
messages and clicking on either the Delete icon or selecting the
Delete/Undelete menu item under the Messages menu.

Likewise you can selectively download messages by using either the
"Transfer" icon (or the "Transfer..." menu item) or the "Copy" icon (or
the "Copy..." menu item) after you have seleced a message or group of
messages.  "Transfer" will also delete the message from the POP Server.
"Copy" will not.

After AEMail checks to see if any messages are available on the POP
Server, it also checks to see if any messages are in the QUEUED folder
(messages queued to be sent).  If there are, the following requester will
appear:

                  You have n messages queued to be sent

                 Do you wish to send these messages now?

If you click on the [YES] button, all of the messages in the QUEUED folder
will be sent immediately.  This is the same as selecting the "Send Queued
Mail" item under the "Project" menu or selecting the QUEUED FOLDER and
clicking on the "Send Message Immediately" command icon (see Sections VI.
Command Icon Strip and VII.  AEMAIL MENUS below).

If you click on [NO], the queued messages will not be sent at this time.
You will need to send these messages later using either the "Send Queued
Mail" item under the "Project" menu or selecting the QUEUED FOLDER and
clicking on the "Send Message Immediately" command icon.

If you successfully connected at program startup the following message
will appear in the Title bar of the AEMail screen:

    TCP/IP session started with [Your-POP-Server-Name]

If you were not connected the following message will appear in the Title
bar:

    Not Connected to [Your-POP-Server-Name] Host

You can disable either or both the POP mail check or the queued mail check
at startup by checkmarking the appropriate items in the TCP/IP page of the
Configuration Setup Window.

When AEMail first starts, three windows are opened in horizontal bands on
the AEMail screen.  A window is displayed just below the screen menu/title
bar and provides a contextual help title bar and a Command Icon Tool Bar.
This Tool Bar provides icons for accessing the major functions of AEMail
and consists (from left to right) of the following icons:  Display Folder
List, Display Address Book, Retrieve Messages, Display Previous Message,
Display Previous Folder's Message List, Display Current Folder's Message
List, Display Next Folder's Message List, Display Next Message, Compose a
Message, Queue Message for Later Delivery, Send Message Immediately, Save
Message To File, Print, Delete/Undelete Message, Copy Messages, Transfer
Messages, Start TCP/IP Network Connection and Terminate TCP/IP Network
Connection.

The window below the command icon tool bar contains a "folder strip" set
of icons.  An icon is provided for each folder with a colored "tab" to
indicate the type of folder (of the user's own choosing).

Within each folder icon is a short name (not exceeding 9 characters) for
that folder.  Below this is the total number of messages minus any deleted
messages.  It may be followed by the number of un-read messages in
parenthesis.  If there are unread messages, both numbers will be displayed
in red.  These messages counts will be updated as messages are added or
deleted from the folders.

The height of the folder strip is defined by the font size that is used
for the folder name and the folder contents.  The font and font size that
is used can be selected by the user with either the FLDRFONT= or
FLDRFONTSZ= Tool Types on the Font Page on the Configuration Setup Window.
The folder icons will adjust accordingly.

Four pre-defined folders are provided:  "INBOX" for holding retrieved
messages, "PENDING" which holds messages that the user is currently
composing and has not decided to send as yet, "QUEUED" which holds
completed messages for later transmission, and "SENT" which holds messages
that have been sent and accepted by the SMTP Server.  Since these folders
must always be present, you can not delete or change the name of these
folders.

A facility has been provided to allow the user to add as many additional
folders of his own choosing that he wants to the list of folders.

As each new folder is created, an icon will be created and placed next to
the last folder icon.  Any number of folders can be created and the
"folder strip" has the ability to scroll horizontally so that all of the
folder icons can be viewed and accessed.

The displayed folder list (activated by using the Display Folder List icon
in the Command Icon Tool Bar) will be in the same order as the folder
icons in the folder strip.  You can change the order of both the folder
icons and the list of folders by using the Move...  menu item under the
Folders menu.

You can use the menu items "Transfer..." and "Copy..." under the MESSAGE
menu to transfer or copy messages between folders.

The last window is placed below the "folder strip" and is used to display
either folder lists, address books, message lists, or messages themselves.
If a non-interlaced screen is provided, the message and address book
displays will start below the Command Icon Tool Bar (overlaying the folder
strip) rather than below the folder strip.  This is done to provide more
room for the message or address book display since the number of
displayable lines is limited.

Other windows are also provided which cover the entire screen below the
title bar for the purpose of providing configuration information and for
composing messages.

Each of the windows is described in detail in the WINDOW section below.

While the Command Icon Tool Bar and the folder strip are being displayed,
a contextual help line is provided in the Command Icon Tool Bar window
title bar below the screen's title bar.  As you pass the mouse cursor over
any command or folder icon, a description of that command or folder will
be displayed in the window title bar.  The main window menu bar should
also be active whenever the mouse pointer moves to the "folder strip" or
above.

All command and folder icons are surrounded by a raised box.  Whenever a
command or folder is selected, the box will become depressed.

When AEMail is first activated and you are online and have mail and accept
it's transfer by clicking on [YES], the message list for the INBOX folder
will be displayed.  As each mail message is received you will see it added
to the message list of the INBOX unless a filter causes it to be added to
a different folder.

If you clicked on [View on Server], the POP server message list will be
displayed. To speed up this process, only the message headers are read and
the message list will not be displayed until all of the headers are read.
The busy indicator will appear while the message headers are being read
and the status line at the top of the screen will indicate each message as
it is obtained.  If you have a lot of messages on the POP Server, this
could take some time.

If you are transferring or copying messages from the POP Server message
list into AEMail using the "Transfer" or "Copy" commands you will not see
the messages being added to the INBOX folder.  The POP Server message list
will remain displayed.  Any messages that are deleted from the POP Server
will be removed from the list.  However, any new messages arriving at the
POP Server while the server message list is displayed will not be added to
the list.  They will only be available after the server list is no longer
being displayed.  You can remove the POP Server message list by displaying
the message list of one of the message folders.

If you are offline or there is no mail or mail is not being checked, the
folder list will be displayed.  Double clicking on either the name of a
folder in the list or one of the folder icons will cause the message list
for that folder to be displayed.

Double clicking on a message in the message list (except the Server
message list) will cause that particular message to be displayed.  If you
double click on a message in the POP Server message list an error message
will be displayed as follows:

           Error: Can not display message in POP Server Folder!

To view a message on the POP Server, you will have to first download it to
AEMail using the Transfer or Copy commands.

If you have selected a time increment in the TCP/IP page of the
Configuration Setup Window (the default is 2 minutes), a background
process will be started which checks your POP server every few minutes (as
specified by the interval) for messages.  If there are any messages, the
following requester will pop up:


                             YOU HAVE MAIL!!

                  n Messages available on the POP Server

                Do you wish to receive these messages now?

As with the initial mail requester, you will have three choices as
follows:

                [YES]        [View on Server]          [NO]


Replying [YES] to the above requester will start the retrieval of the
messages.  This requester will only pop up when you are not in the middle
of some function such as composing a message, transferring or saving a
message, printing a message, performing configuration changes, or
displaying the message list on the POP server.

The requester will pop up on the Workbench screen if you have AEMail
iconified.  If you select [Yes], the messages will be retrieved silently in
the background.  You will not see the message retrieval progress.  If you
select [View on Server] you will be instructed to un-iconify before you
can view on the server.

NOTE:  if you did not specify that you wanted messages deleted from your
POP server as you transferred them to your Amiga, the "YOU HAVE MAIL"
requester will pop up each time the system checks for mail.  It will also
pop up if you have left messages on the POP Server following a previous
display of the message list on the POP Server.  If you don't want this
requester to continuously pop up, you probably should increase the time
interval.  You can always check for messages on your POP Server by using
the "View Message List on Server" menu item in the Retrieve Messages menu.
If you select this menu item while you are displaying the POP Server
message list the POP Server message list will be updated.


                         Getting HELP with AEMail
                         ------------------------

AEMail has a very extensive context sensitive help system.  Some help is
provided automatically.  As you pass the cursor over the Command Icon Tool
bar, the description of the icons appear in the window title bar above the
icons.  Likewise, as you pass the cursor over the folder icons, the folder
description also appears in the window title bar.

In addition, pressing the [Help] key will bring up a description of what
you are currently seeing or trying to do.  This help is taken from the
"AEMail.guide" file which normally is located in the AEMail2:documentation
directory.  If you located the guide file somewhere else you will have to
use the Tool Type "HELP=" to identify the location of the guide file.
This must be done manually in each of your AEMail project icons.

If you did not choose to install the current AEMail.guide file, you will
not be able to use the [Help] key.  In fact you will receive a requester
that looks like this when you first load AEMail:

                 Error: (AmigaGuide) Can't Open database!

                                [Continue]

Clicking on [Continue] will allow you to continue running AEMail but the
[Help] key will be effectively disabled.  If you are using an old
"AEMail.guide" file you may get a requester saying that a particular help
page could not be found.  Also, the information on the page being
displayed may not be up to date.

You can receive help with any of the menus as well as with any of the
windows that are being displayed.  To receive help with a menu or menu
item, press the [Help] key when you hold down the Right Mouse button.
Help will be displayed for the menu or menu item that is currently
highlighted.

Also, certain key combinations will display different "AEMail.guide"
pages.  If you press either Shift keys when you press [Help], the main
guide table of contents will be displayed.

If you are in a string entry gadget, pressing either [Alt] keys with the
[Help] key will display the page describing "Editing String Entry
Gadgets".

WARNING:  Because of a bug in ClassAct, some string gadgets will not be
reactivated after the help page is displayed.  You will have to click into
the gadget to reactivate it.

                     USING AEMail AS A "MailTo" AGENT
                     --------------------------------

A number of Amiga web Browsers allow you to select an external Mail agent
to be used for sending email when a "mailto:" HTML link is specified.
AEMail can be used as such an external mail agent.

There are two methods in which AEMail can be used as an external Mail
agent for sending "mailto:" email messages.  The first method is to call
AEMail directly.  This method has the restriction that AEMail must NOT be
running when you start up your browser.  When you click on the "mailto:"
link, AEMail will be loaded, the Compose message window will be displayed,
you will then be able to compose and send the message, and AEMail will
terminate.

The second method is to use an ARexx script to call AEMail for composing
and sending your email.  With this method AEMail can be running in the
background and is entered each time you want to compose and send a
message.  When the ARexx script is used, you can also receive email while
your browser is running.  A generic ARexx script is descibed below, but a
more sophisticated one called "mailto.aem" is provided in the AEMail ARexx
directory.  If you use this script you should move it to the REXX:
directory.

To use either method, set the "mailto" function to call an external
program.

                    Mailto by Calling AEMail Directly
                    ---------------------------------

On the configuration setup for your browser specify AEMail as your
"mailto:" agent by using the full path name of AEMail and the token for
specifying the "mailto:" email address.

As an example, for AWeb-II you can specify the following:

    AEMail2:AEMail %e

You do this by bringing up the Network Settings menu item under Settings.
On the display click on the Mail/News tab and then the Mail tab.

In the display, checkmark "Use external mailer" and the Command and
Argument string gadgets will become unghosted.  Enter

    AEMail2:AEMail

on the Command line, and

    %e

on the Argument line

Be sure and save your AWeb-II settings once you make the change.

Other browsers, if they use this capability, may have a different way to
specify the "mailto" user agent and the token for specifying where to
place the email address.  The token may change from version to version of
your browser.  Consult your browser documentation for how to do this.

The documentation for IBrowse, unfortunately, does not provide any
information on how to set up an external "mailto:" agent.  However it can
be done.  Follow these steps for IBrowse versions before 2.x:

    Select the Preferences menu in IBrowse
    Select Network
    Select "Email & Telnet" tab
    Under "Mailto:" Set the External mode
    For the command give the full path name of the AEMail program and
        follow it with %h

    example:  AEMail2:AEMail %h

    Select O.K.

    Be sure to "Save Settings" under the Preferences menu

The display used in IBrowse version 2.1 and above is slightly different.
The menu item that you use is Preferences/Settings.  Instead of tabs it
has a list of items on the left of the Preferences/Settings display.
Under Network you need to expand the list by clicking on the [+].  You
will now see the "Email & Telnet" on the list and the [+] will become [-].

Click on "Email & Telnet" and you will see a similar display to that used
in 1.x shown on the right.  Continue as you would with earlier versions of
IBrowse.

SPECIAL NOTE:  In IBrowse 2.1 the "Command" string gadget remains ghosted
which means that with 2.1 you CAN NOT specify an external "mailto:" agent.
Hopefully this will be corrected in later versions of IBrowse.

In order for the "mailto:" agent to work properly, AEMail must NOT be
running when you start up your browser.  When you click on the "mailto:"
link, AEMail will be loaded, the Compose message window will be displayed,
you will then be able to compose and send the message, and AEMail will
terminate.

If you have a custom configuration file (other than s:aemail.cnfg), you
should also add the argument "config=name-of-config-file" to the "mailto"
calling argument.  As an example, using IBrowse:

    AEMail2:AEMail %h config=name-of-file


                            MailTo Using ARexx
                            ------------------

Rather than use the "mailto:" capability described above, you can also
call an ARexx script which calls the Compose function of AEMail.  Such a
script for any browser would be as follows:

    /* Arexx AEMail Mailto Compose */
    OPTIONS RESULTS
    parse arg userid screen a

    ADDRESS AEMAIL1
    SCREENTOFRONT AEMAIL
    COMPOSE MAILTO userid
    SCREENTOFRONT screen
    if (result = 0) then okay1 "Bad Public Screen"
    exit

This script requires AEMail to be running when the script is called.  A
more sophisticated script which is contained in the AEMail ARexx directory
called "mailto.aem" automatically loads AEMail if it was not already
loaded.

The above script is saved in the REXX:  directory as "mailto.aem".

The call that is placed on the command line in the "Mailto:" in IBROWSE
would be:

    rx mailto.aem %h %p

If you have not moved or saved the "mailto.aem" script in the REXX:
directory you can call it from the AEMail ARexx directory by specifying:

    rx AEMail2:ARexx/mailto.aem %h %p

Note the use of the full path name for calling the "mailto.aem" script.

The advantage of using ARexx is that AEMail can be running while you are
doing your web browsing.  If you happen to receive email during this time,
a requester will then pop up saying that you have mail and asking if you
want to read it.

In the IBrowse ARexx call above notice the argument %p.  This is the token
that passes the IBrowse screen name to AEMail.  This allows AEMail to
bring the IBrowse screen to the front after the message is sent (or
queued).

PLEASE NOTE:  There is a problem with IBrowse 2.1 in that you can not
enter an external mailer.

With AWeb-II you would enter rx on the command line and

    mailto.aem %e %n

if "mailto.aem" is in the REXX: directory or, if calling from the AEMail
ARexx directory:

    AEMAIL2:ARexx/mailto.aem %e %n

on the argument line.

Notice the difference between the tokens in IBrowse and AWeb-II.  %h and
%p are used for the email and screen tokens in IBrowse; %e and %n are used
for these tokens in AWeb-II.

                         Using Keyboard Hot Keys
                         -----------------------

While AEMail was designed to utilize the mouse for activating commands,
there are a number of keyboard hot keys that can be used to activate
commands on the command strip without using the mouse.  There are also
keyboard actions for moving the various listviews up and down.  Also, most
of the menu items can use a keyboard hot keys for activating them.

A key command has been assigned to each of the command strip icons.  When
a menu item duplicates the action of a command on the command strip, the
menu keyboard hot key is used.  A summary of the keyboard action that can
be taken for each of the commands on the command icon strip is given
below:

    Command Strip Icon                          Key Code
    ------------------                          --------

    Display Folder List                         f
    Display Address Book                        a
    Retrieve Messages                           Right Amiga m
    Display Previous Message                    Cursor Left
    Display Previous Folder's Message List      Shift Cursor Left
    Display Current Folder's Message List       =
    Display Next Folder's Message List          Shift Cursor Right
    Display Next Message                        Cursor Right
    Compose A Message
        Compose a new message                   Right Amiga n
        Reply to current message                Right Amiga r
        Forward current message                 Right Amiga >
        Edit current message                    Right Amiga e
    Queue Message For Later Delivery            q
    Send Message Immediately                    s
    Export (Save) Message To File               Right Amiga v
    Print                                       Right Amiga p
    Delete/Undelete Message                     x, Right Amiga x
    Copy Messages to a New Folder               Right Amiga =
    Transfer Messages to a New Folder           Right Amiga -
    Start TCP/IP Network Connection             Right Amiga t
    Terminate TCP/IP Network Connection         Right Amiga h

These key codes are also shown on the icon information line that appears
when you pass the mouse over the command icons.

The "=" key also toggles the message selection indicator (*)

When you are displaying a list, the following keys move the listview:

    "Cursor Down" moves the listview one row down.
    "Cursor Up" moves the listview one row up.
    "Home" or "ALT Cursor Up" moves the listview to the top.
    "End" or "ALT Cursor Down" moves the listview to the botton.
    "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up.  The
        top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
        line of the new page.
    "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
        The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
        top line of the new page.
    The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
        the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift and ALT
        feature.

Since the cursor keys are used to move the listview up or down, the space
bar is used to manipulate the selected row on the listview.  The action of
the the space bar in conjuction with control keys is as follows:

    Space Bar               Selects the next item in the list
    Shift Space Bar         Selects the previous item in the list
    Left Amiga Space Bar    Selects the first item in the list
    Right Amiga Space Bar   Selects the last item in the list

The item selected will be highlighted.  If it was previously selected with
the "*" indicator, it will be de-selected ("*" removed); otherwise it will
be selected with an "*".

When one of the above sets of keys are pressed, the current item is
unselected ("*" is toggled).  To keep the current item selected, press the
"Ctrl" key at the same time as you press the appropriate key combination.
Always remember to press the control keys (shift, left Amiga, right Amiga,
or ctrl) before you press the space bar.

Pressing the RETURN key when a row is highlighted is the same as double
clicking on that item.  In other words, if you are displaying the folder
list and you hit the RETURN key, the message list for the highlighted
folder will be displayed.

Unfortunately, gadgets in subsiderary windows do not have key codes
assigned to them at this time.  You can activate requester gadgets however
by pressing "Left Amiga v" for the left most gadget and "Left Amiga b" for
the right most gadget.  Center gadgets, if present, do not have an assigned
key code.  Requesters with this action are only those that appear at the
left most top corner of the screen.

                       Editing String Entry Gadgets
                       ----------------------------

A number of windows in AEMail use string entry gadgets for entering data.
These gadgets look like long rectangles with a cursor which allows you to
type in the data you want.  There are a number of special key combinations
that can aid you in the entry process.  These are:

    Cursor Left         Move cursor to previous character
    Shift Cursor Left   Move cursor to the beginning of the string
    Cursor Right        Move cursor to next character
    Shift Cursor Right  Move cursor to the end of the string
    Del                 Delete the character under the cursor
    Shift Del           Delete from the character under the cursor to the
                        end of the line
    Backspace           Delete the character to the left of the cursor
    Shift Backspace     Delete from the character to the left of the cursor
                        to the start of the line
    Return or Enter     Terminate input and deactivate the gadget
    Tab                 Terminate input and activate the next string gadget
    Shift Tab           Terminate input and activate the previous string
                        gadget
    Right Amiga c       Copy the string to the current clipboard unit
                        (either c or C will work)
    Right Amiga d       Copy default value to the string.  Only works on
                        the Configuration Setup Window (Note:  either d or
                        D will work).
    Right Amiga f       Calls the file requester in strings that use file
                        requesters.  Only works on the Configuration
                        Setup Window (Note: either f or F will work).
    Right Amiga p       Used only in the Identity Page of the
                        Configuration  Setup  Window with the POP3 UserID:
                        string to call Set Password (Note:  either p or P
                        will work).
    Right Amiga q       Undo (cancel) the last editing change to the string
                        (Note: either q or Q will work)
    Right Amiga u       Change the current clipboard unit
    Right Amiga U       Display a list of the current active clipboard
                        units and their contents
    Right Amiga v       Paste the contents of the current clipboard unit
                        to the string (either v or V will work)
    Right Amiga x       Clears the string (either x or X will work)

In addition, the following editing functions are available if the IControl
preferences editor has "Text Gadget Filter" selected.  Note: either the
upper or lower case alphabetic character will work.

    Ctrl A              Jump cursor to the start of the string
    Ctrl H              Delete the character to the left of the cursor
    Ctrl K              Delete from the character under the cursor to the
                        end of the line
    Ctrl M              Same as Return or Enter
    Ctrl W              Delete the previous word
    Ctrl U              Delete from the character to the left of the cursor
                        to the start of the line
    Ctrl X              Clears the string
    Ctrl Z              Jump cursor to end of the string.

All of the above characteristics of string editing are standard with the
Amiga with the exception of those keystrokes that involve the clipboard,
file requesters, and default values.

The clipboard functions are specific to AEMail, although other programs
may have similar functions using the same key combinations built into
them.  For more information on using the clipboard see "Using the
Clipboard with AEMail" below.

The default, file requester, and "Set Password" functions are also
specific to AEMail.


                      Using the Clipboard with AEMail
                      -------------------------------

On the Amiga, the clipboard provides a facility for passing information
from one program to another, or for saving information for re-use in the
same program.  AEMail utilizes the clipboard in several ways:

Each string entry gadget has the ability of copying the current contents
of the string to the clipboard or of pasting the contents of the clipboard
to the string gadget.  In that manner information can be saved and re-used
at a later time.

You can also obtain a line from a message, edit it, and save that to the
clipboard; or you can save the entire contents of the message body to the
clipboard.  If you are using an editor that also supports the clipboard,
you can retrieve information that you previously copied to the clipboard
and insert it into a message you are composing.

If your browser supports the clipboard, you can use the above method to
capture a URL that is embedded in a message and then paste it into the
browser's URL string.  There is also a facility to directly transfer an
email or web (URL) address to a browser or within AEMail by the use of a
function key and an ARexx script.

AEMail supports the use of multiple clipboards (up to 256 separate
clipboard units), so different information can be copied to separate
clipboard units and retrieved later.  If other external programs also
support multiple clipboard units you can pass separate pieces of
information to those programs.

With each string entry gadget in AEMail you can use "Right Amiga C" or "Right
Amiga c" (either upper or lower case c) to copy the information from a
string to a clipboard unit.  Likewise, you can use "Right Amiga V" or "Right
Amiga v" (upper or lower case v) to paste the information into the string
gadget.  This works with all string gadgets except the "Enter Password" or
"Set Password" (in the Identity page of the Configuration Setup Window)
string gadgets.

Generally speaking when you use the paste operation in a string gadget, it
will replace the contents of the string gadget with the contents of the
clipboard.  The exception to this is with the To:, cc:, and bcc:  string
gadgets on the Compose Message Window and when editing a string that is
captured from a message (see below).

For the To:, cc:, and bcc:  string gadgets, the clipboard data will be
ADDED to what was previously in the string gadget.  Any added email
addresses added with the paste operation will be separated from the
previous addresses with a comma.

If  you  double  click  on  a  line in a message that is being displayed, a
special window will open at the top of the screen which looks like this:


|=========================================================================|
|o| Edit and save message line to clipboard; set ARexx variable
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                         |
| [Message line appears here                                            ] |
|                                                                         |
| [ SAVE CLIP ]              [CHANGE CLIP UNIT]              [  CANCEL  ] |
|_________________________________________________________________________|


You can use the copy and paste to and from the clipboard unit while you
are editing within the string entry gadget above.  However, if you paste
to the string, the data in the clipboard will be inserted at your cursor
position.  This is different from all other string entry gadgets where the
pasted data replaces whatever was in the string gadget before.  This
feature for the editing and saving of a line from a message can facilitate
building a clipboard line from different lines in the message.  To do
this, edit the first line so that just the portion that you want added or
inserted to a second line remains in the string.  Copy this to a clipboard
unit ([SAVE CLIP]).  Then double click on a second line.  Position the
cursor where you want the first clipboard data to appear and perform the
paste operation.  The previously copied data will be inserted at that
point.

When you click on either the [SAVE CLIP], [CANCEL], or the close gadget at
the top of the window, the edit window will disappear.  Clicking on the
[SAVE CLIP] will save the edited string to the current clipboard unit and
clicking on the [CANCEL] or close gadget will exit without saving.

Warning:  using the copy function from within the string gadget with
"Right Amiga c" will always copy the current contents of the string to the
clipboard whether or not you later click on the [CANCEL] or the close
gadget.  There is no way to undo this operation.  However, using the copy
function from within the string gadget will not close the edit window.

Clicking on the [CHANGE CLIP UNIT] in the edit window or typing "Right Amiga
u" (lower case u only) from any string gadget will bring up a special
window that will allow you to change the current clipboard unit.  This
window looks like this:


                         |=======================|
                         |o|Enter Clipboard Unit |
                         |-----------------------|
                         |                       |
                         | [         ] (0 - 255) |
                         |                       |
                         | [  OK  ]     [CANCEL] |
                         |_______________________|


You can enter any clipboard unit between 0 or 255 in the numeric gadget.
If you type RETURN after entering the number or click on [OK], the
clipboard unit you entered will become the new clipboard unit and the
window will close.  Clicking on the [CANCEL] gadget or the close gadget
will close the window without changing the current clipboard unit.

Since you may have data stored in multiple clipboard units and may forget
which clipboard unit has what data, another feature has been provided.  If
you type "Right Amiga U" (upper case U - shift and u) while you are editing
a string, the Clipboard Display window will be shown which looks like this:


               |===========================================|
               |o| Contents of Clip List                   |
               |-------------------------------------------|
               | Clip Contents                             |
               | ========================================= |
               | |  0 Contents of clip 0               | | |
               | |  2 Contents of clip 2               | | |
               | |                                     | | |
               | |                                     | | |
               | |                                     | | |
               | ========================================= |
               |                                           |
               | [  OK  ]     [NEW CLIP UNIT]     [CANCEL] |
               |___________________________________________|


This shows all of the clipboard units that have data stored in them and
the contents of each clipboard unit in a listview.  Clipboard units may be
skipped as shown in the illustration above.  Since the contents of a
clipboard can be a complete file, the first non-blank line will be
displayed and leading spaces will be stripped.  Only text clips will be
displayed.  Only 40 characters can be displayed.  If the line is longer
than 40 characters, the first 30 characters will be shown followed by
three periods and the last 7 characters.

Only clips with data will be shown.  The current clipboard unit will be
highlighted if it contains data.  Since it is possible to have a clipboard
unit assigned WITHOUT any data, you may see none of the units highlighted.
You can change to one of the clipboard units shown by clicking on it (it
will become highlighted) and then clicking on [OK].  You can also change to
a clipboard unit not shown by clicking on [NEW CLIP UNIT].  [CANCEL] and
the close gadget will close the window without any changes taking place.

A further feature of this window is to provide an automatic paste
capability by double clicking on one of the units being displayed.  That
will automatically paste the contents of the selected unit to the string.
If the selected clip is a file, only the first non-blank line will be
pasted and leading spaces will be stripped.  The "Right Amiga V" method of
pasting from within a string gadget also has this feature for multiple
line files.

Another clipboard feature of AEMail is the ability to save the body of
messages and text attachments to the clipboard.  When you click on the
[SAVE TEXT] or [ATTACHMENT] button when you are displaying a message you
will be given the chance to save the text as a CLIP and also to change the
clipboard unit.  See the "Message Display Window" under VIII. AEMAIL
WINDOWS for a description of the requesters that appear to do this.


            Using Web and Email addresses embedded in messages
            --------------------------------------------------

If a message you have received contains a web address you can capture that
address, copy it to the clipboard, or actually call your web browser to
display the web page directly.

You can also capture email addresses embedded in a message, compose a
message to be directed to that address, or add that address to your
address book.

The method used to do this in AEMail is similar to that used in the
previous section which described the use of the clipboard.  We combine
that with the help of some pre-defined ARexx scripts.

Two event exits have also been provided to directly call ARexx scripts
when you double click on either the web or email address (see below).

If a message contains an email address (determined by the @ between
adjoining strings) or a web address (determined by www.  or http:  within
the string) you can double click on that line.  Depending on how you set
up your ARexx commands you will either directly execute an appropriate
ARexx script or the "Edit and save message line to clipboard; set ARexx
variable" window as shown below:


|=========================================================================|
|o| Edit and save message line to clipboard; set ARexx variable           |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                                         |
| [http://www,calweb.com/~jzachar/                                      ] |
|                                                                         |
| [ SAVE CLIP ]              [CHANGE CLIP UNIT]              [  CANCEL  ] |
|_________________________________________________________________________|


will appear at the top of the screen.  Rather than the entire line, just
the email address or the web address will be transferred to the string.
If the web address does not have http:// at the beginning of the string,
that will be added.  The example above shows the AEMail web address which
is included as part of the signature block of messages I send.

If you hold down the shift key when you double click on such an address,
the entire line will be transferred (just as is normally done with other
message lines) and not just the email or web address.

The "Edit and save message line to clipboard; set ARexx variable" window
has one menu associated with it: the ARexx/DOS menu that is the same as
that used in the main menu strip.  Holding down the right mouse button
when this window is activated will bring up that menu.

If you have transferred an email or web address you can hit a function key
or use the right (Menu) mouse button to call the AREXX/DOS command menu to
execute an ARexx script.  The email address or web address will be
transferred to a special variable and the script will be executed.  If the
script contains the ARexx command GETVAR it will receive the variable
string in the RESULT variable and can act on it.

Two event exits have also been provided which avoid bringing up the
clipboard window.  If these exits are activated, the ARexx script assigned
to the exit will be immediately executed when you double click on the web
address or the email address.  Assigning the ARexx scripts to the event
exits is done in the same manner as assigning ARexx scripts to function
keys and to menu items (see the ARexx Page of the Configuration Setup
Window.)

You can force the clipboard window to appear by pressing the CTRL key when
you double click on the web or email address.  This is desireable if you
want alternative actions to take place when double clicking on an address.
You can then select the appropriate action with the function key or the
ARexx/DOS menu.

Several sample ARexx scripts have been placed in your ARexx directory
which can extract the address from the special variable and call your web
browser to go to that web page (html.aem), send a message to the email
address (sendmsg.aem) or place the email address in the address book
either as an individual address (placeaddr.aem) or as a group address
(placegrp.aem), and to delete an address from a group (deladrgrp.aem).

Before using this feature, you will have to assign the scripts to a
function key (your choice) or an event exit using the ARexx Page of the
Configuration Setup Window.  You should also give each of the scripts a
"Menu Title" so that it will show up in your "ARexx/DOS" menu.  If you did
not assign an event exit, function key or "Menu Title", you can always find
the script using the "Send ARexx/DOS Command..." menu item in the
"ARexx/DOS" menu.

Keep in mind, however, if you are an un-registered user, the function key
and menu information will not be saved between calls to AEMail.  If you
quit AEMail, this information (function key or menu) will not be available
when you next load AEMail.

When the function key is activated or a menu item selected, the clip
window will disappear whether or not a script is attached to that function
key.

If you have transferred a line to the clip window that is not a email or
web address or have edited the clip line, the function key will not work
unless you press return first.  That is because the string gadget is
activated in those situations.  With the email or web address the string
gadget is not activated.  You can tell if the string gadget is activated
or not by the presence of a cursor in the string.


                      Filtering Messages with AEMail
                      ------------------------------

What is message filtering?  Message filtering is the ability to direct
incoming messages to specific folders or to automatically exclude certain
messages from being stored in the system.

AEMail has a very powerful message filtering system.  It can direct (or
exclude) messages based upon information in the To:, From:, Reply-To:,
Subject:, cc:, bcc:, or Date: headers and (for registered users only) any
other header or text in the body of the message.  It can also use the fact
that a message is a reply, has attachments, or is forwarded as filtering
criteria.  Information in the header or body text that is checked can be a
word or phrase and wild cards can be used.  Information can also be case
sensitive or insensitive as the user desires.

AND and OR relationships can also be made with information coming from
different headers.

Filtering criteria is defined in the folder description which can be be
modified or created by using either the "Edit" or "New" sub-topic under
the "Folders menu".  See the description of the "Filter Selection Window"
under Section VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS in this documentation for a complete
description on how to set up the filtering criteria.

Setting up the appropriate filtering criteria for any folder designed to
receive incoming messages with cause incoming messages (either from your
POP server or from files) to be stored in that folder rather than the
INBOX.

Setting up filtering criteria for the INBOX will automatically exclude any
message meeting that criteria from being stored in the INBOX.  In other
words, filtering criteria in the INBOX is used to prevent certain messages
from being stored on your system.

Filtering criteria can not be set up for folders designed for messages
sent out of your system.  Only messages as they are being received are
checked.  Filtering is done "on the fly" as a message enters the system.


                 Viewing Message Lists on the POP Server
                 ---------------------------------------

There are times when you may find it useful to view a list of messages
currently on your POP Server without downloading them into AEMail.  From
this list of messages you may choose to delete certain messages from your
POP Server or selectively download certain messages.  AEMail provides such
a facility.

When you initially access your POP server, you will be given the
opportunity to view messages on your POP Server without downloading them.
This is done with the [View on Server] response in the Message Available
requester.  Clicking on this response will bring up a list of your mail on
the POP Server.  The list will be displayed in a window similar to one of
your folder Message List windows.  This window will be titled "Message
List for Server Folder (Messages currently on your POP Server)" and will
list all messages currently on your POP Server.

To speed up this process, only the message headers are read and the
message list will not be displayed until all of the headers are read.  The
busy indicator will appear while the message headers are being read and
the status line at the top of the screen will indicate each message as it
is obtained.  If you have a lot of messages on the POP Server, this could
take some time.

The POP Server is active thoughout the display of this list.  To
disconnect the POP Server and close this window you will have to double
click on one of your message folders.

The same response appears in the "You Have Mail" requester.  This
requester will not appear if you are currently viewing mail on your POP
Server.  Any new mail recieved while the POP Server message list is active
will not be added to the list.

You can also view the message list on the POP Server at any time by using
the menu item "View Message list on Server" in the "Retrieve Messages"
menu.  If you select this menu item while you are viewing the POP Server
message list, the message list will be updated with any new mail received
on the Server.

You can directly delete messages by selecting a message or group of
messages and clicking on either the Delete icon or selecting the
Delete/Undelete menu item under the Messages menu.  When you delete a
message it will be removed from your POP Server.  You will no longer be
able to retrieve it. The message will also disappear from the message
list.

Likewise you can selectively download messages by using either the
"Transfer" icon (or the "Transfer..." menu item) or the "Copy" icon (or
the "Copy..." menu item) after you have seleced a message or group of
messages.  "Transfer" will also delete the message from the POP Server.
"Copy" will not.

You can not display a message from the POP Server message list.  If you
try to display such a message by double clicking on it (as you would on
other message lists), an error message will be displayed as follows:

           Error: Can not display message in POP Server Folder!

To view a message on the POP Server, you will have to first download it to
AEMail using the Transfer or Copy commands.
                        VI. COMMAND ICON TOOL BAR

The Command Icon Tool Bar provides icons for accessing the major functions
of AEMail.  Each icon is described below.  Besides clicking on an icon to
activate that function, you can also use certain "hot keys" to perform
that function.  These are described with each icon description.

Many of the functions activated by the icon tool bar can also be activated
by menu items that are described later in this document.


                           Display Folder List
                           -------------------

Activation key code: "f"

This icon looks like a file cabinet.  Clicking on the icon will cause the
folder list to be displayed in the lower window.  This list shows each
folder with its short name (INBOX, PENDING, etc), a description of the
folder, the number of unread mesages in the folder, and the total number
of messages in the folder.

Unlike the count displayed in the folder icon, the total number of
messages includes any messages marked for deletion.

The folder list does not include the POP Server folder.  If you were
displaying the POP Server message list when you activate this command, the
POP Server message list remains active.  To return to it you can click on
the "Display Current Folder's Message List" icon described below.

                           Display Address Book
                           --------------------

Activation key code: "a"

This icon looks like a closed book with the letter A on its cover.
Clicking on this icon will display the Address Book window.

Each address book entry contains three fields:  Nickname, Real Name, and
UserID (Address).  In addition, entries can be provided for groups with a
distribution list.  The group is identified with the heading "DISTRIBUTION
LIST" along with the number of items in the list in the top most UserID
field.  The UserID's for the members of that list are shown below that
heading.

For items in the distribution list, real UserID's or Nicknames can be
used.  An item in the distribution list can also be another distribution
list (In this case, only a Nickname can be used).  All nicknames are
expanded to Real Name and UserID when mail is sent.

A checkbox item, called "Expand" to the right of the Address Book headings
allows the user to either expand and show all members of the group or
shrink the address book so that only the group header is displayed.  This
item is normally checked indicating the groups are in expanded mode.  If
the check mark is removed, the group entries will shrink showing only the
group headings.  This feature is only available to registered users.

Currently, address book entries are sorted by Nickname and group entries
are interspersed with single entries.  Also Real Names are presented as
first name followed by last name rather than last name, first name.

If you are displaying a message, or have a message selected, when you
click on the Address Book icon, the "Reply-To:" address, if present, will
be transferred to the UserID address in the Address Book.  If the
Reply-To:  address is not present, the From:  address will be used.  If a
Real Name is present in the address it also will be transferred.  You can
force the From:  address to be transferred by holding down the shift key
when you click on the Address Book icon.  This process facilitates
transferring names and UserIDs to the Address Book.  Please keep in mind
that Reply-To: addresses normally do not have real names associated with
them, but From: addresses many times do.  If you want the real name you
may have to hold down the shift key when you click on the Address Book
icon.

This will also work if you select a message in the POP Server message list
and click on the Address Book icon.

The first time AEMail is loaded, a special Address Book entry with a
nickname of "AEMAIL" is created.  This entry can be used to send bug
reports and messages about AEMail to my email address.

Address book data is stored in a file in your AEMail directory called
".addrbook".

A more complete description of the Address Book window is given later
under Section VIII.  AEMAIL WINDOWS, Address Book Window.


                            Retrieve Messages
                            -----------------

Activation key code: Right Amiga m

This icon looks like an envelope with an arrow coming in.  When selected,
AEMail will attempt to connect to the POP host server and transfer any
mail at the server to your Amiga.

If you are in offline mode (you are not connected to your Internet Service
Provider or AEMail can not connect, for some reason, to your POP server),
you will see a requester that asks:


                   !! We are running in Offline mode !!

               Do you wish to receive messages from files?


Clicking on [NO] will terminate the retrieval process.

Clicking on [YES] will bring up a file requester which will allow you to
select one or more files.  The directory for these files is setup as the
"Retrieve Mail Directory" in the "Paths Page" of the Configuration Setup
Window.  The default "Retrieve Mail Directory" is your program directory.

AEMail automatically recognizes mail stored as individual messages or as
message streams (such as stored by AmiPOP).  The only requirement is that
the message stream must separate messages with data beginning:

    ...<LF><LF>From [UserID]

The first message in the stream must begin with the separator without the
leading <LF>.  This is saved and checked against each line in the mail
stream (with leading <LF>) to determine where the message boundary
occurs.  This allows UserIDs other than the user's UserID in separators.

This also works with message streams saved by the "Save Message to File"
or the "Export.." item in the messages menu.

It is also assumed that lines have been stored in the file ending in <LF>
and not <CR><LF> (<CR> is $0D and <LF> is $0A).

If you encounter a message stream that does not use the above to separate
messages, please report what was used and what product was used to create
the message stream.  A copy of the message stream on floppy or sent to me
as an email attachment would be very handy.

If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider and connection can
be made to your POP mail server, all messages stored on the server will be
transferred to the Amiga.  They will be stored as individual messages in
the AEMAIL: directory with cryptic file names.

A progress window will also be displayed which will show the number of the
current message being received, the total number of messages being
received, the percentage of the current message already received and the
total bytes in the message being received.  The percentage will be shown
as both a number and a graphic slider.

This progress window also has an [ABORT] button which allows you to
terminate the receipt of the current and all remaining messages from your
POP Server.

PLEASE NOTE:  The abort process only aborts the receipt of messages into
the AMIGA, It does NOT abort the transfer of data from the POP Server.
While AEMail disconnects from the server, the server may be unaware of
this and continue to send the remainder of the message.  If AEMail
attempts to re-establish contact with the Server while it is still sending
the message AEMail may start to receive the middle of the previously
requested message.  AEMail has been programmed to recognize this and will
temporarily report that the POP connection could not be established.  Once
the POP Server finishes transferring the message, it should become
available for another connection.

The progress window will be shown both when retrieving messages from your
POP server and from files, however, if you are retrieving a message
stream, AEMail will not be able to correctly determine the number of
messages being retrieved.  Therefor the "n of n" indicator will be
incorrect.

If mail on the server is to be deleted, the "Delete Host Mail" item in the
Retrieve Messages menu must be checked.  If this menu item is not checked,
mail will NOT be deleted on your POP server.  This has no effect when you
are retrieving messages from a file.  NOTE:  the AEMail Installation
script automatically defaults to deleting host mail.  You will have to
un-check this item if you want to keep mail on your POP Server.

Since old mail may not be deleted on your server, a menu item has been
provided under the Retrieve Messages menu called "Excl Dup Msgs".  When
this item is checked duplicate messages from the mail server which are
currently stored in any incoming folder will not be stored again.  The
only folders not checked for duplicate messages are the PENDING, QUEUED
and any folder designed to hold SENT messages.  Again, the default action
with the installation script is to delete duplicate messages.

Currently, like sending messages to your Internet provider, the retrieval
process is run in the same execution mode as AEMail.  This means that all
of the messages must be received from the POP host before any other AEMail
process can take place.  Again, a future version will move the retrieval
process to a background process so you can proceed with other AEMail
functions while retrieval takes place.

You can be running another program on your Amiga, however, when the message
retrieval takes place.  If you are in iconify mode when retrieval takes
place it will be done totally in the background although you will see the
"You have mail" requester (see below).

Every time a new message is retrieved AND stored, the total and new
message counts in the folder list AND the folder icon strip will be
updated.  Also the top title bar will display the following message:

  Message n of n retrieved[/deleted] from [POP server/file], [not] saved

The first n indicates the current message number and the second n
indicates the total number of messages being retrieved.  (NOTE:  This
message will also appear when local mail files are being transferred, but
the counts may not be accurate if you are retrieving from a message
stream.  Also, the retrieval process from local files is so fast, you may
only see the message for the last retrieval.)

The [/deleted] will appear if the message has been deleted on the POP
server and [not] will appear if the message was a duplicate and was not
saved.

You can check for messages on your POP server and retrieve these messages
manually any time you wish by clicking on the RETRIEVE MESSAGES icon.
Also, the user has the option of retrieving messages automatically when
AEMail is first activated (provided you are connected to your Internet
provider), each time you execute your "startnet" script from within
AEMail, and when you quit AEMail.

You can also set a time interval in minutes in which AEMail will
periodically check for new mail (see the TCP/IP parameters page on the
Configuration Setup Window.  This function is done in the background and
if one or more messages are on your POP server, the following requester
will pop up:


                             YOU HAVE MAIL!!

                  n Messages available on the POP Server

                Do you wish to receive these messages now?

As with the initial mail requester, you will have three choices as
follows:

                [YES]        [View on Server]          [NO]

Replying [YES] to the above requester will start the retrieval of the
messages.  This requester will only pop up when you are in the main AEMail
screen and are not in the middle of some function such as composing a
message, transferring or saving a message, printing a message, performing
configuration changes, or viewing the POP Server message list.

If you clicked on [View on Server], the POP server message list will be
displayed.  The Retrieve Messages command will not provide for viewing
messages on the POP Server.  You will need to use the menu item "View
Message list on Server" in the "Retrieve Messages" menu.  If you select
this menu item while you are viewing the POP Server message list, the
message list will be updated with any new mail received on the Server.

NOTE:  if you did not specify that you wanted messages deleted from your
POP server as you transferred them to your Amiga, the "YOU HAVE MAIL"
requester will pop up each time the system checks for mail.  This will
also occur if you have left messages on the POP Server after viewing the
POP Server message list.  If you do this often, it may be a good idea to
extend the time interval so that you are not constantly receiving the "YOU
HAVE MAIL" requester.

                         Display Previous Message
                         ------------------------

Activation key code: Cursor Left

This icon is a long yellow backward arrow.  When you are displaying a
message, clicking on this icon will display the previous message in the
message list.  If you are at the first message in the list, a requester
will be displayed informing you of this.

A more complete description of the message display window is given under
Section VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS, Message Display Window.


                  Display Previous Folder's Message List
                  --------------------------------------

Activation key code: Shift Cursor Left

This icon is a short backward arrow.  Clicking on this icon will display
the previous folder's message list.

A description of the message list is given under Section VIII AEMAIL
WINDOWS, Message List Window.

                  Display Current Folder's Message List
                  -------------------------------------

Activation key code: "="

This icon looks like a folder.  Clicking on this icon will display the
current folder's message list.  This is one way to get back to the current
message list when you are displaying a message and the folder list is
obstructed.

A description of the message list is given under Section VIII AEMAIL
WINDOWS, Message List Window.

                    Display Next Folder's Message List
                    ----------------------------------

Activation key code: Shift Cursor Right

This icon is a short forward arrow.  Clicking on this icon will display
the next folder's message list.

A description of the message list is given under Section VIII AEMAIL
WINDOWS, Message List Window.

                           Display Next Message
                           --------------------

Activation key code: Cursor Right

This icon is a long yellow forward arrow.  When you are displaying a
message, clicking on this icon will display the next message in the
message list.  If you are at the last message in the list, a requester
will be displayed informing you of this.


A more complete description of the message display window is given under
Section VIII AEMAIL WINDOWS, Message Display Window.


                            Compose A Message
                            -----------------

Activation key codes: Right Amiga n (Compose a new message)
                      Right Amiga r (Reply to current message)
                      Right Amiga > (Forward current message)
                      Right Amiga e (Edit Current Message)

This icon looks like a sheet of paper with a pen on it.  The Compose a
Message function brings up the Compose Message window which is described
under Section VIII AEMAIL WINDOWS, Compose Message Window.  In this window
you will enter information about the message you are about to compose.
The information you enter includes the Nickname or UserID of the
receipient of the message, the subject and whether or not you want to send
cc's to anyone.

A special [Call Address Book] button is provided that allows you to call
up an abreviated version of the Address Book.  By clicking on an address
book name you can transfer the nickname for that address to any of the
To:, cc:, or bcc:  fields.  You select the field you want to transfer the
nickname to by a special cycle gadget in the address book display.

When the Address Book is displayed from the Compose window, all groups
will show as the group header and number of entries in that group.  For
AEMail registered users, an [Expand] checkmarked gadget will allow you to
expand the groups so you can see all of the entries.  Exiting from the
Address Book display is accomplished by double clicking on an address (it
will be transferred to the appropriate field and then the Address Book
will be closed) or by clicking on the Close gadget in the window border or
at the bottom of the window.

To compose the message text you would click on the [Compose/Edit Message]
which will call up your editor.  When you save and exit from the editor,
you will be brought back to the Compose Message window.

You can specify the format that you want you text to be sent as.  You can
select between 8-bit, 7-bit, quoted-printable, or encoded binary (BASE64).
This facilitates sending messages with foriegn character sets through
gateways that only handle 7 bit data.  The default is 8 bit.  Both
"quoted-printable" and "encoded binary" are 7 bit schemes for representing
8 bit data.  When you display a message which is in either
"quoted-printable" or "encoded binary", it will be displayed correctly.

You can also specify any attachments you want to send with the message
through the Add Attachment Requester or you can specify a signature file
or additional headers.

After supplying the required information, you can then save your message
into either the PENDING or QUEUED folder or send it directly.  If you
select [Send Message Now] you MUST be connected to your Internet provider.

If a message has been selected in any folder, except the PENDING, QUEUED,
or SENT folders, before clicking on the COMPOSE MESSAGE icon, the compose
will be treated as a reply to the selected message.  The original Reply-To
address for the message you are replying to will appear in the To:  field
on the Compose window.  If the Reply-To:  address is not present the From:
field will be used as recipient of the reply.  You can force the From:
field to be used by holding down the shift key when you click on the
Compose icon.

If you are not interested in creating a reply, you can change to creating
a new message to be sent to the same (or different) recipient, or you can
forward the message to a different recipient.

If the message you selected was on the POP Server message list it will
be treated as a new message.  However, the Reply-To:  (or From:) address
will appear in the To:  field as if it were a reply.

If the message selected was in the PENDING or QUEUED folder, you will be
allowed to either edit the selected message or create a new message.  If
you edit the message it will be stored back into the the folder you
selected or will be sent (if you click on [Send Message Now].  The old
message will be automatically removed from the system.

If the message selected was in the SENT folder you will only be able to
create a new message.

                     Queue Message For Later Delivery
                     --------------------------------

Activation key code: "q"

This icon looks like a mailbox.  This function is provided to allow the
user to mark messages that you want sent later.  Normally, NO MORE EDITING
OF THESE MESSAGES should occur once they are moved to the QUEUED folder.
However, AEMail does allow this to occur.  Messages can be moved back to
the PENDING folder with the "Transfer..." item in the Messages menu.
Messages for queuing must come from the PENDING folder.  The messages can
also be placed in either the PENDING or QUEUED folders (or sent) by the
Compose Message window.

You can send these messages manually from the QUEUED folder any time you
want by either sending the entire folder or individual messages in the
folder.  This is done by selecting the QUEUED folder and clicking on the
SEND IMMEDIATE icon (see above) or by selecting the "Send Queued Mail"
item under the PROJECT menu.  Alternately you can press the "q" key.

AEMail also allows the user the option of sending queued messages
automatically when AEMail is first activated, or when the program
terminates provided you are connected to your Internet provider (see
Section V.  STARTING AEMAIL, above).  It will also perform this check when
you make connection to your Internet provider through the StartNet script
unless you have disabled this feature with the TCP/IP Parameters page of
your Configuration Setup Window.

With this option you can compose messages when you are in an off-line
mode, save them in PENDING while you are working on them, and then QUEUE
them when you are satisfied with the message you want to send.  The Queued
messages are then automatically sent when you log onto your Internet
Provider by the StartNet command.

If no messages have been selected (or if all of the messages have been
selected),  the entire PENDING folder will be queued.  Deleted messages in
the PENDING folder are never queued.

If there are no undeleted messages in the PENDING folder a notification
requester will appear that indicates that "No messages available to
queue".

The messages that are selected will be placed in the QUEUED folder and
removed from the PENDING folder.

                         Send Message Immediately
                         ------------------------

Activation key code: "s"

This icon looks like an envelope with an arrow going out.  An attempt will
be made to send the Selected Message(s) to their recipients.  The messages
to be sent must be in either in the PENDING or QUEUED folder.  The
messages will be sent from the PENDING folder only if the PENDING folder
is selected; otherwise they will be sent from the QUEUED folder.

If messages are selected, a requester will appear that asks:

    Do you wish to send the entire [pending/queued] folder
    or just selected messages?

The choices available are:

        [ENTIRE FOLDER]     [SELECTED MESSAGES]     [CANCEL SEND]

If no messages have been selected or all of the messages in the folder are
selected, the entire selected folder will be sent without a requester
appearing.  Deleted messages are never sent.

If there are no undeleted messages in the selected folder a notification
requester will appear that indicates that "No messages available to send".

A check will then be made to see if you have an active connection to your
Internet provider.  If you do not, a requester will be displayed which
informs the user that we are in offline mode and that the messages can not
be sent.

If you are connected to your Internet Provider, a message will appear in
the top title bar that says "Connecting to SMTP Host to send mail".  Once
the SMTP connection is made.  AEMail will display "Starting to send n
messages" where n is the number of messages selected to send.  If we are
unable to connect or an error is reported back from your Internet
provider, a message will appear in the title bar showing the nature of the
error and the messages will not be sent.

Sometimes, if the error message is from your Internet Provider, you will
not be able to see all of it.  If your TCPLOG is active, you will be able
to see it on the Log File, however.

A progress window will also be displayed which will show the current
number of the message being sent, the total number of messages being sent,
the percentage of the current message already sent and the total bytes in
the current message being sent.  The percentage will be shown as both a
number and a graphic slider.

If there is more than one recipient for the message, the progress
indicator will also show "Sending to n of n recipients of message" as each
recipient of the message is contacted.  This way you will see the progress
of contacting recipients for large groups of recipients.

This progress window also has an [ABORT] button which allows you to
terminate the sending of the current and all remaining messages to your
SMTP Server.

All nicknames used in To:, cc:, and bcc:  header fields will be expanded
to the form:  Real Name<userid>.  Group nicknames will be expanded to the
Real Names and userids of all members of the group, or, if "Send Header
Only" is set for that group, only the group header will be displayed in
the To:  field.

When each message is successfully sent, the following message will be
displayed in the upper title bar:

    Mail n of n successfully sent to [To: addressee]

The n in the above message indicates the message number and the total
messages to be sent.  The [To:  addressee] indicates who the message was
addressed to.  If it was addressed to multiple addressees, the first
addressee will appear followed by ", et al...".

The message will also be placed in the SENT folder and marked as deleted
in the PENDING or QUEUED folder.

In the current version of AEMail, the send process operates in the same
execution mode as AEMail.  This means that you can not perform any other
AEMail operation until the message is either rejected by your Internet
provider or successfully received by your provider (unless you abort the
process).  In a future version, this process will be moved to a background
process so that you can perform work in AEMail while the sending of the
message proceeds.


                      Export (Save) Message To File
                      -----------------------------

Activation key code: Right Amiga v

This icon looks like a diskette.  A message must be selected before
activating this function and multiple messages can be selected.  A message
that is currently being displayed is considered a selected message.

You can not export/save a message from the POP Server message list because
that message is not in AEMail.  You must first copy or transfer the
message to AEMail before saving it.  If you try to export/save a message
being display on the POP Server message list, you will get an error
message as follows:

      Messages can not be exported/saved from the POP Server folder

You can save multiple messages as a block of messages or as individual
messages.  If you have selected multiple messages a requester will be
displayed as follows:

                   More than one message marked to save

                   Do you want to save them as a group
                             or Individually

                        If you select Individually
                       a File Requester will appear
                             for each message

                [Save as Group]        [Save Individually]


Unless you are saving the messages as a group, a requester will also be
displayed for each message which will describe the message as to Date,
From, To, and Subject and ask you if you want to perform the requested
action.  Selecting [SAVE] will display a file requester in which you will
be asked to enter the file name you want the message saved as, and
selecting [CANCEL] will not save the current message.

If you are saving the message as a group, only the file requester will
appear.

The complete message, including all attachments, is saved in the format in
which the message was received from the POP server except that
CARRAGE-RETURN/LINEFEED sequences are stored as LINEFEEDs alone.  Also,
the message ending sequence (.<CR><LF>) is eliminated and any embedded
..<CR><LF> are changed to .<LF> as they would normally appear in a
message.

If the messages are saved as a group, each message will have a special
header separating it from the following message.  This header consists of
a line feed followed by:

    From [your UserID]@[Your POP Server name] [date]

Only the special header (not the line feed) will appear for the first
message.

This facilitates importing a group of messages back into AEMail. (See
the Retrieve Messages command and the menu item From Local File...  under
the Retrieve Msgs menu.)

If you want to save the body of the message or an attachment in its
converted format, you can do that with either the [SAVE TEXT] gadget in
the message display window or with the Attachment Requester that can be
brought up when you display a message with attachments (see Attachment
Requester under VIII.  AEMAIL WINDOWS below).


                                  Print
                                  -----

Activation key code: Right Amiga p

This icon looks like a printer.  You must select the messages you want
printed prior to selecting this icon.  Multiple message selection works
with this command.  If no messages have been selected, you will be asked
if you want to print a list of the messages in that folder.  Also, if this
icon is selected while you are in the Address Book, the address book
contents will be printed.

If you are currently displaying the POP Server message list, you will not
be able to print any messages since they are not available to AEMail.
Instead you will get a notification message which says:

          You can not print a message from the POP Server folder

You can, however, print the list of messages on the POP Server.  To do
this you must not have selected any messages.

When first activated, the print function will bring up a requester asking
how many copies you wish to print.  It will be preset to 1.  You can
change this number to the number of copies you wish to print.  The [+] and
[-] gadgets to the right of the numeric entry gadget allow you to
increment or decrement the number.  Pressing RETURN or selecting the [OK]
gadget will then start the printing process.

Each of the messages will be printed in the order that they appear in your
message list.  All selected messages will be printed whether they are
marked for deletion or not.

A progress indicator will appear as each message is being sent to your
printer which shows the percent being printed and the total bytes being
printed.  This progress indicator has an [ABORT] button which allows you
to terminate the printing.  However, beware, most printers have a
substantial buffer which will probably receive all of your messages quite
quickly.  Once the messages are in the printer's buffer, the printing can
not be cancelled without turning your printer off.

A heading line will be printed on each page of the listing which contains
the following information:

Message Sent on MM/DD/YY (DOW) at HH:MM [AM/PM], [from/to] [name]  Page n

where

    MM/DD/YY is the date the message was sent (received) or composed,
    DOW is the day of the week the message was sent (received) or
        composed,
    HH:MM is the hour and minute the message was sent (received) or
        composed using a 12 hour clock,
    [AM/PM] is either AM or PM.
    [from/to] if the message was received you will see "from", and if you
        composed or sent the message you will see "to",
    [name] the full name of the sender or nickname of recipient,
    n is the the page number.

On the first page only, if there are attachments, the following line will
appear below the heading line:

This message has attachments (See last page for list).

On a separate page after the message, the attachment list will appear,
providing the "Include Attachment List in Print Out" item is checkmarked
in the General Parameters portion of the Configuration Setup Window.
Printing the attachment list is the default action.

If attachments are a Text or Message type and are either 7-bit, 8-bit, or
quoted-printable encoding format they will be printed following the body
of the message.  Other types of attachments you will have to save to a
file and print the file with an appropriate printing program.

Note:  no check is made whether a selected message is deleted or not.  If
a deleted message is selected it will be printed anyway (this is probably
desireable in certain circumstances).  If you don't want to print it,
de-select it!

This function can also print a list of all messages in a folder.  To do
this, DO NOT select any messages in the folder.  A requester will appear
when you select either the printer command icon or the Print menu item
which says:


                      No messages selected to print!

                       Do you want to print a list
                        of all the messages in the
                         [name of folder] folder?

                      [YES]                     [NO]

By selecting [YES] you will print a list of the messages.  Messages will
be printed in the order that they appear in the message list.  If you are
displaying the POP Server Message List, you will be able to print the
message list.

Selecting [NO] will terminate the printing function.

Printing uses your Preferences Printer.  You should set it up properly
before executing AEMail, but you can set it up while in AEMail by using
the General Parameters page on the Configuration Setup Window.  You can
also specify a print file that the output will be directed to.

As a default AEMail will space 4 lines down before starting to print.
This "Top Margin", however, can be changed in the General Parameters page
of the Configuration Setup Window.


                         Delete/Undelete Messages
                         ------------------------

Activation key code: "x"
                     Right Amiga x

This icon looks like a garbage can.  This will delete OR undelete all
messages that have been selected in a message list.  Whether deleting or
undeleting takes place depends on the current status of the message.  If
it is currently marked for deletion, it will be undeleted.

If you are displaying the folder list for the POP Server, this will
immediately delete the selected message from the POP Server.  There is no
way that you can undelete such a message.  Once deleted on the POP Server,
that message is forever gone.  A Warning requester will be displayed when
you try to delete a message or messages from the POP Server.  If you
choose to continue, you will see the message disappear from the server
message list.

For all other message lists, this function only marks (or unmarks)
messages for deletion.  The messages will actually be deleted only when
AEMail exits.  The message counts in the folder icons, however, will only
represent undeleted messages.  You can also suppress the display of
deleted messages in the message list by unchecking the Show/Deleted
Messages item under the Messages menu.

                  Copy Selected Messages to a new folder
                  --------------------------------------

Activation key code: Right Amiga =

This icon looks like two sheets of paper, one laying over the other.  This
will copy all selected messages from the selected folder to a new folder
or, if the POP Server message list is being displayed. retrieve the
selected messages.

When you select this icon and you are not displaying the POP Server
messsage list, a Notification window appears which says:


                    Select Folder to Copy Messages To!

                                 [CANCEL]

This window will not appear if the POP Server message list is being
displayed!

When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
folder you want the messages copied to.  The window will automatically
disappear at that time.

The selected messages will be copied to that folder.  Messages will remain
in both folders.

Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
operation.

As the messages are being copied, the folder message list that the
messages are copied to will be displayed (unless a message is being
displayed).  Once the copy is complete, the folder message list from which
the messages are copied will be displayed unless a message is being
displayed.

If the POP Server message list is being displayed, message retrieval will
take place.  All message filtering will be in effect and you will see the
progress bar as each message is retrieved.  Messages will remain on the
POP Server.

                Transfer Selected Messages to a new folder
                ------------------------------------------

Activation key code: Right Amiga -

This icon looks like a sheet of paper with arrows pointing to the right.
It will move all selected messages from the selected folder to a new
folder or, if the POP Server message list is being displayed.  retrieve
the selected messages and delete them from the POP Server.

When you select this icon and you are not displaying the POP Server
message list, a Notification window appears which says:


                  Select Folder to Transfer Messages To!

                                 [CANCEL]

This window will not appear if the POP Server message list is being
displayed!

When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
folder you want the messages transferred to.  The window will
automatically disappear at that time.

The selected messages will be copied to that folder, and the messages in
the folder from which the messages are copied will be marked as "deleted".

Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
operation.

As the messages are being transferred, the folder message list that the
the messages are transferred to will be displayed (unless a message is
being displayed).  Once the transfer is complete, the folder message list
from which the messages are copied and deleted will be displayed unless a
message is being displayed.

If the POP Server message list is being displayed, message retrieval will
take place.  All message filtering will be in effect and you will see the
progress bar as each message is retrieved.  Messages will be deleted on
the POP Server and you will see them disappear from the POP Server message
list.

                     Start TCP/IP Network Connection
                     -------------------------------

Activation key code: Right Amiga t

This icon looks like a horizontal jagged line.  This will start your
network connection to your Internet Provider using your StartNet script.
It performs the same function as the "Start Net" item under the TCP/IP
menu (see below under Section VII, AEMAIL MENUS.

                   Terminate TCP/IP Network Connection
                   -----------------------------------

Activation key code: Right Amiga h

This icon looks like a horizontal jagged line with a red slash through it.
This will terminate your network connection to your Internet Provider
using your StopNet script.  It performs the same function as the "Stop
Net" item under the TCP/IP menu (see below under Section VII, AEMAIL
MENUS.

                            VII. AEMAIL MENUS

Whenever you are displaying folder lists, message lists, or messages
themselves a menu strip is active and will be displayed when you press the
right mouse button.

Below is a list of all the current menus in the AEMail menu strip:

    Project menu
    Folders menu
    Messages menu
    Retrieve Messages menu
    TCP/IP menu
    ARexx/DOS menu

The ARexx/DOS menu is also available when the "Edit and save message line
to clipboard; set ARexx variable" window is active.

A description of each of the menus, menu items, and sub-items is given
below:


                               Project menu
                               ------------

Configuration...

    This has five submenu items for controlling your configuration.
    These sub-menu items are:

    Open...

        This brings up a file requester which allows you to specify
        a configuration file other than the configuration file assigned to
        the current user.  This configuration file must have the same mail
        directory as your current configuration.  Once you have opened
        this configuration file it becomes your current active
        configuration.

        Although you can specify an alternate configuration file with this
        menu sub-item, your original configuration file will be used if
        you quit AEMail and reload it.  To permanently change the
        configuration file name and or location you will have to re-perform
        the Installation process.

        The use of this menu sub-item and the "SAVE AS" sub-item allows
        you to specify alternate locations for your mail Identity items
        (i.e., POP3 Userid, Password, Pop Server, SMTP Server, etc.).

    Edit...

        The Configuration Setup Window will be activated allowing complete
        configuration data to be entered for the current active
        configuration file.  See the description of the Configuration
        Setup Window previously under the IV.  CONFIGURATION:  section in
        this document for details on the Configuration Setup Window.

    Save

        This will save the current configuration settings in the
        currently active configuration file.  It serves the same
        purpose as the previously "Save Settings" menu item (AEMail
        versions prior to 1.13) in which all of the current settings
        including the current state of the "Display Full Header",
        "Forward Body Text Only", "Include Header in Response",
        "Exclude Duplicate Messages" and "Delete Host Mail" menu
        items.

    Save As...

        This is the same as "Save" except that a file requester
        will be brought up which allow you to rename the current
        active configuration file.  This new configuration file
        will have the same mail directory as the current configuration
        file.  The new name becomes the new current active configuration
        file; however, if you quit AEMail and reload, the original
        configuration file specified in the CONFIG= Tool Type will again
        be the active configuration file.

        To permanently change the configuration file name and or location
        you will have to re-perform the Installation process.

    Restore Default

        This reads in the file specified in the CONFIG= Tool Type
        OR the config= parameter on the Shell call to AEMail.  The
        particular file that is used is referred to as your "base
        configuration".  The base configuration now becomes your
        currently active configuration file.


Send Queued Mail

    Will send all messages in the QUEUED folder.  See the
    SEND MESSAGE IMMEDIATELY command in the COMMAND ICON STRIP
    section above.  This action will also occur automatically
    when you first load and when you exit AEMail provided you
    are connected to your Internet provider.

Iconify AEMail

    You can iconify AEMail with an iconify bar on the Workbench screen
    with this menu item.  When this menu item is selected, the AEMail
    screen will be closed and a button bar will appear on the Workbench
    screen with

              AEMail (Click on Close or with RMB to restore)

    in the title.  When the iconified bar is in selected mode, clicking
    either on the close gadget or with the right mouse button will restore
    the AEMail screen.

    Initially the iconify bar will open at the top center of the
    Workbench screen, but it can be dragged anywhere on the screen.
    AEMail remembers where you dragged the bar so the next time
    you iconify, the bar will be at that new position.

    There is also a hotkey provided for iconifying AEMail.  This is
    RIGHT-AMIGA-I.  This hot key, and also LEFT-AMIGA-I, will also
    restore the AEMail screen when in the iconify mode.

    When in iconify mode, periodic checking of mail on your POP server
    is still done unless you were viewing the POP Server message list when
    you iconified AEMail.  If mail is found, the "YOU HAVE MAIL" requester
    will pop up on the Workbench mail.  You can retrieve the mail
    immediately by clicking on the [YES] gadget.  The requester will
    disappear and retrieval of messages will occur in the background and
    no progress indicator will appear.  When you return to the AEMail
    screen, the new messages will be in the appropriate folders.

    If you click on the [View on Server] gadget when in iconify mode you
    will get a message that instructs you to un-iconify before you can
    view the messages on the POP Server.  When you un-iconify, use the
    menu item "View Message List on Server" in the "Retrieve Messages"
    menu to view the POP Server message list.

    You can also push the AEMail screen to the back exposing the
    screen immediately behind the AEMail screen or the WorkBench
    screen by hitting LEFT-AMIGA-M when the AEMail screen is being
    displayed.  This is standard Amiga action.

    If the AEMail screen has been pushed to the back, hitting
    LEFT-AMIGA-M will bring the screen forward.  Note:  if other
    screens, besides the Workbench screen, are also present, they
    may be moved to the front first so that you may have to hit
    LEFT-AMIGA-M several times before the AEMail screen appears.

    Since there is no screen to bring forward, this will not work
    if the iconify action has been taken.

Send Notification...

    This menu item will bring up the "Send AEMail Notification Request"
    window (See REGISTRATION under Section II, SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS).  The
    purpose of this menu item is to allow users to send an AEMail
    notification message after they have initially loaded the current
    version of AEMail to inform the author of any changes in your
    information such as a change of email address or any change in the
    optional information.  If you had not previously sent some of the
    optional information under the "Options" tab and care to do so now,
    you can use this menu item to so inform the author.

Getting Help

    This will bring up the AEMail.guide page that describes how to get
    help with AEMail using the [HELP] key.  There are also special help
    command that can be obtained by using qualifier keys (SHIFT, ALT) with
    the [Help] key.

About

    This will display the name, version, and date,  of the program
    followed by the ARexx Port Name and information as to whether or not
    the shareware registration message has been received and who the
    version is registered to (with serial number).

    Below that is information on how to contact the author of the
    program.


Quit...

    Exits AEMail.

    When this menu item is selected, AEMail first checks to see
    if you are connected to your Internet provider.  If you are, a
    connection will be made to your POP server to see if there are
    any messages available on the server.  If there are, the following
    requester will appear:

                  n Messages Available on the POP Server

                Do you wish to receive these messages now?

    If you click on the [YES] button, those message will be retrieved
    at this point.  If you click on [NO], no message retrieval will take
    place.

    After AEMail checks to see if any messages are available on the
    POP Server, it also checks to see if any messages are in the
    QUEUED folder (messages queued to be sent).  If there are, the
    following requester will appear:

                  You have n messages queued to be sent

                 Do you wish to send these messages now?

    If you click on the [YES] button, all of the messages in the QUEUED
    folder will be sent immediately.  If you click on [NO], the queued
    messages will not be sent.

    After checking for POP messages and QUEUED messages, the following
    requester will appear:

            Do you wish to terminate your Host connection now?

    Selecting the [YES] button will cause the "stopnet" script to be
    executed terminmating your TCP/IP connection to your Internet
    provider.

    You can disable all of these requesters with a checkmarked item
    in the TCP/IP display on the Configuration Setup Window.  If they are
    disabled, the [NO] action will be assumed which each of the
    requesters.

    Finally, a requester will be displayed that asks:

                       Do You Really Want to Quit?

    Clicking on [YES] will terminate the program and [NO] will return to
    the program.

    When AEMail exits, all messages marked for deletion will be
    deleted and any configuration files in which data has been updated
    will be re-written.  You will probably see a great deal of disk
    activity at this time.  While this disk activity is going on, a
    window will be displayed on the Workbench screen saying:


                 Updating all AEMail Configuration Files!


    When updating is complete, this window will disappear.
    WARNING:  DO NOT turn your computer off while this window is being
    displayed.  If you do your disk will be corrupted!


                               Folders menu
                               ------------

New...

    The Configure Folder window will be activated indicating that a new
    folder should be created.  See the description of the Configure Folder
    window later in this document for details on how to create a new
    folder.

Edit...

    The Configure Folder window will be activated indicating that the
    current selected folder description should be edited.  The current
    selected folder is the folder that has a depressed frame.  You can
    change the selected folder by single clicking on the appropriate
    folder icon or selecting a folder from the folder list.  See the
    description of the Configure Folder window later in this document for
    details on how to change the folder description.

Delete

    This will delete the folder that has been selected.  You will not be
    able to delete a folder that has active messages in it.  If there are
    only deleted messages in the folder, the messages will be immediately
    deleted along with the folder.  There is no way you can get these
    deleted messages back.

Move...

    This menu item allows you to re-arrange the folder list.  Select the
    folder you want to move either from the folder list or the folder
    icon.  When you select this menu item, a Notification window appears
    which says:

             Select folder to place [folder-name] folder after

                                 [CANCEL]

    When the window appears, click on the folder icon (or the line in the
    folder list) that represents the folder you want to move the selected
    folder after.  The window will automatically disappear at that time
    and the folder list and icons will be re-arranged.

    Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
    operation.

    You can not re-arrange the position of the INBOX.

Set Sort Key...

    Activates the Set Sort Key window for the current selected folder.
    See the description of the Set Sort Key window later in this document
    for details on how to set the folder sort keys.

Folder List

    This has three submenu items as follows:

    Display

    This will display the folder list in the lower window.  This is the
    same as clicking on the "Display Folder List" icon.  This list shows
    each folder with its short name (INBOX, PENDING, etc), a description
    of the folder, the number of unread mesages in the folder, and the
    total number of messages in the folder.

    Backup...

    This will backup your current folder.config file.  A file requester
    will be presented asking for the name of your backup file.  The
    default name will be "folder.config.bak", but you can name it anything
    but "folder.config".  This facility has been provided to create a
    backup of the folder.config file in the event it becomes corrupted.

    WARNING: The format of the backup folder.config file is not the same
    as that of the folder.config file.  You cannot copy the backup file
    over the folder.config file and have a valid folder.config file.  You
    must use the "Restore" menu item listed below to properly restore the
    backup file.

    If you mistakenly copy the backup file over the folder.config file you
    can restore a valid folder.config file by first deleting the bad
    folder.config file and then using the "Restore" command below.

    Restore...

    This will restore your current folder.config file from a previously
    saved folder.config backup file.  A file requester will be presented
    asking for the name of the backup file.  The default name will be
    "folder.config.bak".

    YOU MUST USE THIS COMMAND TO PROPERLY RESTORE THE BACKUP FILE.

    WARNING:  If you restore a backup file that has a different list of
    folders (or a different order of files), the new folder list will not
    take effect until you quit and then reload AEMail.


Remove DELETED messages

    This will IMMEDIATELY remove ALL messages marked for deletion in the
    current active folder.  This means that they will no longer appear in
    the message list for that folder and they will be physically deleted
    from your mail directory.

    Before actually removing the messages the following requester will
    appear:

               This will remove all deleted messages in the
                           [folder_name] folder
                If you continue you can not retrieve them!

    You will given the option to either [CONTINUE] or [CANCEL].  If you
    select [CONTINUE] all the messages marked for deletion in the folder
    will be removed.  [CANCEL] will abort the operation.

    A busy pointer will be displayed while the messages are being removed.



                              Messages menu
                              -------------

Show

    This has two checkmarked submenu items for controlling your message
    list display.  These sub-menu items are:

    Deleted Messages

        If this sub-item is checked, deleted messages will be shown in the
        message list.  If it is unchecked, deleted messages will not be
        shown.  This sub-item is checked when AEMail first comes up.

    UnRead Msgs Only

        If this sub-item is checked, only unread messages will be
        displayed in the message list.  If it is unchecked all messages
        will be displayed.  This sub-item is unchecked when AEMail first
        comes up.

        If you are displaying the POP Server message list, all messages
        are, of course, unread.  They will not be marked as new, however,
        on the display.  They will be shown, however, if this sub-item is
        checked.

Compose...

    Activates the Compose Message window, described later in this
    document, to create a NEW message to be sent whether or not a message
    is currently selected.

Reply

    Activates the Compose Message window to reply to the current selected
    message.  See the description of the Compose Message window later in
    this document.

    There are two sub-menus which are:

    Use Reply-To...

        The Reply-To: address of the selected message will be used as the
        recipient of the reply.  If the Reply-To:  address is not present,
        the From:  address will be used.

    Use From...

        This forces the From: address to be used as the recipient of the
        reply.

    If a message is not selected when one of the sub-menu items is
    activated an error requester will appear.

    If the POP Server message list is being displayed when one of the
    sub-menu items is activated, the recipient's address will be selected
    according to the sub-item selected, but the message will be treated as
    a new message.

Forward...

    Activates the Compose Message window to forward the current selected
    message.  See the description of the Compose Message window later in
    this document.

    If a message is not selected when this menu item is activated an error
    requester will appear.

    You can not forward a message from the POP Server message list because
    AEMail does not have access to the message.  If you try to do this an
    error requester will appear.

Edit...

    Using this menu item will allow you to edit a message selected in
    either the PENDING or QUEUED folders.  It has the same effect as
    clicking on the Compose icon when you have selected a message in
    either the PENDING or QUEUED folders.

    If you have not selected a message in either the PENDING or QUEUED
    folder when this menu item is activated an error requester will
    appear.


Select None

    This menu item will de-select all messages in the selected folder.

Select All

    This menu item will select all messages in the selected folder.
    Selected messages will be marked with an asterick (*) in the first
    position of the message in the message list display.

Last Selected

    This menu item will re-select those messages that were last selected.
    If you did a multiple selection on a group of messages and then
    performed an operation on the group of messages (such as deleting,
    copying, saving the group to a file, etc.), the messages will be
    de-selected as the operation is performed on each message.  The "Last
    Selected" menu item will allow you to re-select the same previously
    selected messages so that you can perform another operation on the
    same group of messages.

Export...

    Same as the SAVE MESSAGE TO FILE command described previously in this
    document.

Copy...

    This menu copies all selected messages from the selected folder to a
    new  folder  or,  if  the  POP Server message list is being displayed.
    retrieve the selected messages.

    When you select this menu item and you are not displaying the POP
    Server messsage list, a Notification window appears which says:


                    Select Folder to Copy Messages To!

                                 [CANCEL]


    This window will not appear if the POP Server message list is being
    displayed!

    When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
    folder you want the messages copied to.  The window will automatically
    disappear at that time.

    The selected messages will be copied to that folder.  Messages will
    remain in both folders.

    Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
    operation.

    As the messages are being copied, the folder message list that the
    messages are copied to will be displayed (unless a message is being
    displayed).  Once the copy is complete, the folder message list from
    which the messages are copied will be displayed unless a message is
    being displayed.

    If the POP Server message list is being displayed, message retrieval
    will take place.  All message filtering will be in effect and you will
    see the progress bar as each message is retrieved.  Messages will
    remain on the POP Server.


Transfer...

    This menu moves all selected messages from the selected folder to a
    new folder or, if the POP Server message list is being displayed.
    retrieve the selected messages and delete them from the POP Server.

    When you select this menu item and you are not displaying the POP
    Server message list, a Notification window appears which says:

                  Select Folder to Transfer Messages To!

                                 [CANCEL]

    This window will not appear if the POP Server message list is being
    displayed!

    When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
    folder you want the messages transferred to.  The window will
    automatically disappear at that time.

    The selected messages will be copied to that folder, and the messages
    in the folder from which the messages are copied will be marked as
    "deleted".

    Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
    operation.

    As the messages are being transferred, the folder message list
    that the the messages are transferred to will be displayed (unless a
    message is being displayed).  Once the transfer is complete, the
    folder message list from which the messages are copied and deleted
    will be displayed unless a message is being displayed.

    If the POP Server message list is being displayed, message retrieval
    will take place.  All message filtering will be in effect and you will
    see the progress bar as each message is retrieved.  Messages will be
    deleted on the POP Server and you will see them disappear from the POP
    Server message list.


Print

    Same as the PRINT SELECTED MESSAGES command described previously in
    this document.


Delete/Undelete...

    Same as the DELETE/UNDELETE MESSAGE command described previously in
    this document.

Lock/Unlock

    This menu item will prevent messages from being sent from either the
    PENDING or QUEUED folders.  A locked message is indicated by an "L" in
    the message list.  A deleted message can not be locked (although it
    also can not be sent).  This command works as a toggle.  When this
    menu item is selected, all messages marked as selected (*) but not
    marked as DELETED or LOCKED will be LOCKED.  All selected messages
    marked as LOCKED will be UNLOCKED.

Display Full Header

    This is a checkmarked menu sub-item.  When checked, all message
    headers will be displayed in the message.  Since many of these headers
    are somewhat cryptic and could be confusing and not always understood
    by the user, the normal action is display only certain header lines.
    The default action is to display the following headers:  From:,
    Reply-To:  To:, Date:, Subject:, Organization:, cc:, and bcc:, but you
    can control this default minimum header list with the General
    Parameters page of the Configuration Setup Window.

    This menu sub-item is very useful for debugging purpose to see all of
    the headers what any particular message carries.

    The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the
    configuration file whenever the "Configuration/Save" menu item is
    selected.  It can also be set or reset by the General Parameters page
    on the Configuration Setup Window.

Forward Body Text Only

    This is a checkmarked menu sub-item.

    When you forward a message, the normal action is to include the
    header lines in the forwarded message.  The number of header lines is
    controlled by the "Display Full Hdr" checkedmark menu item above.
    Minimum headers will be included if that item is not checked.  If the
    message to be forwarded contains attachments, full headers will always
    be sent regardless of the state of the "Display Full Hdr" item.

    You can suppress all headers and forward only the body text by
    checking this checkmarked menu sub-item.  This will also forward only
    the body text for messages with attachments.  In other words, the
    attachments will not be included with the forwarded message.

    The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the
    configuration file whenever the "Configuration/Save" menu item is
    selected.  It can also be set or reset by the General Parameters page
    on the Configuration Setup Window.

Include Header in Response

    This is a checkmarked menu sub-item.  When checked the minimum header
    lines will be included for the quoted message when composing a
    response.  If it is not checked, no header information will appear.

    The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the
    configuration file whenever the "Configuration/Save" menu item is
    selected.  It can also be set or reset by the General Parameters page
    on the Configuration Setup Window.



                          Retrieve Messages menu
                          ----------------------

From POP Host

    This will only retrieve messages from the POP Server.  See the
    RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described previously in this
    document for a full explanation of the retrieval process.

    If your TCP/IP software is not active or connection to the POP Server
    can not be made, this menu item will return silently with the
    information that the POP Server could not be reached in the title bar.

From Local File...

    This will only retrieve messages from a local file.  No attempt
    will be made to connect to the POP Server.  See the
    RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described previously in this
    document for a full explanation of the retrieval process.

    This menu item allows you to retrieve messages from files even when
    online (connected to a host through your TCP/IP software).

View Message List on Server

    This will display the message list on the POP Server.

    Selecting this menu item will bring up a list of your mail on the POP
    Server.  The list will be displayed in a window similar to one of your
    folder Message List windows.  This window will be titled "Message List
    for Server Folder (Messages currently on your POP Server)" and will
    list all messages currently on your POP Server.

    To speed up this process, only the message headers are read and the
    message list will not be displayed until all of the headers are read.
    The busy indicator will appear while the message headers are being
    read and the status line at the top of the screen will indicate each
    message as it is obtained.  If you have a lot of messages on the POP
    Server, this could take some time.

    The POP Server is active thoughout the display of this list.  To
    disconnect the POP Server and close this window you will have to
    double click on one of your message folders.

    You can select this menu item while you are viewing the POP Server
    message list.  If you do, the message list will be updated with any
    new mail received on the Server since the last time the message list
    window was activated.

    If your TCP/IP software is not active or connection to the POP Server
    can not be made, the display of the POP Server message list will not
    occur and information that the POP Server could not be reached will be
    displayed in the title bar.

Exclude Duplicate Messages

    This is a checkmarked menu sub-item.  When checked, duplicate
    messages (ones that were previously retrieved and stored in one
    of AEMail's folders), will not be stored.  See the description
    under the RETRIEVE MESSAGES command for the use and full explanation
    of the function of this item.

    The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the
    configuration file whenever the "Configuration/Save" menu item is
    selected.  It can also be set or reset by the General Parameters page
    on the Configuration Setup Window.


Delete Host Mail

    This is a checkmarked menu sub-item.  When checked mail
    retrieved from your POP Server will be deleted after it is
    retrieved.  If it is not checked, mail will not be deleted
    and you will have to use the "Exl Dup Msgs" checkmark item
    discussed above to insure that a duplicate message are not
    retrieved the next time you retrieve messages.

    The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the
    configuration file whenever the "Configuration/Save" menu item is
    selected.  It can also be set or reset by the General Parameters page
    on the Configuration Setup Window.



                               TCP/IP menu
                               -----------

Start Net

    This menu item makes connection to your Internet Provider.  It
    executes the script that has been assigned by the Start Net
    Tool Type or the TCP/IP page of Configuration Setup.  If
    no Start Net script has been assigned, the action that is
    performed is to iconify AEMail.  You can then perform the
    network connection in what ever manner was provided by your
    TCP/IP stack software.  Once the connection is made, un-iconify
    AEMail.

    When this menu item is selected and a "startnet" script has been
    assigned, the system will, by default, switch to the workbench
    screen and execute the "startnet" script.  This allows the initial
    dialing window to display.  Once your Internet connection has been
    made the system will switch back to the AEMail screen.

    You can control the switching to the workbench screen by a check-
    marked item in the TCP/IP Parameters page on the Configuration
    Setup Window.

    If you are using AmiTCP, the script that should be run is
    AmiTCP:bin/startnet; although the user may specify a different script
    and path with the STARTNET Tool Type or in the TCP/IP Parameters page
    on the Configuration Setup Window.

    If you are using Miami, a "startnet.miami" script has been provided
    for connecting with your Internet provider.  This is usually run from
    the AEMail program directory.  This is an AREXX script so you will
    have to precede the script name with "rx " (see Section IV,
    CONFIGURATION for setting up your Start Net script).  This is set up
    automatically with the AEMail install provided a Miami: assignment is
    in the system.

    If you are using a TCP/IP stack that does not have a Start Net script
    (such as TermiteTCP), you should be sure that the Start Net call
    gadget in the TCP/IP parameters page of the Configuration Setup has
    been cleared.  Your Internet connection is then done manually as
    explained above.

    Once a connection is made to your Internet provider and you have
    returned to the AEMail screen, a connection will be made to your POP
    server to see if there are any messages available on the server.  If
    there are, the following requester will appear:

                  n Messages Available on the POP Server

                Do you wish to receive these messages now?

    You will have three choices as follows:

                [YES]        [View on Server]          [NO]

    If you click on the [YES] button, those message will be retrieved at
    this point.  See the RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described in Section
    VI, COMMAND ICON STRIP above for details on this process.

    If you click on [NO], no message retrieval will take place at this
    time.  You will need to retrieve these messages later using the
    RETRIEVE MESSAGES command icon.

    If you click on [View on Server], a list of all of the messages
    currently on your POP Server will be displayed in a window similar to
    one of your folder Message List windows.  This window will be titled
    "Message List for Server Folder (Messages currently on your POP
    Server)" and will list all messages currently on your POP Server.

    You can directly delete messages by selecting a message or group of
    messages and clicking on either the Delete icon or selecting the
    Delete/Undelete menu item under the Messages menu.

    Likewise you can selectively download messages by using either the
    "Transfer" icon (or the "Transfer..." menu item) or the "Copy" icon
    (or the "Copy..." menu item) after you have seleced a message or group
    of messages.  "Transfer" will also delete the message from the POP
    Server.  "Copy" will not.

    After AEMail checks to see if any messages are available on the
    POP Server, it also checks to see if any messages are in the QUEUED
    folder (messages queued to be sent).  If there are, the following
    requester will appear:

                  You have n messages queued to be sent

                 Do you wish to send these messages now?

    If you click on the [YES] button, all of the messages in the QUEUED
    folder will be sent immediately. If you click on [NO], the queued
    messages will not be sent.

    After the connection is made, the following message will be displayed
    in the screen's title bar:

        TCP/IP Session started with [your-domain-name].

    If for any reason the connection can not be made, the following
    message will be displayed in the screen's title bar:

        TCP/IP connection to [your-domain-name] failed.

    The "Start TCP/IP Network Connection" command icon will perform the
    same operation as the "Start Net" menu item.

Stop Net

    This menu item terminates the connection to your Internet Provider.
    It executes the script that has been assigned by the Stop Net Tool
    Type or the TCP/IP page of the Configuration Setup.  If no Stop Net
    script has been assigned, the action that is performed is to iconify
    AEMail.  You can then terminate the network connection in what ever
    manner was provided by your TCP/IP stack software.  Once the
    connection is terminated, un-iconify AEMail.

    When this menu item is selected and a "stopnet" script has been
    assigned, the system will terminate the connection silently in
    the background.  Since no action is required by the user (unlike
    "startnet"), the screen display will remain on the AEMail screen.

    If you want to switch to the Workbench screen while the connection is
    being terminated, you can do this through a check-marked item in the
    TCP/IP Parameters page on the Configuration Setup.

    If you are using AmiTCP, the script that should be run is
    AmiTCP:bin/stopnet; although the user may specify a different script
    and path with the STOPNET Tool Type or in the TCP/IP Parameters page
    on the Configuration Setup.

    If you are running Miami, a "stopnet.miami" script has been provided
    for terminating the connection with your Internet provider.  This
    script is usually run from the AEMail program directory.  This is an
    AREXX script so you will have to precede the script name with "rx "
    (see Section IV, CONFIGURATION for setting up your Stop Net script).
    This is set up automatically with the AEMail install provided a Miami:
    assignment is in the system.

    If you are using a TCP/IP stack that does not have a Stop Net script
    (such as TermiteTCP), you should be sure that the Stop Net call gadget
    in the TCP/IP parameters page of the Configuration Setup has been
    cleared.  Your Internet connection is then terminated manually as
    explained above.

    The following messages will be displayed in the screen's title bar
    when the connection is terminated:

        TCP/IP session with [your-domain-name] terminated.

    The "Terminate TCP/IP Network Connection" command icon will perform
    the same operation as the "Stop Net" menu item.

TCP Logging File

    This has three submenu items for controlling your TCP Logging file.
    Please read Section X. AEMAIL FILES, TCP Trace Log File for how to
    read the entries in this file.

    The sub-menu items are:

    Active

        This is a checkmarked menu sub-item which indicates whether the
        TCP Logging is active or not.  If a TCP Logging File has not been
        defined with the Paths page of the Configuration Setup, this
        sub-item is ghosted.

        Clicking on this item when it is not checkmarked will activate TCP
        Logging.  Clicking on it when it is checkmarked will deactivate
        logging.

    Purge

        This is a handy way to delete all previous TCP Logging entries.
        "Purge" will delete the current logging file and open another file
        with the same name if logging is active.  If logging is not
        active, the current logging file will be deleted, but a new file
        will not be opened until the Active sub-item is checkmarked.

        This menu item can be used whether the logging file is currently
        active or not.

    Display/Edit...

        "Display/Edit" will call your editor to display the current TCP
        logging file.  The logging file MUST NOT be Active in order to
        display or edit it.  If it is active you will get a requester that
        informs you that you can't display the file beause it is active.
        If this happens, de-activate it by turning off the Active
        checkmark and then try the "Display/Edit" again.

        If a TCP Logging file has not been defined in the Paths page of
        the Configuration Setup, you will receive a requester saying that
        it is not present.

        NOTE:  The TCP logging file can become quite large and it may take
        some time for your editor to bring in the file.  Some editors are
        slower than others in this regard.  If you are using the AmigaDos
        editor (Ed), you will see a series of astericks (@) moving across
        the screen as the file is being read in.  You might want to
        periodically purge the file (if it is always active), to prevent a
        very large TCP Log file from being created.

                              ARexx/DOS menu
                              --------------

Send AREXX/DOS Command...

    This will bring up a requester that looks like this:

         |=====================================================|
         |o| Send AREXX/DOS Command                            |
         |=====================================================|
         |                                                     |
         | |@| AREXX |[                         ][V][CLR][REQ] |
         |                                                     |
         | [ ] Opens On Workbench   [X] Execute Asynchronously |
         |                                                     |
         | [  OK  ]                                 [ CANCEL ] |
         |=====================================================|

    The cycle gadget has two states: AREXX and DOS.  Select the kind of
    command (execute script or program) you want to start.  The string
    gadget to the right of the cycle gadget is for entering the command.
    Unless the command (program or script) is in the same directory as the
    AEMail program or REXX: (if it is an ARexx command script), you must
    include the full path name.  The last command you executed will always
    appear in this string gadget when you first call up the requester.

    The [V] gadget is used to call up a listview of the past commands you
    have executed.  You can click on one of these if you want to use a
    previous command.  The last command you executed will always appear at
    the top of the list.  The list of commands (up to the last 10) will be
    maintained even after you quit AEMail.  This list will close when you
    click on any item in the list or, if you don't want any of the items,
    when you click into any of the other gadgets in the requester.

    Yhe [CLR] gadget will clear the string gadget and the [REQ] will call
    up a file requester with which you can select the program or script
    you want to execute.  The initial directory that is used in the
    requester is the PROGDIR: if it is a DOS command or REXX: if it is an
    ARexx command.

    The two checkmark gadgets on the second row are used for DOS commands
    only.  They will be disabled for ARexx commands.

    If "Opens on Workbench" is checked, a switch will be made to the
    Workbench screen when the command is executed.  This is not necessary
    for ARexx command since there is an AEMail ARexx command that will do
    this.

    The "Execute Asynchronously" checkmark gadget is used to execute the
    DOS command in the background.  This will allow AEMail to function
    when the program that is called is being executed. This item is, by
    default, checkmarked.  If for some reason you want AEMail to freeze
    while the command (program) is being executed, you can un-checkmark
    this item.  Since all ARexx command automatically execute in the
    background, this item is uneccessary for ARexx command scripts.

    When you are ready to execute the command, click on [OK].  If you want
    to cancel the operation, click on [CANCEL].

    You can also bind ARexx or DOS commands to a function key.  You can
    have up to 40 selections since the Shift, CTRL, and ALT keys can be
    used in conjunction with the function keys.  This is done with the
    ARexx Page of the Configuration Setup Window (See Section IV.
    Configuration).  When you press the appropriate function key the ARexx
    or DOS command bonded to it will be executed.

Send Last Command

    This menu item will send the last ARexx or DOS command sent by "Send
    AREXX/DOS command" without bringing up the "Send AREXX/DOS command"
    requester.  It will not send the last command activated by a function
    key.


Commands Specified by ARexx Configuration Page

    This portion of the ARexx/DOS menu consists of those items specified
    by the ARexx Page of the Configuration Setup.  A menu item will be
    created for each ARexx/DOS command for which a "Menu Title" is
    specified.  If no "Menu Title" is specified, no menu item will be
    created.

    Each of these menu items have the same effect as if the corresponding
    function key is pressed.

    Depending on the number of commands that are defined, you might not
    want to give all of them a "Menu Title" to avoid having too many menu
    items specified.

                           VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS

                        Configuration Setup Window
                        --------------------------

See Section IV. CONFIGURATION for a description of the Configuration
Setup Window.


                            Folder List Window
                            ------------------

The Folder List window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
screen when AEMail is first loaded and whenever you click on the DISPLAY
FOLDER LIST icon in the Command Icon Strip or select the Display submenu
under the Folder List menu item in the Folders menu.

The Folder List window looks like the following:

=====================================================================

                            Folder List

Name      Description of Folder                     Not Read Total
---------------------------------------------------------------------
INBOX     Messages Received                            nnnnn nnnnn| |
PENDING   Messages composed and pending for action           nnnnn| |
QUEUED    Messages Queued to be sent                         nnnnn| |
SENT      Messages that have been sent                       nnnnn| |
xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx nnnnn nnnnn| |
xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx nnnnn nnnnn| |
                                                                  | |
=====================================================================

The POP Server folder will not appear in this list.  If you were viewing
the POP Server message list when you selected this display you can return
to it by clicking on the "Display Current Folder's Message List" command
icon.

The folder list is a scrolling list.  Double clicking on any of the
folders in the list will bring up the Message List window for that folder.
If the Folder Icon strip is also being displayed, double clicking on any
particular folder icon will also bring up the message list for that
folder.

If there are too many folders to fit in the window, you can scroll the
list by using the scroll bar, clicking on the up or down arrows below the
scroll bar, or by using the up or down cursor keys.

Additionally the following keys can be used to move the list as follows:

    "Home" or "ALT Cursor Up" moves the listview to the top.
    "End" or "ALT Cursor Down" moves the listview to the botton.
    "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up.  The
        top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
        line of the new page.
    "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
        The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
        top line of the new page.
    The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
        the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
        feature.

Single clicking on a item in the list or folder icon merely selects that
folder.  The selected folder is then the folder referenced by the Folders
Menu group items (Edit.., Delete..., Set Sort Key ...) and by such
commands as Message Delete, Message Copy, Message Transfer, or Message
Select All/NONE.

One of the folders is always active (selected).  On program startup, the
active folder will be INBOX.  You can always tell the current active
folder by the depressed frame around the folder icon.


                           Message List Window
                           -------------------

The Message List window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
screen whenever you double click on either an item in the folder list or
one of the folder icons.

You can also bring up the current folder list by clicking on the
"Display Current Folder's Message List" command icon in the command icon
tool bar.  The previous and next folder's message list can also be
displayed from the command icon tool bar.

The Message List looks like the following:

========================================================================

    Message List for [folder-name] Folder ([folder Description...])

 FLGS Date       Time  From           Size Subject     (nnn messages)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 NARF MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
*NARF MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
 . . . . .                                                           | |
 NARF MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
                                                                     | |
========================================================================


The column header line displays the number of messages in the folder as
(nnn messages).  This is the total number of messages including those
marked for deletion.

The message descriptions are presented in a scrollable list.  You can
scroll the list by using the scroll bar, clicking on the up or down arrows
below the scroll bar, or by using the up or down cursor keys.

Additionally the following keys can be used to move the list as follows:

    "Home" or "ALT Cursor Up" moves the listview to the top.
    "End" or "ALT Cursor Down" moves the listview to the botton.
    "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up.  The
        top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
        line of the new page.
    "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
        The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
        top line of the new page.
    The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
        the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
        feature.


The meaning of the various fields of each message description are as
follows:

    FLGS:   (starts in the 2nd column)
            N indicates an unread message
            A indicates a message with attachments (NOT IMPLEMENTED)
            R indicates the message is a reply
            F indicates the message is a forwarded message.
            D (in the same position as N) indicates the message is
              a deleted message.
            L (in the same position as N) indicates that a message in
              either the PENDING or QUEUED folder is locked so it will not
              be sent until the lock is removed (it is unlocked).

    Date:   This is the message date from the DATE:  header in the form of
            MM/DD/YYYY (2 digit month, 2 digit day, and the 4 digit year).

    Time:   This is the time the message was received in the form of HH:MM
            (2 digit hour, 2 digit minute).  Time uses a 24 hour clock.

    From:   Is the Real Name (if present) from either the From:  or To:
            header.  If the folder represents messages being sent from
            AEMail (PENDING, QUEUED, SENT) then this field will be headed
            "To" and the To:  header will be used.  If the Real Name is
            not present in the header, then the UserID will be used
            instead.  If a Nickname is being used for a message being
            sent, then the Nickname will appear.

    Size:   This is the size, in bytes, of the message in the form nnn,nnn.
            If the size exceeds 999,999 bytes then ***,*** will appear.
            The size includes the size of the message with all its
            attachments.

    Subject:  Up to 50 characters from the Subject:  header after RE:  and
            (fwd) are stripped.  You can tell if the message is forwarded
            or is a reply by examining the FLGS field.  RE:  and (fwd) are
            stripped from the Subject:  header to allow sorting to place
            all messages with the same subject (whether original, replied,
            or forwarded) together.  You can also control where 'replied'
            and 'forwarded' messages go in the list since these use
            separate sorting criteria.  The number of characters fitting
            in the subject field depends on the display mode you are using.

An asterick (*) in the first position indicates that the message is
selected.  This position will be blank if the message is not selected.

The Message list can be sorted under a number of different categories (see
Set Sort Keys window below).

Double clicking on any message in the message list will bring up the
message display window for that message.

A single click will highlight and select the message.  An asterick will
appear in the first column of the line indicating the message is selected.
You can click on another message to highlight and select that message.
Clicking on a message that is already selected will deselect the message.

If you are running under AmigaDOS 3.0 or higher, you can also select (or
deselect) a group of messages by drag selecting.  Place the cursor over
the message you first want to select or deselect and then, holding down
the left mouse button, drag either up or down.  Whether selecting or
deselecting occurs depends on the state of the first message you select.

Only one message is highlighted.  If that message is selected it will be
considered the current message to reply to, forward, or edit when
composing messages.

Other operations such as DELETE/UNDELETE MESSAGE, SAVE/EXPORT MESSAGES,
COPY MESSAGE, TRANSFER MESSAGE, PRINT SELECTED MESSAGES, SEND MESSAGE
IMMEDIATELY, and QUEUE MESSAGE FOR LATER DELIVERY will use the entire
selected list of messages.


                       Folder Configuration Window
                       ---------------------------

The Folder Configuration window will be displayed over the entire screen
below the top title line when either the "New..." or "Edit..." menu items
are selected from the Folders menu.

The Folder Configuration window looks like the following:

=====================================================================

       Folder Name: [         ]   (1 - 9 Characters only) [SORT KEYS]

Folder Description: [            __                                 ]
                                |  |___
         Tab Color: [@|  Red  | |______| [ ] Folder for Sent Messages

  =================================================================
  |Filter Parameters for Selecting Messages                       |
  =================================================================
  |                                                               |
  | [ ] Not [ ] Start Group                       [ ] Ignore Case |
  |                                                               |
  | For [@|    To:     ]               [@|   Contains    ] [] END |
  |                                                               |
  | Search [                                             ] [] AND |
  |                                                               |
  | [ ] End Group                                          [] OR  |
  |  ___________________________________________________________  |
  | |                                                         | | |
  | |                                                         | | |
  | |                                                         | | |
  | |                                                         | | |
  | |                                                         | | |
  | |                                                         | | |
  | |                                                         | | |
  | |                                                         |^| |
  | |_________________________________________________________|V| |
  |                                                               |
  |                            [ Add ] [Insert] [Modify] [Delete] |
  |                                                               |
  =================================================================

              [ SAVE ]                  [CANCEL]

====================================================================

If you are editing an existing folder, the Folder Name will be filled in,
but the string gadget will be disabled.  You will not be able to modify
it.

If you are creating a new folder you must name it with a 1 to 9 character
folder name.  This will appear below the folder icon in the folder strip
and in the Folder List.  There are certain characters that are illegal
when creating folder names.  Because a special configuration file is
created for each folder called [folder-name].cnfg, any character that
would be illegal as part of a file name is illegal in creating a file
name.  These include ':', '/' and '\'.  Also the name "folder" (case
insensitive) is illegal since folder.cnfg is the master list of folders.

The [SORT KEYS] button is used to call the Set Sort Keys window (see
below) to set the sort keys for the folder.

The folder description can be up to 99 characters, but of course that many
characters will never appear anywhere.  Up to 52 characters will appear in
the folder list display under "Description of Folder".  This will also
appear in the contextual help line in the window bar preceded by "Folder
for"

The Tab Color is a cycle gadget with the following possible values:  Red,
Green, Blue, Yellow, Orange, Magenta, Brown, or Purple.  This provides a
color on the folder tab to help classify the folders according to the
user's preferences.  The actual tab color will be displayed to the right
of this cycle gadget.

The checkbox gadget marked "Folder for Sent Messages" is used to indicate
when a folder is for messages that have been sent or ready to be sent
rather than in-coming folders.  The PENDING, QUEUED, and SENT folders all
have this box checked.

The special window in the center of the Folder Configuration window is
used to set filter parameters for this folder.  A full description of how
this works is given below under "Filter Selection Window".  The filtering
parameters are used to distribute in-coming messages to various folders.
For the INBOX, these filters have a special meaning which will reject any
message meeting the filtering criteria.  The heading for the filtering
criteria for the INBOX will read "Filtering Parameters for Rejecting
Messages" instead of "Filtering Parameters for Selecting Messages".

Since filtering can only occur with in-bound messages, folders for sent
messages can not have filtering parameters associated with them.  For all
folders for "sent" messages, all of the gadgets in the filtering window
will be disabled preventing the entry of any filtering information.  This
is true of the PENDING, QUEUED, and SENT folders as well as any folders that
have been added with the "Folder for Sent Messages" box checked.

Finally, you are given the choice of canceling the operation or saving the
folder data in the folder.config file with the [CANCEL] and [SAVE]
buttons.

                         Filter Selection Window
                         -----------------------

The filter selection window for setting filter parameters looks like this:

    =================================================================
    |Filter Parameters for Selecting Messages                       |
    =================================================================
    |                                                               |
    | [ ] Not [ ] Start Group                       [ ] Ignore Case |
    |                                                               |
    | For [@|    To:     ]               [@|   Contains    ] [] END |
    |                                                               |
    | Search [                                             ] [] AND |
    |                                                               |
    | [ ] End Group                                          [] OR  |
    |  ___________________________________________________________  |
    | |                                                         | | |
    | |                                                         | | |
    | |                                                         | | |
    | |                                                         | | |
    | |                                                         | | |
    | |                                                         | | |
    | |                                                         | | |
    | |                                                         |^| |
    | |_________________________________________________________|V| |
    |                                                               |
    |                            [ Add ] [Insert] [Modify] [Delete] |
    |                                                               |
    =================================================================

The gadgets in the top half of the window are used to enter filtering
parameters.  The first two checkmark gadgets ([ ] Not, [ ] Start Group)
and the [ ] End Group checkmark gadget at the bottom of the group are
currently disabled.  They are designed to be used for advanced selection
criteria that will be added to a future version of AEMail.

The cycle gadget which is prefaced with "For" is used to select the header
that you want to check.  This gadget has the following states:

    To:
    From:
    Reply-To:
    Subject:
    cc:
    bcc:
    Date:
    Msg is Reply
    Msg w/Attachments
    Msg is Forwarded
    Other Message Hdrs      (Registered Users only)
    Message Body            (Registered Users only)

Note: it is unlikely that you would see the bcc: header in an incoming
message even though it is contained in the header list.

To the right of this is a cycle gadget which specifies the condition this
header will be checked for.  For the To:, From:, Reply-To: Subject:, cc:,
and bcc:  headers, Other Message Hdrs, and Message Body the condition can
be either:

    Contains, or
    Does Not Contain

For the Date: header it can be one of the following conditions:

    Equal
    Not Equal
    Greater Than
    Greater Than / Equal
    Less Than
    Less Than / Equal

and for Msg is Reply, Msg w/Attachments, Msg is Forwarded it can be:

    Is Present
    Is Not Present

The argument to be searched against is entered into the string gadget that
is titled "Search".  For the To:, From:, Reply-To:, Subject:, cc:, and
Bcc: headers and the "Other Message Hdrs" and "Message Body" you can
enter an argument that has wild cards.  The wild cards that are used are
as follows:

    ?   matches any single character.
    c*  matches zero or more occurances of character c.  If an unknown
        character is to be matched you can use ?*.
    c+  matches one or more occurances of character c (at least one
        occurance of c must be present).
    \?  matches the character ?.
    \*  matches the character *.
    \+  matches the character +.

Any other characters must match exactly (except that case can be ignored -
see below).  The match can occur anywhere in the header.  The following
are some examples of how the match occurs:

    abc     matches "abc", "abcdef", or "xxabc"
    ab*c    matches "ac", "abc", "abbc", or "abbbc", etc.  Characters may
            be present either before or after the match.
    ab+c    matches "abc", "abbc", or "abbbc", etc.  Characters may be
            present either before or after the match.  This will not match
            "ab+c".  You would have to use "ab\+c" for this to occur.
    ab?*    matches a substring starting with "ab" and ending with "c".
            Characters may be present either before or after the match.
    ab\*c   matches "ab*c" only.  However charcters may be either before
            or after the match.

WARNING:  Please pay particular attention to the characters +, ?, and *.
If any of these characters appear in the information to be matched, you
must use \+, \?, or \* in the argument if you want an exact match to
occur.

If "Other Message Hdrs" is used, you probably would want to use the Header
designation as part of the search argument.

Searching on header data will search the entire string of characters
contained within that header even though that header may span multiple
lines.  This means that if an address you want to locate is contained in
the nth line of the To: header, it will be found.

When searching data in the message body, the entire argument must be found
in a single line of the body.  If you are searching for a multiple word
phrase which may be broken up onto more than one line, you should specify
multiple arguments with AND separating the arguments.

If you want to ignore the case of the header or message body data when the
comparison is made check the "Ignore Case" item.  The "Ignore Case" item
will only ignore the case of the 26 alphabetic characters of the
American/English alphabet.  It will not ignore the case of special
characters used in forign alphabets although these special characters can
be used in the Search criteria.

The Search argument for the Date: header can be of one or two formats.
The first format is either:

    dd mmm yyyy or
    mmm dd yyyy

mmm is the three character month abbreviation:  jan, feb, mar, apr, may,
jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, or dec.  You can enter either upper case,
lower case, or mixed case month abbreviations (i.e., jan, JAN, or Jan are
all o.k.).

dd is the numeric digits for the day of the month and yyyy must be the
full 4 digit year.  If you want any day of a particular month to be used,
leave off the dd parameter.  Likewise, using just the 4 digit yyyy will
accept any month and day for that year.

The absence of any of the elements of the date (mmm, dd, or yyyy) will
indicate that that particular element should not be checked.  As an
example:  if you want only messages for the month of September to be
placed in a particular folder you would enter:

    sep

by itself and the condition would be entered as "equal to".  This would
capture messages with a Date header of September of any year (Sep 1997,
Sep 1998, etc.).  If you were interested in messages with a Date:  header
of September of 1997 you would enter:

    sep 1997

An alternate method of entering the date would be:

    mm/dd/yy    or
    mm/dd/yyyy  or
    mm-dd-yy    or
    mm-dd-yyyy

mm is a one or 2 digit month (1 or 01 to 12), dd is a one or 2 digit day
(1 or 01 to 31) and yy is either a 2 digit or 4 digit year. 0 is invalid
for any of the mm, dd, or yy.  If you want to indicate the absence of any
of the elements use xx or XX.  As an example, to capture messages with a
Date header equal to any day within September 1997 you could enter:

    09/xx/97

Before the search for a Date: header is made, the date in the Date: header
is converted to an internal format.  The search argument is also converted
to this same internal format so that the match can be performed correctly.

The Search argument for Msg is Reply, Msg w/Attachments, and Msg is Forwarded
is ignored.

The "END", "AND, and "OR" gadgets are used to indicate that this is the
last comparison argument (END), or that there is another comparison
argument following this with either an AND or OR relationship.

Some examples of specific types of filtering parameters are given below.

The list view in the lower half of the window lists the comparison arguments.
Each comparison arguement is listed on two lines.  The first line shows
the header to be checked and the comparison criteria in the following
format:

FOR header-name comparison-criteria (ignoring case)

(ignoring case) will not be present if "Ignore Case" is not checked.

The second line will show the search argument surrounded by quote (")
marks.  It will be followed by AND or OR if either of these were
specified.  If "Ignore Case" was checked, the Search argument will be in
all lower case characters no matter how it was entered in the Search:
string gadget.

To add a selection criteria to the list, enter the appropriate items in
the gadgets at the top of the window and click on the [ Add ] gadget at
the bottom of the window.  That item will be transfered to the listview at
the end of the current list of items.

To modify or delete an item, click on the item in the listview.  Clicking
on either the first or second line of any item in the list is acceptable.
The information from the listview will be transferred to the gadgets at
the top of the window.  Then make the modifications you want (for modify)
and click on either the [Modify] or [Delete] gadgets at the bottom of the
window.

To insert an item into the list, enter the data in the gadgets at the top
of the window as you did to add an item.  This time click on the [Insert]
gadget.  The words "Click on item you want to insert IN FRONT OF!" will
appear in yellow at the top of the listview.  Now, as instructed, click on
the item you want the selection criteria to be inserted in front of.  This
allows you to insert at the head of the list by clicking on the first item
in the list.  Clicking on either the first or second line of any item in
the list is acceptable.

All of the selection criteria except for the last item must have an AND or
OR relationship to the criteria following.  You can have relationships as
follows:

    a OR b OR c

indicating that if any of the conditions (a, b, or c) are met that message
will be selected for that particular folder, or

    a AND b AND c

indicating that all of the conditions must be met for that message to be
selected.

Be careful of mixing AND and OR conditions.

    a OR b AND c

will work but

    b AND c OR a

will not work correctly.

Conditions are checked serially.

In the first example above, if condition a is not met, then b will be
checked.  If b is not met no selection is made; however, if condition c is
also met, the message will be selected.  If condition a is met the
message will be selected and the b or c conditions are not checked.

In the second example, if condition b is not met, no further check will be
made so that even if a is met, the message will not be selected.  In this
example condition a will never be checked.

Advanced selection is designed to get around this problem.  HOWEVER, THIS
ADVANCED SELECTION HAS NOT BEEN IMPLIMENTED AS YET!  AND WHEN IT IS
IMPLIMENTED, IT WILL ONLY BE AVAILABLE TO REGISTERED USERS.

With advanced selection you will be able to group items in this manner:

    (a AND b) OR (c AND d)

conditions a and b are a group and conditions c and d are a group.  The
checkmarked items "Start Group" and "End Group" are used to specify the
first item in a group and the last item in a group.  You will also be able
to embed groups within groups such as

    (a AND b AND (c OR d))

and use a not condition for a group such as

    (a AND b AND NOT (c OR d))

or simply

    NOT (a OR b)

Filtering Restrictions.  Currently the following restriction is placed on
filtering.  This restriction will be lifted in a later release of AEMail.

Advanced selection (grouping selection criteria as described above), can
not be done.

Other selection criteria (such as size of message) may be added later.

                   Examples of using Message Filtering
                   ===================================

How would you use message filtering?  Here is a practical example of how I
use it.  As you all know, when you implement a new version of AEMail and
send your first message a special notification message is sent to me
indicating the version you are using.  This notification message is stored
in a special folder for notification messages that I have received.  All
of the notification messages indicate what they are in the Subject:
header.  However, over the development of AEMail, the format of this
subject header has changed.  Before version 1.10 the Subject header looked
like this:

    Subject: Registration of AEMAIL (Amiga EMAIL), Version x.xx

From version 1.10 through version 1.15, the Subject header looked like
this:

    Subject: AEMAIL Version x.xx Registration

After version 1.15 the Subject header looked like this:

    Subject: AEMAIL Version x.xx Notification

Since I am still receiving notification messages back to version 1.03, I
wanted all such notification messages to go into the same folder.  The
selection criteria for this folder was set to the following:

    For Subject: Contains (ignoring case)
    "aemail version ???? registration" OR

    For Subject: Contains (ignoring case)
    "aemail version ?* notification" OR

    For Subject: Contains (ignoring case)
    "registration of aemail (amiga email), version"

Notice how I handled the variable of the version number in each case.  In
the first criteria I used a fixed replacement wild card (????) to specify
the version number.  In the second criteria I used a variable replacement
wild card (?*) and in the third criteria I did not use any wild card for
the version number replacement.  That is because the version number occurs
at the end of the line.

Another use of filtering can be used if you are subscribed to a listserve.
The example I will show you is for the Miami list serve.  Miami actually
has two listserves: "[e-mail]" and
"[e-mail]".  The To: address usually reflects
which listserve the message is coming from but the Reply-To: address
always reflects "[e-mail]".

If you want the folder to include all messages from both listserves you
can set the following criteria for the that folder:

    For Reply-To: Contains (ignoring case)
    "[e-mail]"

If you set up two folders, one for the "talk" message list and the other
for the "announcement" message list you could set the "talk" folder to
reflect the following criteria:

    For To: Contains (ignoring case)
    "[e-mail]"

and the "announcement" folder as follows:

    For To: Contains (ignoring case)
    "[e-mail]"

If messages meet the selection criteria for two different folders, the
first folder in the folder list which meets the criteria will be selected.
So, if you were to have two folders set up as described above (one for
"talk" messages and one for "announcement" messages) and you used the
Reply-To: address instead of the To: address as the selection criteria for
the "talk" folder and if the "talk" folder was first, all of the
"announcement" messages would go in the "talk" folder.  However, if the
"announcement" folder was first, then the messages would be distributed to
the correct folders.

You will find that the clipboard capability is very helpful in setting up
your filtering conditions.  If there is a particular header that you want
selected, display the message that has that header, and then double click
on the header in the message.  Edit out the header designator (To:, From:,
Subject:, etc) and save it to the clipboard.  You can save various items
changing the clipboard unit for each item.  Then when you are in the
Folder Configuration window, select the Search string gadget and use Right
Amiga U to call up the clipboard list.  Then double click on the item you
want to select on.  It will then be automatically pasted into the Search
string gadget.

As was stated in the earlier description of the Filter Selection Window,
the window for the INBOX is used to EXCLUDE messages meeting the INBOX
criteria from entering your system.  Use this with CARE!  If you exclude a
message and you are deleting messages from you POP server, YOU WILL NEVER
SEE THAT MESSAGE!


                           Set Sort Keys Window
                           --------------------

The Set Sort Keys window will be displayed over the entire screen below
the top title line when either the "Set Sort Key..." menu item from the
Folders menu is selected or the [Sort Keys] button is clicked in the
Folder Configuration window.

The Set Sort Keys window looks like the following:

=====================================================================

               1       2       3       4       5       6       7
Priorities: ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

Un-Read Messages: FIRST [ ]      Messages with Attachments: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|              LAST [ ]

Replied Messages: FIRST [ ]      Forwarded Messages: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|       LAST [ ]

Latest Date:      FIRST [ ]      Largest Messages: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]

Group by FROM at Priority [@|0|    Group by Subject at Priority [@|0|

[ ] Order Received
                   --> at Priority [@|0|     [ ] Apply to all Folders
[ ] Latest Received

[LAST SAVED]    [LAST USED]    [   USE   ]    [  SAVE  ]   [ CANCEL ]

=====================================================================

Messages in each of the folders can be displayed in various sort orders
and each folder can have a different sort order.  Up to seven levels of
sort priority can be given.  The various sorting criteria are shown on
this window and a particular sort order can be given for any sort
priority.  The sorting criteria for any particular priority is selected by
the priority cycle gadget under or opposite each criteria.  A priority of
0 is used to indicate that this criteria is not used in the sort.

To help visualize which criteria applies to which priority a list at the
top of the window shows the current position of any particular sort
criteria in the priority list.  With the exception of priority 0 (no
priority), no two criteria can have the same priority.  If this happens,
**DUP** will appear for that priority in the priority list.

If you want the sorting criteria to be used for all folders check the
"Apply to all Folders" box.

At the bottom of the window is the [LAST SAVED], [LAST USED], [USE],
[SAVE], and [CANCEL] buttons.  If you want the sorting to apply only to
this AEMail session only select [USE].  If you want to make the sorting
permanent, select [SAVE].  [CANCEL], of course, will abort the operation
without setting any sort keys.  The [LAST SAVED] button is used to restore
the sort keys to those last saved and the [LAST USED] is used to restore
the last used sort keys.

If the this window was called from the Folder Configuration Window,
selecting [USE], [SAVE], or [CANCEL] will return you to the Folder
Configuration Window.

The [LAST SAVED] and [LAST USED] buttons will simply restore the
appropriate sorting order and will not terminate the Folder Configuration
Window.  You will have to use the [USE], [SAVE], or [CANCEL] buttons to do
that.

                      Examples of Setting Sort Keys
                      =============================

You may want your messages displayed in different orders in the Message
List Window.  This is the purpose of the "Set Sort Keys Window."

Let's assume that you want your messages displayed with unread messages
first.  Within both the unread and previously read sections you want the
messages sorted by the latest date first.  To do this click on the Un-Read
Messages:  FIRST box and set the priority underneath Un-Read Messages to
1.  Then click on the Latest Date:  FIRST box and set it's Priority to 2.
Notice that as you change the Priority cycle gadget for Latest Date from 0
to 1 to 2, you will see *DUP* appear in priority 1 as the Date moves
through the priority 1 position.

The final sort window for the above sorting priority will look like this:

=====================================================================

               1       2       3       4       5       6       7
Priorities:  UNREAD   DATE  ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

Un-Read Messages: FIRST [X]      Messages with Attachments: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|1|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|              LAST [ ]

Replied Messages: FIRST [ ]      Forwarded Messages: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|       LAST [ ]

Latest Date:      FIRST [X]      Largest Messages: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|2|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]

Group by FROM at Priority [@|0|    Group by Subject at Priority [@|0|

[ ] Order Received
                   --> at Priority [@|0|     [ ] Apply to all Folders
[ ] Latest Received

[LAST SAVED]    [LAST USED]    [   USE   ]    [  SAVE  ]   [ CANCEL ]

=====================================================================

When you are satisfied with the order click on [SAVE] to save this order
for this folder only.  If you want to use this order for all your folders
click on "Apply to all Folders" before clicking on [SAVE].


Another example might have the messages displayed with unread messages
first, followed by messages grouped by SUBJECT, and within the SUBJECT
grouping, by the latest date received.  This, in effect, creates a message
threading condition with like subjects grouped together.

To create this sort condition, click on the Un-Read Messages:  FIRST box
and set it's priority to 1.  Then set the "Group by Subject at Priority"
cycle gadget to 2.  Finally click on the Latest Date:  FIRST box and set
it's priority to 3.  The final sort window for this grouping would be:

=====================================================================

               1       2       3       4       5       6       7
Priorities:  UNREAD SUBJECT   DATE  ------- ------- ------- -------

Un-Read Messages: FIRST [X]      Messages with Attachments: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|1|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|              LAST [ ]

Replied Messages: FIRST [ ]      Forwarded Messages: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|       LAST [ ]

Latest Date:      FIRST [X]      Largest Messages: FIRST [ ]
Priority [@|3|     LAST [ ]      Priority [@|0|     LAST [ ]

Group by FROM at Priority [@|0|    Group by Subject at Priority [@|2|

[ ] Order Received
                   --> at Priority [@|0|     [ ] Apply to all Folders
[ ] Latest Received

[LAST SAVED]    [LAST USED]    [   USE   ]    [  SAVE  ]   [ CANCEL ]

=====================================================================

If you want the messages sorted with the earlier messages first within the
subject grouping, you would click on Latest Date:  LAST rather than Latest
Date:  FIRST.

Since the date sort is controlled by the local date and time that the
message was SENT, you might want to use the Order Received or Latest
Received instead of Latest Date.  Order Received will list the messages
with the oldest received first, while Latest Received will list the
messages with the newest received first.

You, of course, can set different sort orders for different folders.  In
this case select the folder you want to change the sort order on and DON'T
click on the "Apply to all Folders" checkmark gadget.


                           Address Book Window
                           -------------------

The Address Book window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
screen whenever you double click on the ADDRESS BOOK command icon or on
the [Call Address Book] button in the COMPOSE MESSAGE window (see below
under the COMPOSE MESSAGE window description).

If you have a non-interlaced screen (640 x 200), the display will cover
the folder strip to allow more room for the Address Book display.  With an
interlaced screen (640 x 400) you will be able to see the folder strip.

The Address Book window looks like the following:

=====================================================================
Address Book
=====================================================================

Nick Name: [        ] Address: [                   ] Select [@| To: |

Real Name: [                        ] Group [ ]  Send Header Only [ ]

Nickname Real Name               UserID (Address)          [x] Expand
---------------------------------------------------------------------
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH n ENTRIES | |
                                 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
                                 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
---------------------------------------------------------------------

  [ ADD ]     [MODIFY]      [DELETE]      [SELECT]      [ EXIT ]

=====================================================================

This window can be used to create, modify, or delete Address Book entries.
It can also be used to select a Nickname to be used as a recipient of a
message when composing messages.

Several of the Command icons remain active when you are displaying the
Address Book window, although there meaning maybe slightly changed.  These
are the DISPLAY NEXT MESSAGE icon, the DISPLAY PREVIOUS MESSAGE icon, the
DISPLAY NEXT FOLDER icon, the DISPLAY PREVIOUS FOLDER icon, the DISPLAY
CURRENT FOLDER icon, the PRINT icon, the DELETE icon, and the COMPOSE
MESSAGE icon.

The three fields of an address book entry are:  a one to eight character
Nickname, an individual's real name (up to 99 characters), and the address
of the individual (UserId and Domain in the form userid@domain) which is
limited to 70 characters.

Group lists can also be created which distributes a message to a number of
different individuals.  The group is identified with the heading
"DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH nnn ENTRIES" in the top most UserID field.  The
nnn indicates the number of entries in the group.  The UserID's for the
members of that list are shown in alphabetic order below that heading.  For
items in the distribution list, real UserIDs or Nicknames can be used.  An
item in the distribution list can even be another distribution list
identified by the Nickname for that group.  By clicking on the Checkmarked
item "Group", you can identify the entry as a group item.

The checkmarked item identified as "Send Header Only" is only active when
"Group" is checked.  If a checkmark is in the "Send Header Only" box, only
the group name will be sent in the To:  field when a message is sent to
the group; otherwise, every UserId in the group will be listed in the To:
header.  It is a good idea to check this item if you have large groups or
if you don't want the other members of the group to know all the members
of the group.

If a Nickname rather than a UserID is used in the group list Address
field, then, if a modification is made to the UserID of the Nickname, you
do not have to change the item in the Group list.  The modification will
be automatic when the group rather than the individual is selected.

When composing a message, a Nickname can be used to identify the recipient
of a message.  All Nicknames are expanded to Real Name and UserID when
mail is sent.

For registered users of AEMail, the checkmarked box to the far right of
the list heading labeled "Expand" is used to shrink or expand the group
entries in the list.  When this box is not checked, only the group heading
is displayed without the entries in the group showing.  When it is
checked, the groups are expanded to show all the members of the group.
When first displayed, this item will be checked.  However, the system
remembers the state of this checkmark so if you should shrink the groups,
the next time you select the Address Book only the group headings will be
displayed.

For un-registered users, this item will be checked and ghosted.  You will
not be able to shrink the groups.

Address Book entries are sorted by Nickname and group entries are
interspersed with single entries.  Also Real Names are presented as first
name followed by last name rather than last name, first name.

This is a scrolling list.  If there are too many entries to fit in the
window, you can scroll the list by using the scroll bar, clicking on the
up or down arrows below the scroll bar, or by using the up or down cursor
keys.

Additionally the following keys can be used to move the list as follows:

    "Home" or "ALT Cursor Up" moves the listview to the top.
    "End" or "ALT Cursor Down" moves the listview to the botton.
    "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up.  The
        top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
        line of the new page.
    "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
        The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
        top line of the new page.
    The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
        the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
        feature.

WARNING:  if you have selected one of the string gadgets for entering
data, the keys listed above will not work for scrolling the list.  You
will have to click outside of the string gadget to re-activate scrolling
with the cursor keys.

For adding entries to the Address Book, the entries at the top of the
window are used to place data in the various fields of the Address Book
entry.  If a message was selected when the address book was called, the
Real Name:, if present, and Address:  fields are filled in with
information from the Reply-To:  header of the message.  If the Reply-To:
header is not present, the From:  header will be used.  You can force the
From:  header to be used by holding down the shift key when you click on
the Address Book icon.

Please keep in mind that Reply-To:  addresses normally do not have real
names associated with them, but From:  addresses many times do.  If you
want the real name you may have to hold down the shift key when you click
on the Address Book icon.

If you access the Address Book from the Compose message window during a
"mailto:" call to AEMail, the userid from the "mailto:" will be placed in
the address field.  This allows you to assign a Nickname and Real Name to
this address and save it in your Address Book.

If you click on one of the entries in the list view, that entry will be
transferred to the Nickname:, Real Name:, and Address:  fields at the top
of the window.  If you click on a group entry line which has the Group
Nickname and "DISTRIBUTION LIST ..." in the address portion, only the
Nickname:  and the Group name (in the Real Name field) will be transferred
leaving any previous address in the Address field.  The "Group" box will
also be checked.  This facilitates adding items to a Group list.

When adding an entry to the address book, you must always enter a Nickname
and Address.  Real Name is optional, but recommended.

To add a group entry, the "Group" box must be checked.  Groups need a
Nickname that is unique (not the same as that used for an individual) and
should have a group description entered in the Real Name:  string gadget.
Group entries are entered one at a time.  The maximum number of entries
that can be added to a group is 3000.  When a message is sent to a group,
the message will be sent to a maximum of 50 recipients at a time.  This
takes care of problems when there is a limit on the number of recipient
addresses that a SMTP server can handle at a time.

After correctly filling in the top portion of the window, click on the
[ADD] button to add the item to the list.  Except for group Nicknames,
there can't be a duplicate Nickname when adding to the list.  An already
existing group Nickname will cause the entry to be added to that groups
distribution list.

To modify an entry, the Nickname for the entry must already exist in the
list.  You can not modify Nicknames.  If you need to do this, delete the
old entry and add a new one.  For individual entries, you can modify
either the Real Name:  or Address:  fields.  For group entries you can
only modify the Real Name:  field.  If you need to modify an address in
the distribution list, delete the old one and add a new one.

One of the reasons that Nicknames are preferred in distribution lists is
that, if you need to modify a user's address, you can do so by simply
modifying the Individual's entry.  The address in the group is then
automatically updated by reference.

Selecting one of the entries in the address list will move the data from
that entry to the fields at the top of the window.  Make the modifications
you want then click on the [MODIFY] button to make the modifications.

To delete an entry, select it in the list and then click on the [DELETE]
button.  You can also use the DELETE icon to do this.

The [SELECT] button is used only for one special purpose.  If the full
Address Book was called from a "mailto:" call to AEMail, this button is
used to select an address from the Address Book and place it in the
appropriate recipients address line while composing the message.  The
Address Book display is slightly different if it was not a "mailto:" call
(see below).

When you click on the [SELECT] button, the Address Book display is closed
and the COMPOSE MESSAGE window is re-activated.  To determine which header
field is to receive the address, the "Select" cycle gadget at the top of
the window is used.  There are three items for this gadget:  To:, cc:, and
bcc:.  Determine which field should receive the address and then click on
the [SELECT] button.  The Nickname for the selected item is transferred to
the appropriate field in the compose window.

If the Address Book was not called from the Compose window, the "Select"
cycle gadget will be ghosted and can not be used.  If the Address Book was
called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window, clicking on one of the address
fields before calling the Address Book will automatically select the
appropriate field in the "Select" cycle gadget.

You can avoid using the [SELECT] button for returning to the COMPOSE
MESSAGE Window by double clicking on an item in the Address Book list
view.

If the Address Book was not called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window,
instead of double clicking, the COMPOSE MESSAGE command icon can be
selected when in the Address Book window.  When this is done, the COMPOSE
MESSAGE window is activated for composing a new message with the selected
address field always being the To: field.  The selected address in the
Address Book will be moved to the To: field.

The [EXIT] button is used to exit from the Address Book window without
performing any address selection for a composed message.  You will need to
[EXIT] from the Address Book if you want to quit AEMail.

If the Address Book was called while displaying a message, clicking on the
DISPLAY NEXT MESSAGE or the DISPLAY PREVIOUS MESSAGE icons will
automatically exit from the Address Book and display either the next or
previous message in the currently displayed message list.

If you click on the DISPLAY NEXT FOLDER, the DISPLAY PREVIOUS FOLDER, or
DISPLAY CURRENT FOLDER icons, the Address Book will be closed and the
appropriate message list for the selected folder will be displayed.

If the PRINT icon is selected while you are displaying the Address Book,
you will get a printout of your complete address book.  All individual
entries will be displayed first followed by group entries.  Unless a group
is too large to fit on one page, an attempt will be made to ensure that a
group will be printed in it's entirety on a page.

When the Address Book is be called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window and the
COMPOSE MESSAGE window was not activated during a "mailto:" call to
AEMail, the Address Book display will be slightly different.  It will look
like this:

=====================================================================
|+| Address Book For Compose
=====================================================================

Nickname Real Name               UserID (Address)          [ ] Expand
---------------------------------------------------------------------
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH n ENTRIES | |
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH n ENTRIES | |
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Click on Address Book entry to transfer to [@| To: | field  [ CLOSE ]

=====================================================================

This is an abreviated window which does not have the string gadgets for
creating or deleting Address Book entries.  It is designed for selecting
addresses to transfer to the COMPOSE MESSAGE window only.  When you click
on an address in the window it will be transferred to the appropriate
field in the COMPOSE MESSAGE window as determined by the cycle gadget at
the bottom of the window.  There are three items for this gadget:  To:,
cc:, and bcc:  (the same as the "Select" cycle gadget in the full Address
Book window.  Select which field should receive the address and click on
the address in the Address Book.  You can select multiple addresses; the
window will not close until you click on either the Close gadget at the
top of the Address Book window or the [CLOSE] button at the bottom of the
window.  The Address Book window will also close if you double click on a
name (It will be transferred and then the window will close).

You can also select which field you want to receive the address by
clicking into the appropriate field in the COMPOSE MESSAGE window.  You
will see the cycle gadget switch to that field and the cursor will
disappear from the field since the Address Book window will again become
activated.

When the Address Book is called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window it will be
in the un-expanded state.  If you are a registered user, you can expand
the group names by clicking on the "Expand" checkmark gadget to the right
of the listview headings.

You can also have the full Address Book display called from the COMPOSE
MESSAGE window by holding down the shift key when you click on the [Call
Address Book] gadget.

NOTE:  When AEMail is loaded it will automatically create an address book
entry for the Nickname AEMail with an address for my email address:
[e-mail].  You can use this entry whenever you wish to report a
bug or send a message concerning AEMail to me.


                          Message Display Window
                          ----------------------

The Message Display window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
screen whenever you double click on a message in the message list window.
If you are already displaying a message, clicking on the NEXT or PREVIOUS
command icons will display either the NEXT or PREVIOUS message.

If you have a non-interlaced screen (640 x 200), the display will cover
the folder strip to allow more room for the message display.  With an
interlaced screen (640 x 400) you will be able to see and use the folder
strip.

To re-display the Message List, click on the "folder" icon on the Command
Icon Tool Bar or one of the folders in the folder icon bar (if visable).

The message is divided into two sections:  message header information,
which is always present, and a scrolling list that displays the message.
Header information will also be displayed in the scrolling message
listview, but only those header lines that you want displayed.

The message header portion of the screen is set up as follows:

From: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Date: DOW, MMM DD YYYY HH:MM:SS
To: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx [ATTACHMENT]
Subject: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  Active Msg


The From:  and To:  fields will show the Real Name (if present) from the
appropriate header.  If the Real Name is not present in the header, then
the UserID will be used instead.  If a Nickname is being used for a
message being sent, then the Nickname will appear.

The Subject field will have the RE; or (FWD) preappended to the field for
messages that are REPLIES and/or are FORWARDED.

If the message has attachments, either MIME or UUENCODED, the [ATTACHMENT]
button will appear at the right of the To:  line.  If no attachments are
present this button will say [SAVE TEXT] instead.  Clicking on the [SAVE
TEXT] button will bring up the save text requester along side the [SAVE
TEXT] button which is described below under "Save Text Requester".

For messages that are active (not deleted), "Active Msg" will appear in a
text box to the right of the Subject line.  If the message is a deleted
message "Deleted Msg" will appear in red in place of "Active Msg".

The complete message will be displayed in the message listview including
any text type attachments.  If the attachments are UUENCODED attachments
or are non-text type attachments, they will not be shown, but can be
retrieved by clicking on the [ATTACHMENT] button.  This will bring up an
attachment requestor which is described below under "Attachment
Requester".

Messages that are encoded with "Quoted-Printable" notation as well as text
messages encoded with encoded binary (BASE64) will be correctly displayed
as well.  Since these types of messages will be saved with their encoding
intact when saved using the SAVE MESSAGE icon or the "Export..." item
under the Messages menu, the [SAVE TEXT] gadget has been provided to save
message text correctly decoded for messages without attachments.  For
messages with attachments, the first entry in the Attachment list is the
body of messages itself.

The message display is a scrolling list.  There are four methods that you
can use to scroll the message:

    (1) Use the scroll bar to the right of the message.

    (2) Use the scroll arrows at the bottom of the scroll bar.

    (3) Use the up and down cursor keys.  You can also move the listview
        with other keys as follows:

        "Home" or "ALT Cursor Up" moves the listview to the top.
        "End" or "ALT Cursor Down" moves the listview to the botton.
        "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up.  The
            top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
            line of the new page.
        "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
            The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
            top line of the new page.
        The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
            the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
            feature.

    (4) click the mouse on the list display and while holding down
        the left mouse button, move above or below the display.
        When you lift up on the mouse button after the list
        starts to scroll, you can continue to scroll by moving
        the mouse up or down.  Clicking into the display will
        stop the scrolling action.

While messages are loaded into the listview, you will not see them until
they are completely read.  A busy pointer will be displayed until the
listview is completely built.

You can change the font for the message display.  If you want a larger
font for displaying message text, go to the Fonts Page of the
Configuration Setup (activated by the Configuration/Edit menu item under
the Project menu) and change the font in the "Message Font" section.  Any
font or font size can be used, but selecting a proportional font for some
messages may take longer for the message to load.  If you are an
un-registered user you will be able to change the font for the current
session of AEMail but you will not be able to save the font selection for
subsequent AEMail sessions.

You can also edit and save lines from the message to the clipboard by
double clicking on any line in the message.  This will open a window at
the top of the screen for editing and saving the line to the clipboard.
See the section "Using the Clipboard with AEMail" under V. USING AEMAIL.

If the line you double click on contains an email address (determined by
the @ between adjoining strings) or a web address (deterined by www.
within the string), just the email address or the web address will be
transferred to the string.  If the web address does not have http:// at
the beginning of the string, that will be added.

If you hold down the shift key when you double click on such an address,
the entire line will be trasferred, not just the email or web address.

If you have transferred an email or web address you can also hit a
function key to execute an ARexx script.  The email address or web address
will be transferred to a special variable and the script will be executed.
If the script contains the ARexx command GETVAR it will receive the
variable string in the RESULT variable and can act on it.  Several sample
ARexx scripts have been placed in your ARexx directory which can extract
the address from the special variable and call your web browser to go to
that web page (gotowww.aem), send a message to the email address
(sendmsg.aem) or place the email address in the address book either as an
individual address (placeaddr.aem) or as a group address (placegrp.aem).

                           Save Text Requester
                           ===================

When you click on the [SAVE TEXT] button on the Message Display Window, a
a tiered set of five buttons will appear to the left of the [SAVE TEXT]
gadget that look like this:

                         [    VIEW   ]
                         [ SAVE FILE ]
                         [ SAVE CLIP ][SAVE TEXT]
                         [ CLIP UNIT ]
                         [   CANCEL  ]


Clicking on one of the buttons will perform the appropriate action as
described below.  With the exception of [CLIP UNIT], the buttons will
disappear at the completion of the action.

    [VIEW]

        This will display the message text with the program you selected
        in the "mailcap" file for the "text" MIME type.  If a program was
        not pre-defined for this MIME type, this button will be disabled
        (ghosted).  This option is given so that you can select special
        message display programs to display the message and perhaps
        perform special operations of the message.  As an example, you
        could specify an editor which would allow you to make
        modifications to the message and then save portions of it to a
        file or clipboard.

    [SAVE FILE]

        A  file requester will pop up which allows you to select
        a file to save your message to.  If the message used a coding
        scheme such as quoted-printable or encoded binary it will be
        properly converted before it is saved.  The default directory
        designated to receive this text file is RAM:; however, you can
        change this with the file requester or set a different
        default with the Default Path Parameters display on the
        Configuration Setup Window.

    [SAVE CLIP]

        If the text has an encoding type of 7-bit, 8-bit, or
        quoted-printable, you can save it to the current clipboard unit.
        If the text is encoded binary, this button will be ghosted.

    [CLIP UNIT]

        This will bring up the requester that allows you to change the
        current clipboard unit (see "Using the Clipboard with AEMail"
        under V. USING AEMAIL).

    [CANCEL]

        This gadget is provided to exit from the request without
        performing any action.

                           Attachment Requester
                           ====================

When you click on the [ATTACHMENTS] button on the Message Display Window,
an Attachment Requester will be displayed.  It looks like this:

      |============================================================|
      |o|  Attachment List                                         |
      |============================================================|
      |                MimeType/SubType          File Name         |
      | ========================================================== |
      | | 1  SHOWN     text/plain                              | | |
      | |    Description: (None)                               | | |
      | | 2  VIEWABLE  image/gif                 castle.gif    | | |
      | |    Description: Picture of a castle                  | | |
      | | 3  SAVE ONLY application/octet-stream  aemail.lha    | | |
      | |    Description: The AEMail archive                   | | |
      | ========================================================== |
      |                                                            |
      |   [    VIEW   ]       [VIEW & SAVE]        [ SAVE FILE ]   |
      |                                                            |
      |   [ SAVE CLIP ]       [ CLIP UNIT ]        [    EXIT   ]   |
      |____________________________________________________________|

This requester is initially placed at the top center of the window
partially obscuring the command and folder icons and the top portion of
the message.  You can drag the requester around the window to expose other
items of the display.  You can also use the scroll bar on the message
display listview to show different parts of the message; however, none of
the commands on the command or folder bar or the menu bar can be activated
until after you click on the [EXIT] button in the Attachment Requester.

The SHOWN designation is used for any attachment that is displayed in the
message window.  This is generally any attachment that has a MIME type of
text or message.  However, standard Mailcap entries have been included in
the Mailcap file to also display and save these attachments from the
Attachment window.

Any message with attachments will generally have one section (the initial
message) which is displayable text and will be shown as an attachment with
the SHOWN designation.  You will also be able to VIEW all SHOWN parts of
the message separably.  You will always be able to save any item in the
list in it's un-encoded form.

UUENCODED attachments will have the designation UUENCODED displayed in the
MIME types/subtypes field.

Any attachments that do not have a MIME type of text or message will have
either a VIEWABLE or SAVE ONLY designation.  The VIEWABLE designation is
used for those MIME types/subtypes which have a program designated in the
mailcap file for displaying this MIME type/subtype.  If no program is
designated for this MIME type/subtype the SAVE ONLY designator will appear
on the attachment line and the [VIEW] and the [VIEW & SAVE] buttons will
be disabled.

UUENCODED attachments are always SAVE ONLY attachments.

To select an attachment to view, view & save, or to save only, select the
appropriate attachment line in the list view gadget.  You can select the
main description line (with number, mime type, and filename) or the second
line with the "Description:" heading.

After selecting the attachment, the buttons below the listview will
perform the following actions:

    [VIEW]

        This will display the attachment with the program you
        selected in the "mailcap" file for this MIME type/subtype.
        If a program was not pre-defined for this MIME type/subtype
        this button will be disabled and you will not be able to
        display the attachment.  You will also see SAVE ONLY rather
        than VIEWABLE on the description of this attachment.

    [VIEW & SAVE]

        A file requester will pop up which allows you to select
        a file to save your attachment to.  The default directory
        designated to receive attachments is RAM:; however, you can
        change this with the file requester or set a different
        default with the Default Path Parameters page on the
        Configuration Setup Window.

        If a file name was provided in either the Content-Type: or
        Content-Disposition: headers, the file name will be shown
        on the attachment description and will be pre-set as the
        filename in the file requester.  You can, of course, change
        this name if you wish.

        After the file is saved, the attachment will be displayed
        with the program you selected in the "mailcap" file.

        If a program was not pre-defined for this MIME type/subtype
        this button will be disabled and you will not be able to
        display the attachment.  You will also see SAVE ONLY rather
        than VIEWABLE on the description of this attachment.


    [SAVE FILE]

        A file requester will pop up which allows you to select
        a file to save your attachment to.  The default directory
        designated to receive attachments is RAM:; however, you can
        change this with the file requester or set a different
        default with the Default Path Parameters display on the
        Configuration Setup Window.

        If a file name was provided in either the Content-Type: or
        Content-Disposition: headers or with the UUENCODED "begin"
        line, the file name will be shown on the attachment
        description and will be pre-set as the default filename
        in the file requester.  You can, of course, change this
        name if you wish.

        You will always be able to save any attachment even if it
        is SHOWN and a filename is not specified.

    [SAVE CLIP]

        If the attachment has an encoding type of 7-bit, 8-bit, or
        quoted-printable, you can save the attachment to the current
        clipboard unit.  If the attachment is not a text type attachment
        (encoded binary), this button will be ghosted.

    [CLIP UNIT]

        This will bring up the requester that allows you to change the
        current clipboard unit (see "Using the Clipboard with AEMail"
        under V. USING AEMAIL).

    [EXIT]

        After performing all the operations you wish for any
        particular attachment, click on this button to remove
        the Attachment Requester.  This requester also has a
        CLOSE gadget which you can also use to exit from the
        requester.


                          Compose Message Window
                          ----------------------

The Compose Message window is brought up whenever you click on the COMPOSE
MESSAGE command icon or select the Compose..., Reply..., or Forward...
sub-menus under the Messages menu.  If a message is selected when you
click on the COMPOSE MESSAGE command icon it will act as a "Reply to this
message" action.

The Compose Message window will cover the entire screen.  You must proceed
sequentional through the actions or cancel to abort the compose operation.

The Compose Message window looks like this:

=====================================================================
Compose a Message (Signature: [full path of signature file active])
=====================================================================

       To: [                              ][CLR] [Call Address Book ]

       cc: [                                                   ][CLR]

      bcc: [                                                   ][CLR]

 Reply To: [                                   ][CLR] [ Use Default ]

  Subject: [                                                   ][CLR]

           [] New Message                    [] 7-Bit
           [] Reply to Message               [] 8-bit
           [] Forward Message                [] quoted-printable
                                             [] encoded binary

 [ ] Quote Original Message Text   Quote Prefix[>                    ]

   Quote Header: [                                                   ]

 [ ] Add Signature Block   [Select Signature]        [ Edit Signature]

 [Compose/Edit Message]    [  Add Headers   ]        [Add Attachments]

 [Send Message Now] [Queue Message] [Save In Pending] [Cancel Message]

======================================================================

The title bar on the Compose Message window will contain the full path
name to the current, in use signature file.

When the Compose Message window first appears and if the message is a
replied message, the following requester will appear if the replied
message had To:  recipients other than yourself:


       |=========================================================|
       | Multiple Recipients                                     |
       |---------------------------------------------------------|
       |             The message you are replying to             |
       |                has other To: recipients.                |
       |              Do you want to send the reply              |
       |                                                         |
       | [o] to only the sender of the original message?         |
       | [ ] to all To: recipients of the original message?      |
       | [ ] cc: to all To: recipients of the original message?  |
       | [ ] bcc: to all To: recipients of the original message? |
       |                                                         |
       |                       [ Continue ]                      |
       |                                                         |
       |=========================================================|

With this requester you can send the message you are composing to none of
the other recipients, directly to all the other recipients (in the To:
line), as a cc to all the recipients, or as a bcc to all the other
recipients.

If there is a single recipient to the message and that recipient is the
same as either your From:  or Reply-To:  address, you will not see the
requester.  Also, when the list of recipients is transferred to the
appropriate address line in the Compose window, any address that is the
same as your From:  or Reply-To:  address will be stripped.  If you want
to send the message also to the From:  or Reply-To: address you will have
to add the address yourself.

When you have selected the action you want, hit [Continue] and the list of
To: recipients will be transferred to the appropriate string gadget in
the Compose Message window.

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION:  If the message you are replying to was received by
a version of AEMail prior to 1.42, you will not be able to transfer
recipients that extend beyond one line.  You can solve this problem,
however, by saving the message you want to reply to to a file (using the
export function) and then reading it back into version 1.43 of AEMail.
To read it back in using the "From Local File.." menu item under the
"Retrieve Msgs" menu.

One point of warning.  If the recipient of the original message was the
name of a list rather than the name of an individual, you will also see
this requester.  Unfortunately, there is no way to know that the recipient
name is a list name rather than an individual name.  In this event, you
should always select "to only the sender of the original message" since
the list name is probably not a valid recipient.

If there were cc:'s to the original message, you may also see the
following similar requester for sending to the cc: recipients:

       |=========================================================|
       | Multiple Recipients                                     |
       |---------------------------------------------------------|
       |             The message you are replying to             |
       |             has one or more cc: recipients.             |
       |              Do you want to send the reply              |
       |                                                         |
       | [o] to only the sender of the original message?         |
       | [ ] to all cc: recipients of the original message?      |
       | [ ] cc: to all cc: recipients of the original message?  |
       | [ ] bcc: to all cc: recipients of the original message? |
       |                                                         |
       |                       [ Continue ]                      |
       |                                                         |
       |=========================================================|

Again, after you have selected the action you want, hit [Continue] and the
list of cc: recipients will be transferred to the appropriate string gadget
in the Compose Message window.

If the message is a replied message, the To: string gadget will also be
filled in with the Reply-To: address from the message you are replying to
or, if that is not present, the From: real name and user ID of the
message you are replying to.  This is in addition to any action caused by
the previously mentioned requesters.

You can force the From: address to be used by holding down the shift key
when clicking on the "compose" icon or selecting the menu sub-item "Use
From..." on the Reply menu item of the Messages menu.

Also, if the message is the result of a "mailto:" call, the To:  string
gadget will be filled in with the userid passed by the "mailto:" call.

If the message is a replied or forwarded message, the Subject:  string
gadget will be automatically filled in with the subject from the replied
or forwarded message.  RE:  or (fwd) will also automatically appear in
front of the subject.

You may enter names, either Nicknames or Real Names and/or UserIDs, for
any of the To:, cc:, or bcc:  fields.  If a Real Name and/or UserID is
entered, it should be entered as

        Real Name<userid@domain>              or
        userid@domain(Real Name)              or
        userid@domain

The domain can be left off if the recipient is at the same domain as the
user.  However, it is best that the full userid@domain be used so there is
no confusion with Nicknames.

If a Nickname is used it will be automatically expanded when the message
is sent.

If multiple users are placed in any of the To:, cc:, or bcc: fields they
must be separated by commas.  Each of the string gadgets (To:, cc:, or
bcc:) can hold a string up to 4096 charcaters long.  This allows you to
build up quite a long list of recipients; however, using a group Nickname
is preferable since only one name is needed in the string gadget.

If the users you are sending the message to are in your Address Book, you
can click on the [Call Address Book] button.  This will call up an
abreviated form of your Address Book (see Address Book window discussion
above) and you can select the user you want.  Clicking on the user will
transfer the Nickname for that user to the appropriate field indicated by
the cycle gadget at the bottom of the Address Book window (To:, cc:  or
bcc:).  The Nickname for the user will be automatically added to the
appropriate field in the Compose window.  If you make a mistake and the
wrong name is added or it is added to the wrong field, you can use the
backspace key to remove the offending nickname or the [CLR] gadget to
completely clear the field.

The Address Book window will remain displayed to allow you to select
multiple names.  Multiple names in any field will be automatically
separated by commas.

To exit from the Address Book display, either click on the Close gadget at
the top of the Address Book window or the [CLOSE] button at the bottom of
the window.  Alternately, you can double click on the last name you add to
a field.

You can also use the [Call Address Book] gadget to place the userid from a
"mailto:" call into your Address Book.  In this case the full address book
will be shown rather than the abbreviated one.  You can also access the
full Address Book by pressing the shift key when you click on the [Call
Address Book] gadget (see the discussion of the Address Book window
above).

All of the gadgets in the Compose Window remain active when you are
displaying the abbreviated form of the Address Book.  They are not active
when you display the full Address Book.  The "select" cycle gadget in the
Address Book can be used to select the field you want the address
transferred to, or alternately, you can click into the field you want and
the cycle gadget will automatically be set to that field.  When you do
this, the Address Book window will immediately become activated to allow
you to select the address you want or to move the Address Book list view
with the cursor keys.

The cc:  field is used to send a "carbon copy" of the message to the
people in the list on the cc:  line.  The cc:  header will appear on the
message sent to the To:, cc:  and bcc:  recipients.  The bcc:  field is
used the send a "blind carbon copy" to the people in that list.  The bcc:
recipients will not be identified to any of the recipients of the message.

The Reply To:  field is used to place a Reply-To:  address header in the
message.  This field is intended for people who want replies directed to a
different email address than their From:  address.  The configuration item
"Reply-To:" will automatically be loaded into this field when the compose
window is displayed.  If the Reply To:  address for this message should be
different than the configured Reply-To address, then place it here.  If
you click on the [ Use Default ] button, your configured Reply-To address
will be placed in this field.  If the Reply To:  field is left blank, no
Reply-To:  header line will be added to the message.

The Subject:  field is used to create a subject header for your message.
If the message is a reply, RE:  will be placed in front of the subject.
If the message is forwarded, (fwd) will be placed after the subject.

The [CLR] gadget to the right of the To:, Reply To:, Subject:, cc:, and
bcc:  string gadgets allows you to easily clear the data in the
appropriate string gadget.

Below the Subject field is two columns of Radio buttons for selecting the
type message to create and to specify the encoding method for the message
body.  The first column of radio buttons specifies the message type to
create.  These can be:

    Compose a new Message
    Reply to Message
    Forward Message
    Edit Message

Which buttons appear depends on the way the Compose Message window was
called.

"New Message" and "Edit Message" appear if a message was selected from the
PENDING or QUEUED folders and the COMPOSE MESSAGE command icon was
selected or the "Edit..." menu item was selected from the Messages menu.
The "Edit Message" button is initially highlighted.

"New Message", "Reply to Message", and "Forward Message" appear if a
message was selected from an input folder (such as INBOX) and the COMPOSE
MESSAGE command icon was selected or one of the "Reply" or "Forward..."
menu items were selected from the Messages menu.  If a "Reply" sub-menu
item was selected, the "Reply to Message" button will be initially
highlighted.  If "Forward..." is selected, the "Forward Message" button
will be intially highlighted.

Only "New Message" appears and is highlighted if no message was selected,
if the "Compose.." menu item was selected, or if a message in the SENT
folder was selected.

"New Message" also appears if the Compose message window was activated by
a "mailto:" call from a browser.  If a "message=" argument was provided on
the shell call to AEMail, both the "New Message" and "Edit Message" will
appear and the "Edit Message item will be highlighted..

If the "Edit...", "Reply" or "Forward..." menu items are selected and a
message was not selected, an error message appears.  If the "Compose..."
sub-menu is selected, a new message will always be created.  Likewise,
messages cannot be replied to or forwarded from the PENDING, QUEUED or
SENT folders.  If the "Edit..." menu item is selected, the message must
come from either the PENDING or QUEUED folder.

You can always change the preferred type of message to one of the other
ones allowed by clicking on the appropriate message type.

The checkmarked menu items under the Messages menu ("Display Full Hdr",
"Fwd Body Txt Only", and "Incl Hdr in Resp") can effect how "Reply" and
"forward" messages are constructed.  The "Incl Hdr in Resp" is the only
checkmarked item to effect "Reply" messages.  It's effect is described
below under quoting message text.

For forwarded messages, the normal minimum header information is, by
default, included (see "Set Minimum Headers" under the "General
Parameters" page in Section IV - Configuration).  If you want all the
headers to be included in the forwarded message, checkmark the "Display
Full Hdr" item.  If you don't want any headers to be included checkmark
the "Fwd Body Txt Only" item.  This will also prevent any attachments from
the original messages being included in the forwarded message.

Please Note: If the fowarded message contains attachments and "Fwd Body
Txt Only" is not checked, the full header will be sent in the forwarded
message regardless of the setting of the "Display Full Hdr" item.

The radio button column on the right of the window is for the encoding
method for the message body.  Four items appear here:

    7-Bit
    8-Bit
    quoted-printable
    encoded binary

The default is 8-bit.  Some Internet gateways, however, can not handle
8-bit data - only 7-bit.  If this is the case with your situation, select
7-bit, or if your message contains characters above ASCII 128 (most
foriegn character sets have these types of characters), select
"quoted-printable" or "encoded binary".

The "quoted-printable" encoding is preferred in this instance.  You will
be able to read most of the raw message except for the extended character
set characters.  The "encoded binary" encoding will encode the message in
BASE64 encoding which is totally un-readable in it's raw format.  AEMail,
however, is able to handle the translation of both "quoted-printable" and
"encoded binary" in the message body for both sending and receiving
messages.

If the message is a reply, the "Quote Original Message Text" box will be
checked if you have selected this option in the General Parameters page of
the Configuration Setup Window.  You can un-check this box if you don't
want the original text quoted in the message (or check it, if the default
action was not to include text).  For all other types of Compose windows,
this checkbox will be disabled.

The "Quote Prefix:" string gadget will indicate what is to be placed in
front of each quoted line.  This, by default, is '>'; however, you can add
whatever you like here (such as the person's initials followed by :  or
>).  You can also permanently change this field with the General
Parameters page of the Configuration Setup Window.

A "Quote header:" will be placed on the line in front of the quoted
material.  Currently, the default header which will appear in the Quote
Header:  string gadget is:

    On &(week), &(date2), at &(time), &(name) wrote:

The & followed by a field name in parenthesis indicates substitution of
data from the original message headers.  The values that can be
substituted are:

    &(name)     The Real Name of the sender of the original
                message.  If the Real Name is not available,
                the sender's UserId will be used instead

    &(subject)  The subject from the original message.  Any RE:
                or (fwd) will be stripped.

    &(week)     The day of the week that the original message
                was sent.

    &(date)     The date the original message was sent in the form
                DD MMM YYYY, where DD is the day of the month,
                MMM is month in the form Jan, Feb, Mar, etc, and
                YYYY is the full 4 digit year.

    &(date1)    Same as &(date).

    &(date2)    The date in the form MMM DD, YYYY.

    &(time)     The time the original message was sent in the
                form HH:MM xM where HH is the hour on a 12 hour
                clock, MM is the minute, and xM is AM or PM.

    &(to)       The email address the message was sent to.  For
                mailing lists this could be the name of the mailing
                list if that is what appeared in the To: header.

The "Quote Header" is designed to be modified by the user and can be
changed with the string gadget.  This change is only in effect for this
message however.  You can permanently change the "Quote Header" with the
General Parameters page of the Configuration Setup Window.

Whether on not the quoted message's headers are to be included in the
quote is controlled by the "Incl Hdr in Resp" item under the Messages main
menu.  If this item is checked the "Date", "To", "From:", "Reply To:",
"Subject:", "cc:", and "bcc:" headers will be displayed from the original
message.  If it is not checked, no header information will be included.

The amount of header information in the quoted message is also controlled
by the "Display Full Hdr" item in the Messages menu.

The row of gadgets below the "Quote Header:" is used to specify
characteristics of your signature file if you want one.  They work in
conjunction with the full path name of your current active signature file
shown in the title bar of the Compose Message window.

If a signature file is present, the "Add Signature Block" box will be
checked and the path name of that signature file will appear in the title
bar.  If a signature file is not present, this checkbox will be disabled.
The default signature file is AEMail:.signature.  However, if you are a
registered user, you can change to any other signature file by clicking on
the [Select Signature] gadget.  This will call up a file requester in
which you can select the appropriate file.  The file does not have to
exist; you can create it with the [Edit Signature] gadget.

If you are an un-registered user, the [Select Signature] button will be
ghosted and you can only use the standard AEMail:.signature file.

If you want to create or edit the current selected signature file, you can
click on the [Edit Signature] button.  This will call up your editor to
allow you to create or edit the selected signature file.  After you have
edited or created your signature file in your editor, save the file and
exit from the editor.  This will return you to the COMPOSE MESSAGE window
and the "Add Signature Block" check box will be enabled.

If you do not want the signature block placed at the end of your message,
uncheck the Add Signature Block box.

Note:  if the message is being edited, the Add Signature Block box WILL
NOT be checked.  This is done to prevent two signature blocks being added
to the message.  However, rather than disable this item, it is left to
allow the user to add a signature block in the event one was not added to
the original message or you selected the "New Message" radio button.

The [Add Attachments] button brings up the Add Attachments Requster which
is described below.  This requester allows you to add one or multiple
files as attachments to your message.  You can bring up this requester at
any time.  If it is brought up a second time, the old attachment
information will appear in the attachment list.  You can add to this
information or delete entries as you desire.

The [Compose/Edit Message] gadget calls up the editor you specified in the
General Parameters page of the Configuration Setup.  If you are editing a
previously composed message, you will see that message in your editor
window.  You can make changes as appropriate.  Also, if you specified
"Quote Original Message Text" you will see the quoted text.  You can
delete and insert lines as appropriate.

One of the things you will NOT see in the editor window are your message
headers or the signature block unless it is an edited message.  The
signature block is always added after you compose the message.  If this is
a "new" message, you will see a blank editor screen when the editor is
first called.  Enter whatever text you wish to use in your editor's window
and then select "Save" and "Quit" from your editor's menus.  This will
return you to the Compose Message window.

You will not be able to edit or add headers when you [Compose/Edit
Message].  If you need to add additional headers to a message you can use
the [Add Headers] gadget to add the headers.  This feature is ONLY
available to registered users.  Un-registered users will find this gadget
ghosted.

Clicking on the [Add Headers] gadget will bring up the Add Headers window
which is very similar to the "Information" window for a icon which is
called from the Workbench menus.  The Add Headers window looks like this:

     |=============================================================|
     |[o]  Add Additional Headers                                  |
     |=============================================================|
     |                                                             |
     |         ====================================================|
     | Headers |                                                | ||
     |         |                                                | ||
     |         |                                                | ||
     |[ NEW  ] |                                                | ||
     |         ====================================================|
     |[DELETE] [                                                  ]|
     |                                                             |
     |     [ SAVE ]            [CLEAR ALL]              [CANCEL]   |
     |                                                             |
     |=============================================================|

Your additional headers will appear in the scrolling list.  To add a
header to the list, click on [NEW] and enter the complete header line in
the string gadget below the scrolling list.  Be sure and include the
header identifier as well as the header text.  To add this new header to
this list hit the [RETURN] key.  To transfer a header to the string
gadget for editing or deleting it, click on the header line in the
scrolling list.  Clicking on [DELETE] will then delete the header from the
list.  If you want to edit the header, make the changes you want and then
hit [RETURN].  When you are satisified with the headers you want to add,
click on [SAVE] and the new headers will be saved and added to your
message.  [CLEAR ALL] will clear all the headers from the list and
[CANCEL] will cancel the operations.

At the bottom of the Compose Window is a row of four action buttons as
follows:

 [Send Message Now] [Queue Message] [Save In Pending] [Cancel Message]

If you decide that you do not want to compose a message after
all, click on the [Cancel Message] button to exit the COMPOSE MESSAGE
window.

Otherwise, if all the correct information has been added in the
COMPOSE MESSAGE window, click on the appropriate action button
at the bottom of the window.  [Save In Pending] will save your newly
created message in the PENDING folder.  [Queue Message] will place the
message in the QUEUED folder and [Send Message Now] will send the message
provided that you are connected to you Internet Provider.  If you were
unsuccesful with sending the message, it will be stored in the QUEUED
folder to allow you to immediately send the message when you re-connect to
your Internet Service Provider.

                        Add Attachments Requester
                        =========================

When you click on the [ADD ATTACHMENTS] button on the Compose Message
Window, an Add Attachments Requester will be displayed which looks like
this:

     |=============================================================|
     |[o]  Add Attachments                                         |
     |=============================================================|
     |                                                             |
     |              Filename: [                              ][REQ]|
     |Attachment Description: [                                   ]|
     |  Content Type/SubType: [                                   ]|
     |                        =====================================|
     |                        | text/plain                      | ||
     |                        | text/enriched                   | ||
     |                        | text/richtext                   | ||
     |                        =====================================|
     |              Encoding: |@|           Plain Text            ||
     |                                                             |
     | Mime Type/Sub-Type   FileName                 Encoding      |
     |=============================================================|
     ||                                                         | ||
     ||                                                         | ||
     ||                                                         | ||
     ||                                                         | ||
     |=============================================================|
     |[  ADD ]         [DELETE]         [ APPLY ]         [CANCEL ]|
     |                                                             |
     |=============================================================|

The Filename string gadget should contain the FULL path name and filename
of the attachment.  Clicking on the [REQ] gadget will bring up a file
requester which will allow you to select the appropriate file.  The
filename portion of this string will be used as the "file=" parameter of
the Content-Type MIME header and as the "filename=" parameter of the
Content-Disposition MIME header.

The initial directory that is chosen for the file requester is the
directory that was set up in the "Add Attachment from Directory" string
gadget in the Configuration:  Default Path Parameters (see Configuration
Screen under IV.  Configuration above).  If you are adding multiple
attachments to the message, clicking on [REQ] will bring up the last
directory that you used.

If you enter a non-existant file, an error requester will be displayed
when you try to [ADD] the file to the attachment list.

The Attachment Description is an optional string gadget for entering a
description of the attachment.  If present, this string gadget will create
a Content-Description MIME header.

Content Type/SubType is a string gadget which contains the MIME Content
Type/Subtype entry which will appear on the Content-Type MIME header.
THIS IS A REQUIRED ENTRY UNLESS YOU ARE ADDING AN UUENCODED attachment.
It is not used for UUENCODED attachments.

A scrolling list below this gadget is used to select an appropriate
type/sub-type.  Predefined type/subtypes, as defined in RFC 1341 and
RFC 1521, are included in this list as follows:

    text/plain
    text/enriched
    text/richtext
    message/rfc822
    message/partial
    message/external-body
    multipart/mixed
    multipart/alternative
    multipart/digest
    multipart/parallel
    application/octet-stream
    application/postscript
    image/gif
    image/jpeg
    audio/basic
    video/mpeg

Also added to this list will be any additional type/subtypes added through
the mailcap file and any type/subtypes encountered when displaying
attachments during THIS RUN OF AEMAIL.  AEMail has no way to remember
differing type/subtypes that it encounters unless they are included in the
mailcap file.

You can also add your own type/subtype by directly entering it in the
Content Type/SubType string gadget.  Unless the type/subtype is well known
and published, you should pick one of the existing types (text/, message/,
application/, image/, audio/, or video/) and use a subtype beginning with
"x-".  As an example, you might want to define an IFF image (not part of
the mime published standard) as:

    image/x-iff

It is suggested that you use a mailcap entry for the image/x-iff to cause
it to permanently appear in the list of Content Type/Subtypes.
Attachments must be in the format you select.  AEMail will do no
conversion.  As an example, if you select application/postscript, the file
you attach should already be in postscript format.

Also, DO NOT use the follwing types/subtypes:

    message/partial
    message/external-body
    multipart/mixed
    multipart/alternative
    multipart/digest
    multipart/parallel

All of the multipart types are not supported except at the highest level
(specifying the initial attachment list), and this is done automatically
by the program.

The encoding cycle gadget has four states as follows:

    Plain Text
    Quoted-Printable
    Encoded Binary
    UUENCODED

Generally, "Plain Text" should be used for:

    text/
    message/

The exception to this is when the attachment contains characters outside
the range of ASCII 32 to ASCII 128 and you ISP can not handle 8-bit codes.
If the document you are attaching contains these characters (usually
present in documents using foriegn character sets), you should use
"Quoted-Printable" or "Encoded Binary" encoding.

Generally speaking "Encoded Binary" should be used for the following
types:

    application/
    image/
    audio/
    video/

"UUENCODED" should be selected if you want the attachment to be in
UUENCODED format.  You can not mix UUENCODED attachments with MIME
attachments!

When a type/subtype is selected, the appropriate encoding format is
automatically selected.  Of course, you can change this with the cycle
gadget if there is a need.

Once all of the attributes for any particular attachment are selected,
click on the [ADD] gadget to add the attachment to the attachment list.
If the Filename field or Content Type/Subtype field (other than for
UUENCODED attachments) is blank an error requester will appear indicating
that you must have a valid entry in these fields.  As many attachments as
you want can be added to this list, but you can not mix MIME type
attachments with UUENCODED attachments.

If you wish to delete any particular gadget, select the attachment from
the list and click on [DELETE].  There is no way to modify attachment
attributes once they have been added to the list.  If you want to do this,
first click on [DELETE], make the appropriate changes, and then click on
[ADD].

Once you are satisfied with your attachment list click on [APPLY].  The
Add Attachments Requester will disappear and the attachments will be
automatically added to your message after it is composed.

If you decide that you don't want to add attachments after all, click on
[CANCEL] and the attachments will not be added when you compose your
message.

Clicking on the Close Gadget at the top of the window has the same
effect as if you clicked on [CANCEL].

If you are editing a message which has attachments and you select the
[ADD ATTACHMENTS] button in the Compose Window and then decide you do not
want to change the attachments you have previously added, you should click
on [APPLY].  Clicking on [CANCEL] at this point will bring up a special
warning requester which says:

             Continuing will delete all previous attachments
                   Use APPLY if you wish to keep them.

             [CONTINUE]                  [APPLY ATTACHMENTS]

To keep the attachments you should click on [APPLY ATTACHMENTS].

                        IX. AEMAIL AREXX INTERFACE

                               Introduction
                               ------------

AEMail has a very powerful set of ARexx commands that can be used to
control AEMail from external ARexx scripts.  You can also execute ARexx
scripts and AmigaDOS scripts from within AEMail.

When you want to send commands from an ARexx script to AEMail, you must
tell ARexx how to locate the AEMail ARexx message port.  The AEMail ARexx
Port Name is normally "AEMAIL1".  You can change this port name with the
use of the "AREXXPORT=" tool type (See TOOL TYPES under Section IV.
CONFIGURATION).  The current Arexx Port Name is shown in the About message
obtained with the "About" item under the Project Menu.

You tell ARexx what the message port name for AEMail is by using the ARexx
ADDRESS commmand in an ARexx script like this:

    ADDRESS AEMAIL1

If you call an ARexx script from AEMail, the ADDRESS command is
automatically set to the AEMail ARexx message port.

There are several ways you can execute an ARexx script in AEMail.  You can
use the ARexx/DOS menu items "Send AREXX/DOS Command...", "Send Last
Command", or, if a menu title has been assigned to the ARexx script, by
the menu item with that title (see VII.  AEMAIL MENUS).  You can also bind
ARexx scripts to a function key.  You can have up to 40 selections since
the Shift, CTRL, and ALT keys can be used in conjunction with the function
keys.  When you press the appropriate function key the ARexx script bonded
to it will be executed.

Two event exits have also been provided which can have ARexx scripts
executed when you double click on a web address or an email address in a
message.

Setting the menu title, the event exits, or the function key assigned to
the command is done with the ARexx Page of the Configuration Setup (See
Section IV.  Configuration).

After each command directed at AEMail from an ARexx script is executed,
the standard ARexx result variable, RC, will report the success or failure
of the command.  A 0 in RC indicates that the command was understood and
executed successfully.  An RC value other than 0 indicates an error
severity indicator.  The exact error text is reported in the Arexx
AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable.

All of the AEMail ARexx commands also report back information if they
were executed successfully (RC = 0).  This information is reported in the
ARexx variable RESULT.  To receive this information you must supply the
following ARexx command at the beginning of the ARexx script:

    OPTIONS RESULTS

You will notice that some commands have possible negative numbers for
RESULT values.  The RESULT variable usually returns either a numeric value
or a string.  If a numeric value is returned and if it is positive and
above zero, the expected result was achieved.  If the value was 0 or
negative, the expected result was not achieved.  Some commands that
normally return strings in the RESULT variable may also return a NULL
string or a negative numeric value.  The negative numeric value is used to
denote various reasons the string value was not returned.  If there is
only one reason, the command will normally return a "0" or a NULL value;
but if there is more than one reason, the additional reasons will be
indicated with a negative number.  An example would be a command that is
expected to return the Subject:  from the current message.  A result of
NULL or blank indicates that there was no Subject:  header and a result of
"-1" indicates that there is no current message.  These two conditions
need to be distinguished.

Below is a both a list of the currently available AEMail ARexx commands
and a section which describes each command in detail.  Many of the
commands are available to registered users only.  These will be so noted
in the command list.

Some of the commands are composed of multiple words.  To avoid confusion
these multiple words are sometimes separated by an underline character
("_").  As an example "ADDRESS_BOOK" separates ADDRESS and BOOK with the
underline.  This is to avoid confusion with "ADDRESS" which is a standard
ARexx command.  If an underline is required, it will be shown in the
command syntax.

QUOTING:  Some command have parameters with embedded ARexx command
characters such as +, -, |, etc.  To avoid the possibilty of ARexx
interpreting these as ARexx operations, the parameter should be surrounded
by quotes (either single or double quotes).  An example of where this is
very important is the first parameter of the OKAY2 command.  Each of the
possible responses in the OKAY2 command is separated by a vertical bar
("|") such as "OK|CANCEL".  The entire response parameter needs to be
surrounded in quotes as shown or otherwise the vertical bar will be
intrepreted by ARexx as an "inclusive or" operation.

Another condition requiring quoting is passing strings with embedded
spaces.  This usually requires a bit of "creative" quoting because ARexx
always strips at least one set of quotation marks from all strings.
Fortunately ARexx considers both the double quote (") and the single quote
(') as quotes.  To provide for the proper treatment of strings with
embedded spaces (such as some file and path names or title strings), you
have to use a double grouping of quotes.

For example:

    GETFILENAME '"The Title String"' '"A file name path"'

will send "The Title String" and "A file name path" to AEMail which will
recognize these strings as two quoted operands.

ARexx variables which might have embedded spaces in their contents must
also be quoted as above.  You can do this as follows:

    filename = "A file name path"
    title = "The Title String"
    GETFILENAME '"'title'"' '"'filename'"'

This ensures that ARexx, when it strips off a set of quotation marks and
replaces the variables with their contents, will also pass a set of
quotation marks around the resulting strings.  AEMail will then recognize
the passed strings as two string operands rather than many unconnected
words.
                        Synopsis of ARexx Commands
                        --------------------------

The following is a list of the currently available AEMail ARexx commands.
This list also indicates which commands are only available to registered
users with an (R) following the command.

A complete description of all of the commands and the command variations
follows this list.

ADDRESS_BOOK (R)    Manipulates the AEMail Address Book
BCC (R)             Returns the BCC header in a message
CC (R)              Returns the CC header in a message
COMPOSE             Composes a message
CURRENT IS SELECTED Makes the selected message current
DATE (R)            Returns the DATE header in a message
EXTRACT (R)         Parses a name string to real name or email address
FIRST (R)           Selects first message in folder or name in name string
FLAGS (R)           Returns the flags in a message
FOLDER (R)          Returns information on folders
FROM (R)            Returns the FROM header in a message
GETCLIP (R)         Get a clip from the clipboard
GETFILENAME         Brings up the AEMail file requester
GETLISTITEM         Brings up the AEMail list view requester
GETNUMBER           Brings up the AEMail numeric requester
GETSIZE (R)         Returns the size of a message or message body
GETSTRING           Brings up the AEMail string requester
GETVAR              Gets a variable from message
LAST (R)            Selects last message in a folder
MESSAGE (R)         Sets various flags in a message
NEXT (R)            Selects next message in folder or name in name string
OKAY1               Brings up AEMail notification requester
OKAY2               Brings up AEMail notification requester with responses
PREVIOUS (R)        Selects the previous message in a folder
QUEUE               Queues a passed message
QUIT                Terminates AEMail
REPLYTO (R)         Returns the REPLY-TO header in a message
SAVE (R)            Saves a message or message text
SCREENTOBACK        Brings a screen to the back of the display
SCREENTOFRONT       Brings a screen to the front of the display
SUBJECT (R)         Returns the SUBJECT header in a message
TO (R)              Returns the TO header in a message


                              ARexx Commands
                              --------------

The following is a description of all of the currently available AEMail
ARexx commands in alphabetical order.  Shown with each of the commands is
what you can expect to have returned in the RESULT variable.  Please note
the use of the OKAY1 and OKAY2 commands.  You can use these to report back
information to the AEMail user.  These commands put up a requester with
the information you provide.

You will also notice in the command descriptions the use of the term
"current message".  This applies to ARexx commands only and is not the
"selected message" that is indicated by an asterick (*) in the displayed
message list; although, you can make the most recent (current) "selected
message" the "current message" (see the CURRENT IS SELECTED command below)
and you can "select" a current message (the MESSAGE SELECT command).
Initially "current message" is un-defined, but once it is defined it will
remain defined through multiple calls from ARexx scripts until AEMail
terminates or the "current message" is changed through the use of another
ARexx command.



                               ADDRESS_BOOK

This command is used to manipulate the AEMail Address Book.  There are a
number of variations of the ADDRESS_BOOK command.  They are listed below.
If the correct command keyword ("LIST", "FIND", "ADD", etc.) is not
present, an RC code of severity level 5 will be returned and
AEMAIL.LASTERROR will contain "101:  Syntax Error".

Note the use of the parameter called "userid".  This can be either an
email address or a referenced nickname pointing to another individual or
group entry.  When a userid is returned, you can test if it is a nickname
by using the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE command.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK LIST ALL [DESCRIPTION] [pad]
        ADDRESS_BOOK LIST GROUP [DESCRIPTION] [pad]
        ADDRESS_BOOK LIST INDIVIDUAL [DESCRIPTION] [pad]

This command will list the nicknames in your address book.  The operand
"ALL" will list all of the nicknames, the operand "GROUP" will list just
the group nicknames, and "INDIVIDUAL" will list just the individual
nicknames.

The optional keyword "DESCRIPTION" can be used to also return the
Description or Real Name field following the nickname.  In this event the
nickname will be padded out with spaces so that so that it will be a fixed
length of 11 characters (always ending with at least one space).  This
means that the description field will always start in a fixed position.

Normally each nickname is separated by a space.  However, this can be
changed by a specifying a pad string at the end of the command.  You can
use the LF keyword to specify a line feed or use some other character
sequence for the pad string.  As an example:  ", " will insert a comma
followed by a space between each nickname in the list.

RESULT: The list of nicknames separated by the pad character.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK FIND nickname [userid]

This command is used to find out if a particular userid (email address or
referenced nickname) is contained in a group entry in the Address Book.
You can explicity give the userid or the email address can be obtained
from the current message.  If the userid is not specified, both the From:
and Reply-To:  addresses from the current message will be used to check if
the email address is in the group entry specified by nickname.  The
nickname operand is required and must be a group nickname.

RESULT: -3          No current message if userid not given
        -2          The nickname is not for a group entry in the Address
                    Book
        -1          The nickname given is not in the Address Book.
        0           The userid was not found
        1           The userid found.  If not supplied, the userid that
                    was found was an email address from the From: address
                    in the current message.
        2           The Reply-To: address in the current message was found
                    in the group.
        3           Both the Reply-To: and From: addresses were found.
                    Note: these addresses may actually be the same.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK CREATE GROUP nickname ["SEND-HEADER-ONLY"|SHO],
            FROM|REPLYTO|userid description

This entry creates a new group entry in the Address Book.  When you create
a group entry you must have one userid (email address or referenced
nickname) entry to place in the group.  You are not allowed to have a
group without any entries.

The nickname for the new group must be supplied and it must not be greater
than 9 characters.  It can not, of course, match any existing nickname.

"SEND-HEADER-ONLY" is an optional keyword operand which sets the "Send
Header Only" flag in the group entry and must be quoted.  You can use the
shorthand abreviation "SHO" instead of the full "SEND-HEADER-ONLY" string.

The userid which is added can be explicity specified or it can be the
email address taken from either the From:  or Reply-To:  address in the
current message.  Use the keyword operands "FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify
which header field in the current message is to be used.  If you specify
"REPLYTO" and that header is missing, an error condition will be returned
(see below).

There is no validation performed on the user_id.  If it is an email
address it should be one word without any intervening spaces.  It should
be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.

The description operand is placed in the "Real Name" field in the Address
Book entry and must be given.  It may have embedded spaces and should be
quoted.  If you want quotes to appear in the group description you should
use the ARexx method for including embedded quotes (i.e.,
'"....string...."' or '"'variable'"'.


RESULT: -4          The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
                    Reply-To: header in the current message.
        -3          No current message if userid not given
        -1          The nickname given is greater than 9 characters.
        0           The nickname given was already defined in the Address
                    Book.
        1           The group entry was successfully created.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK ADD TO GROUP nickname FROM
        ADDRESS_BOOK ADD TO GROUP nickname REPLYTO
        ADDRESS_BOOK ADD TO GROUP nickname userid

This command adds an userid (email address or referenced nickname) to an
existing group in the Address Book.  The nickname operand specifies the
group the userid is to be added to and is a required parameter.

The userid which is added can be explicity specified or it can be the
email address taken from either the From:  or Reply-To:  address in the
current message.  Use the keyword operands "FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify
which header field in the current message is to be used.  If you specify
"REPLYTO" and that header is missing, an error condition will be returned
(see below).

There is no validation performed on the user_id.  If it is an email
address it should be one word without any intervening spaces.  It should
be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.


RESULT: -4          The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
                    Reply-To: header in the current message.
        -3          No current message if userid not specified.
        -2          The nickname is not for a group entry in the Address
                    Book
        -1          The nickname given was not found.
        0           The userid given was already defined in the group.
        1           The userid was successfully added to the group.


***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK ADD INDIVIDUAL nickname FROM [real-name]
        ADDRESS_BOOK ADD INDIVIDUAL nickname REPLYTO [real-name]
        ADDRESS_BOOK ADD INDIVIDUAL nickname userid [real-name]

This command adds a new individual nickname to the Address Book.  The
nickname for the new group must be supplied and it must not be greater
than 9 characters.  It can not, of course, match any existing nickname.

The userid which is assign to the new nickname is required and can be
explicity specified or it can be the email address taken from either the
From:  or Reply-To:  header in the current message.  Use the keyword
operands "FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify which header field in the current
message is to be used.  If you specify "REPLYTO" and that header is
missing, an error condition will be returned (see below).

There is no validation performed on the user_id.  If it is an email
address it should be one word without any intervening spaces.  It should
be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.

The real-name operand is placed in the "Real Name" field in the Address
Book entry.  It is an optional entry.  It may have intervening spaces.  It
should be quoted.  If you want quotes to appear in the group description
you should use the ARexx method for including embedded quotes (i.e.,
'"....string...."' or '"'variable'"'.

If a current message is used to obtain the userid (either the "FROM" or
"REPLYTO" keyword operands) any real name supplied with the header will
take precedence over the real-name operand if it is present.

RESULT: -4          The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
                    Reply-To: header in the current message.
        -3          No current message if userid not specified.
        -1          The nickname given is greater than 9 characters.
        0           The nickname given was already defined.
        1           The nickname and userid was successfully added to the
                    Address Book.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE FROM GROUP nickname FROM
        ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE FROM GROUP nickname REPLYTO
        ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE FROM GROUP nickname userid

This command deletes a userid from the group indicated by nickname.

The userid which is to be deleted is required and can be explicity
specified or it can be the email address taken from either the From:  or
Reply-To:  address in the current message.  Use the keyword operands
"FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify which header field in the current message
is to be used.  If you specify "REPLYTO" and that header is missing, an
error condition will be returned (see below).

There is no validation performed on the user_id.  If it is an email
address it should be one word without any intervening spaces.  It should
be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.

If the userid is the only userid in the group, it will not be deleted.
No group can exist without at lease one userid.  In this special case a
RESULT code of -5 will be returned.  To delete the one remaining userid
you must delete the entire group (see "ADDRESS-BOOK DELETE GROUP" below.

RESULT: -5          The userid specified was the only userid in the
                    group and WAS NOT DELETED.  Use the "ADDRESS_BOOK
                    DELETE GROUP" command to delete entire group.
        -4          The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
                    Reply-To: header in the current message.
        -3          No current message if userid not specified.
        -2          The nickname is not for a group entry in the Address
                    Book
        -1          The nickname given was not found.
        0           The userid was not present in the group.
        1           The userid was deleted from the group.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE GROUP nickname

This command deletes the entire group specified by nickname and all of
it's associated userids.

RESULT: -2          The nickname given is not for a group entry in the
                    Address Book
        -1          The nickname given was not found.

        1           The group was successfully deleted.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE INDIVIDUAL nickname

This command deletes the nickname provided.  It must be the nickname for
an individual.

RESULT: -2          The nickname given is for a group entry in the
                    Address Book.  No deletion was performed.
        0           The individual's nickname was not present.
        1           The individual's nickname was successfully deleted.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE

This command obtains the type, group or individual, for the Address Book
entry specified by "nickname".

RESULT: -1          The nickname given does not exist.
         0          Nickname was for an individual entry.
         1          Nickname was for a group entry.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname REALNAME

This command obtains the "Real Name" or Group Description for the Address
Book entry specified by "nickname".

RESULT: -1              The nickname given does not exist.
         NULL or blank  No real name was present.
         "Real Name" or group description string

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname USERID

This command obtains the userid for the Address Book entry specified by
"nickname".  This command can only be used with Individual nicknames.

RESULT: -2          The nickname given is not for an individual entry.
        -1          The nickname given does not exist.
         "userid"  This may be either an email address or a referenced
                    nickname.  Use the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE
                    command to determine if it is a nickname rather than
                    an email address.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname FIRST USERID

This command obtains the first userid for the Address Book group entry
specified by "nickname".  This command can only be used with Group
nicknames.

This command must be issued before the GET NEXT USERID command described
below is issued.  When this command is issued it resets the group for
which you are attempting to obtain userids.

RESULT: -2          The nickname given is not for a group entry.
        -1          The nickname given does not exist.
         "userid"   This may be either an email address or a referenced
                    nickname.  Use the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE
                    command to determine if it is a nickname rather than
                    an email address.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname NEXT USERID

This command obtains the next userid for the Address Book group entry
specified by "nickname".  This command can only be used with Group
nicknames.

A GET nickname FIRST USERID command must be issued for the same nickname
before the a GET nickname NEXT USERID command is issued.  This command
will continue to get userids for the nickname until a NULL is received
which signifies the end of list of userids for the group.  If you continue
to try to issue NEXT USERID commands after the last userid is obtained you
will get an error result as shown below.

RESULT: -3          A prior FIRST USERID command was not issued for this
                    group nickname.
        -2          The nickname given is not for a group entry.
        -1          The nickname given does not exist OR you have issued
                    the NEXT USERID command after the last one was
                    obtained.
         "userid"   This may be either an email address or a referenced
                    nickname.  Use the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE
                    command to determine if it is a nickname rather than
                    an email address.
         NULL       There are no more userids in the group.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname "SEND-HEADER-ONLY-FLAG"|"SHO-FLAG"

This command obtains the state of the "Send Header Only" flag for the
group entry specified by "nickname".  The operand can be specified as
either "SEND-HEADER-ONLY-FLAG" or "SHO-FLAG" and must be quoted.  This
command can only be used with Group nicknames.

RESULT: -2          The nickname given was not for a group entry.
        -1          The nickname given does not exist.
         0          The "Send Header Only" Flag was OFF.
         1          The "Send Header Only" Flag was ON.

***

Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname COUNT

This command obtains the count of userid entries in the group entry
specified by "nickname".  This command is can only be used with Group
nicknames.

RESULT: -2          The nickname given was not for a group entry.
        -1          The nickname given does not exist.

         n          The count of userids in the group entry.


                                   BCC

Syntax: BCC

This command returns the bcc:  header of the current message without the
bcc:.  It has no operands.

RESULT: -1              No current message
        NULL or blanks  No bcc: header
        bcc: header


                                    CC


Syntax: CC

This command returns the cc:  header of the current message without the
cc:.  It has no operands.

RESULT: -1              No current message
        NULL or blanks  No cc: header
        cc: header


                                 COMPOSE

All of the variations of the COMPOSE command bring up the AEMail compose
window for further action.  If for any reason the Compose window returns
any error such as the failure to open the Compose window or an out of
memory condition, the error will be returned in AEMAIL.LASTERROR with the
RC set to a severity level of 20.  This error will not have an error
number associated with it.

The syntax of the various variations of the COMPOSE command are as
follows:

***

Syntax: COMPOSE

The COMPOSE command without any operands brings up the Compose window to
compose a new message.

RESULT: 0:          User canceled message compose.  No message composed.
        1:          Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
        2:          Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
        3:          Message composed and sent.

***

Syntax: COMPOSE NEW MESSAGE

The Compose window will be brought up to compose a new message.

RESULT: 0:          User canceled message compose.  No message composed.
        1:          Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
        2:          Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
        3:          Message composed and sent.

***

Syntax: COMPOSE REPLY

The Compose window will be brought up to compose a reply to the current
message using the Reply-To: address as the recipient.  If the Reply-To:
address is not available, the From:  address will be used.

RESULT: -1:         There is no current message defined.
         0:         The user cancelled the operation.  No message was
                    composed.
         1:         Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
         2:         Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
         3:         Message composed and sent.
***

Syntax: COMPOSE REPLY FROM

The Compose window will be brought up to compose a reply to the current
message using the From: address as the recipient.

RESULT: -1:         There is no current message defined.
         0:         The user cancelled the operation.  No message was
                    composed.
         1:         Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
         2:         Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
         3:         Message composed and sent.

***

Syntax: COMPOSE FORWARD [userid]

The Compose window will be brought up to forward the current message.  If
the userid (email address or referenced Address Book nickname) is
provided, this will be used as the recipient (To:  address) of the
forwarded message; otherwise, the To:  address will be blank and user will
have to provide it.

RESULT: -1:         There is no current message defined.
         0:         The user cancelled the operation.  No message was
                    composed.
         1:         Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
         2:         Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
         3:         Message composed and sent.
***

Syntax: COMPOSE MAILTO userid

The Compose window will be brought up to compose a new message to be
mailed to the recipient indicated by the userid.  The userid can be either
an Address Book nickname or a full email-address and must be given.

No validation is made on the userid.  If it is invalid, either the user
will receive an error when the message is sent or a message will be
received indicating "Returned mail:  User unknown".

RESULT: 0:          The user cancelled the operation.  No message was
                    composed.
        1:          Message composed and placed in the PENDING folder.
        2:          Message composed and placed in the QUEUED folder.
        3:          Message composed and sent.

***

Syntax: COMPOSE "message-file-name"

The Compose window will be brought up and the message file indicated by
"message-file-name" will be read into the system and used as the message
to edit.  This message must have correctly formatted headers.  Only the
To:, From:, Reply-To:, Subject:, cc:, and bcc: headers will be recognized.
A blank line must separate the headers from the body of the message.

The "message-file-name" should be the full path name of the message file
and it should be quoted since the path will contain characters that ARexx
will attempt to interpret as operators or possibly embedded spaces.

Any address provided with the To: header can be either an Address Book
nickname or a full email address.  Multiple To: addresses can be provided
as well as multiple cc: or bcc: addresses.

No headers have to be provided with the message.  The headers can be
provided on the Compose window.  However, if this is done, a blank line
MUST precede the message body in the message file.

Additional RC type errors can be received by this command if the
message-file-name is invalid or an error occurred reading in the message
file.  Each of these errors have a severity level of 5 with one of the
following messages placed in the AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable:

    105: Error Opening Passed Message
    106: Error retrieving passed message

If you would like to use the File Requester to obtain the file name before
passing it to this command, you can use the GETFILENAME command to obtain
the full path name of the message.

No validation is made on the To:  address in the message.  If it is
invalid, either the user will receive an error when the message is sent or
a message will be received indicating "Returned mail:  User unknown".

RESULT: 0:          The user cancelled the operation.  No message was
                    composed.
        1:          Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
        2:          Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
        3:          Message composed and sent.



                           CURRENT IS SELECTED

Syntax: CURRENT IS SELECTED

This command makes the currently selected message the current message.
The currently selected message is the message that is highlighted in the
message list or the message that is currently being displayed.  The
message may or may not have a selection asterick.

RESULT: 0           There was no selected message.
        1           Current message is now the selected message.



                                   DATE

Syntax: DATE
        DATE MDY
        DATE DMY
        DATE YMD

This command returns the Date:  header of the current message header
without the "Date:".

Without an operand, this command returns the date as it was received in
the Date:  header of the message.  With the operand "MDY" it returns the
date as mm/dd/yy.  The operand "DMY" returns the date as dd/mm/yy and
"YMD" returns yy/mm/dd.  All of the fields are two digits which means that
yy will be the last 2 digits of the year.

The alternate formats are provided so that the date field can be stored in
a data base such as one created with "Final Data".

RESULT: -1              No current message
        NULL or blanks  No Date: header
        Date: field

                                 EXTRACT

Syntax: EXTRACT REALNAME name-string
        EXTRACT USERID name-string

This command extracts either the REALNAME or the USERID (email address
or address book nickname) from a name string that is usually the result of
the FIRST TONAME, FIRST CCNAME, FIRST BCCNAME or NEXT NAME commands
(see below).  Because of the various formats of a name string; ie,

        email-address (Full Name)
        Full Name <email-address>
        email-address
        addressbook-nickname

it is easier to use this command rather then to use standard ARexx
commands to parse the name string.

If you use the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE command you can determine if
a userid that is returned is a nickname or email address.

The name-string variable should be quoted since it will contain blanks and
other characters ARexx may not like including double quote marks.  As an
example:

    OPTION RESULTS
    FIRST TONAME
    name=RESULT
    if name = "" THEN EXIT
    EXTRACT USERID '"'name'"'
    emailaddr=RESULT
    ADDRESS_BOOK GET '"'emailaddr'"' TYPE
    if RESULT = 0 THEN OKAY1 emailaddr" is an individual nickname."
    ELSE if RESULT = 1 THEN OKAY1 emailaddr" is a group nickname."

RESULT: NULL or blank   No real name if REAL-NAME operand used.
        Either the real name or userid string.
                                  FIRST

This command is used to select the first message in the current folder or
to select the first name string from the list of To:  or cc:  recipients.

***

Syntax: FIRST
        FIRST NEW
        FIRST SELECTED
        FIRST DELETED

Without an Operand this command selects the first message in the current
selected folder as the current message.

With the NEW operand, this command selects the first un-read (new) message
in the current selected folder as the current message.

If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
message.

With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the first selected
(message marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder
as the current message.

With the DELETED operand, this command selects the first message marked as
deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.

NOTE: The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
This generally means that the first message is the oldest message in the
folder.

RESULT: 0       No messages of the particular type in the folder
        1       First message is now the current message.

***

Syntax: FIRST TONAME
        FIRST CCNAME
        FIRST BCCNAME

This command returns the first name from the appropriate header field
(To:, cc:, or bcc:) in the current message.  The name can be in one of the
following formats:

        email-address (Full Name)
        Full Name <email-address>
        email-address
        addressbook-nickname

Names in the header recipient lists are separated by commas; however, a
comma may be embedded within a real name if the real name is surrounded by
quotes.

If you wish to extract either the Full Name, email-address, or the
addressbook-nickname from the RESULT you can set the RESULT to a variable
and then use the EXTRACT command with that variable as the argument.

RESULT: -1              There is no current message
         NULL or blank  There are no names in this field.
         The first name in the appropriate header.


                                  FLAGS

Syntax: FLAGS

This command returns the flags for the current message.  The flags are
returned in the RESULT field as indicated below.  A message can have
multiple flags which means that a value will be returned with the two or
more values for the flags added together.  As an example, a message that
is unread and new with attachments will return a value of 11.  You will
need to use the ARexx operator for logical AND to isolate the flag you
want.

Here is a piece of ARexx code to isolate a message that is unread:

    OPTION RESULTS

    FLAGS

    IF RESULT = -1 THEN OKAY1 "There is no current message"
    ELSE DO

        IF RESULT & 2 THEN OKAY1 "This message is unread"
        ELSE OKAY1 "This message has been read"

        END

Note the distinction between flag values 1 (for New) and 2 (for Unread).
Generally, when a message is first read into the system both flags are
set.  If the message is read, both flags are turned off.  However, if the
message should be deleted without being read, the Unread flag will be
turned off but the New flag will remain on.  If that message then becomes
un-deleted and the New flag is still on, the Unread flag will be turned
back on.

RESULT: -1          No current message
        0           There is a current message but no flags are set
        1           Message is New and unread (can be deleted)
        2           Message is unread but not deleted
        4           Message is a reply
        8           Message has attachments
        16          Message has been forwarded
        32          Message is deleted
        64          Message is selected


                                  FOLDER

There are a number of variations of the FOLDER command.  They are listed
below:

***

Syntax: FOLDER

The FOLDER command with no operands is used to return the current selected
folder name.

RESULT: 0           No folder currently selected
        The folder Name (i.e., "INBOX", "QUEUED", etc.)

***

Syntax: FOLDER LIST_FOLDERS [pad]

This command will list all of the folders in your system.  Normally each
folder is separated by a space.  However, this can be changed by
specifying a pad string at the end of the command.  You can use the LF
keyword to specify a line feed or use some other character sequence for
the pad string.  As an example:  ", " will insert a comma followed by a
space between each folder name in the list.

Notice that the keyword here is LIST_FOLDERS with an underline between
LIST and FOLDERS.  If the keyword was simply LIST it might be
mis-interpreted as a folder named LIST.

RESULT: The list of folders separated by the pad character.

***

Syntax: FOLDER folder-name

This command selects the the folder indicated by folder-name.

RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid.  Could be the result of a misspelling
            of one of the operands used with the FOLDER commands so that
            the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
         0: The folder folder-name could not be selected.
         1: The folder folder-name was selected.

***

Syntax: FOLDER DESCRIPTION
        FOLDER folder-name DESCRIPTION
        FOLDER folder-name SELECT DESCRIPTION

This command returns the description of either the selected folder or, if
present, the folder indicated by folder name.  If the folder name is
present, it will not become the new selected unless the SELECT keyword
immediately follows it.  This allows you to obtain the description of a
folder without selecting it.

NOTE:  If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid.  Could be the result of a misspelling
            of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
            so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

         The description of either the folder specified with folder-name
            or the selected folder.

***

Syntax: FOLDER NUMBER_MESSAGES
        FOLDER folder-name NUMBER_MESSAGES
        FOLDER folder-name SELECT NUMBER_MESSAGES

This command returns the number of messages contained in either the
selected folder or, if present, the folder indicated by folder name.  If
the folder name is present, it will not become the new selected folder
unless the SELECT keyword immediately follows it.  This allows you to
obtain the number of messages from a folder without selecting it.

Please note the spelling of the operand NUMBER_MESSAGES with the underline
between NUMBER and MESSAGES.  This makes the operand string longer than a
folder-name so that it does not interfer with any existing folder-name.

NOTE:  If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid.  Could be the result of a misspelling
            of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
            so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

         n: The total number of messages in the folder including ones that
            are unread or deleted.

***

Syntax: FOLDER NEW_MESSAGES
        FOLDER folder-name NEW_MESSAGES
        FOLDER folder-name SELECT NEW_MESSAGES

This command returns the number of new (unread) messages contained in
either the selected folder or, if present, the folder indicated by folder
name.  If the folder name is present, it will not become the new selected
folder unless the SELECT keyword immediately follows it.  This allows you
to obtain the number of new messages from a folder without selecting it.

If a message is unread but deleted, it will not be included in the count
of new messages.

Please note the spelling of the operand NEW_MESSAGES with the underline
between NEW and MESSAGES.  This makes the operand string longer than a
folder-name so that it does not interfer with any existing folder-name.

NOTE:  If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid.  Could be the result of a misspelling
            of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
            so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

         n: The number of new or unread messages in the folder.

***

Syntax: FOLDER DELETED_MESSAGES
        FOLDER folder-name DELETED_MESSAGES
        FOLDER folder-name SELECT DELETED_MESSAGES

This command returns the number of deleted messages contained in either
the selected folder or, if present, the folder indicated by folder name.
If the folder name is present, it will not become the new selected folder
unless the SELECT keyword immediately follows it.  This allows you to
obtain the number of deleted messages from a folder without selecting it.

Please note the spelling of the operand DELETED_MESSAGES with the
underline between DELETED and MESSAGES.  This makes the operand string
longer than a folder-name so that it does not interfer with any existing
folder-name.

NOTE:  If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid.  Could be the result of a misspelling
            of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
            so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.

         n: The number of deleted messages in the folder.

***

                                   FROM

Syntax: FROM

This command returns the From:  header of the current message without the
"From:  ".  It has no operands.

RESULT: -1              No current message
        NULL or blanks  No From: header
        From: header

                                 GETCLIP

Syntax: GETCLIP
        GETCLIP n
        GETCLIP UNIT n

This command will return the current contents of the clipboard in the
result variable.  If "UNIT n" or "n" is not specified, it will be from the
current active clipboard.  If "UNIT n" or "n" (without UNIT) is specified
it will be from the clipboard unit specified by n.

If the clipboard unit is specified, the current active clipboard will be
changed to that unit UNLESS the clipboard unit was non-existant.

RESULT: NULL or blank   This clipboard unit is empty or non-existant.
        Data from the clipboard unit.

***

Syntax: GETCLIP UNIT

This command will return the current active clipboard unit number.  Notice
that is similar to the previous command WITHOUT the clipboard unit number
(n).

RESULT: n       This current active clipboard unit number.


                               GETFILENAME

Syntax: GETFILENAME
        GETFILENAME title
        GETFILENAME title defaultpath

This command brings up the AEMail file requester so you can solicit file
names that can be used with commands that require file names.

If no operands are provided with this command, the file requester will
have "ARexx File Request" as the default title in the requester and a
default path of PROGDIR: (the directory from which AEMail was called).

The second form of this command allows you to provide your own title in
the file requester which may be more descriptive of what kind of file you
want.

The third form gives the user the ability to provide both a title and a
default file path and (if wanted) filename.  This is particularly useful
if you want to reference a different directory than your program
directory.  A default filename can be part of this path.

NOTE: If you supply a default path without a filename (directory only) you
must end the string with ":" or "/" to indicate that it is a directory and
not a filename path.

Be very careful in using this command since this is one that will require
"creative" quoting to insure that you have no more than two operand
strings.  As an example you should use something like this:

    GETFILENAME '"The Title String"' '"A file name path"'

This will send "The Title String" and "A file name path" to AEMail which
will recognize these strings as two quoted operands.

RESULT:  NULL or blank if the no filename was entered or the requester was
            cancelled.
         The full path and filename of the file that was selected.

                               GETLISTITEM

Syntax: GETLISTITEM list
        GETLISTITEM list title

This command brings up the AEMail list view requester so the user can
solicit a member of the list.  The operand list is a list of items, each
member of the list being separated by a line feed.  Many of the AEMail
commands can supply such a list.  As an example, "ADDRESS_BOOK LIST GROUP
DESCRIPTION LF" will supply a list of group Address Book entries and their
descriptions separated by line feeds.  Another example is "LIST_FOLDERS LF"
which will provide a list of all the folders in the system.

The list should be a quoted variable such as:

    ADDRESS_BOOK LIST GROUP DESCRIPTION LF
    grplist = RESULT
    GETLISTITEM "'"grplist"'"

This will insure that the entire list is treated as a single variable.

The second operand is the title that you want for the list view.  If this
operand is not provided, the list view requester will have "ARexx Select
List Item" as the default title.  The title should also be quoted.

When the list view is displayed and an item selected from the list it will
appear in a string gadget below the listview.  You can modify the
information in this string gadget if you wish.  An [OK] and [CANCEL]
gadget will also be displayed.  If you click on [OK] or press RETURN, the
information in the string gadget will be returned in the RESULT variable.

RESULT:  NULL or blank if the string gadget is blank or the requester was
            cancelled.
         The string that was entered in the string gadget at the bottom of
            the listview.
                                GETNUMBER

Syntax: GETNUMBER
        GETNUMBER title
        GETNUMBER title default
        GETNUMBER title default min
        GETNUMBER title default min max

This command brings up the AEMail numeric requester so you can solicit a
numeric value.

If no operands are provided with this command, the numeric requester will
have "ARexx Enter Number" as the default title in the requester and a
default value of 0.

The second form of this command allows you to provide your own title in
the numeric requester which may be more descriptive of what purpose you
want the number for.

The third form gives the user the ability to provide both a title and a
default numeric value.

The fourth form gives you the ability to provide a minimum value that can
be entered, and the fifth for allows both a minimum or maximum value.   f
a value outside this range is entered, the screen will flash.  Also, the
minimum and maximum limits are given in a text string below the numeric
entry gadget.

Be very careful in using this command since this is one that will require
"creative" quoting for the title to insure that strings between embedded
spaces are not interpreted as part of the numeric values.  As an example
you should use something like this:

    GETNUMBER '"Enter a number between 3 & 7"' 5 3 7

This will place "Enter a number between 3 & 7" in the title bar of the
requester, use 5 as the default value in the numeric entry gadget, and set
the minimum and maximum possibilities to 3 and 7 respectively.  This will
also recognize the full title string as a proper quoted operand.

The numeric entry gadget is followed by a [+] (increment) and a [-]
(decrement) gadget.  Clicking on one or the other of these gadgets will
increment or decrement the value in the numeric entry gadget.  This value
can not decrement below the minimum value or 0 (if no minimum is given) or
increment above the maximum value.

The numeric entry gadget is in "replace" mode so that entering a number
will replace what was previously there.  Hitting [OK] or pressing the
RETURN key will terminate the requester with the numeric value entered
returned in the RESULT variable.

RESULT:  NULL or blank if the the requester was cancelled.
          n     The numeric value entered in the requester.

                                 GETSIZE

Syntax: GETSIZE MESSAGE
        GETSIZE TEXT

This command will get the size of the Current Message.  If the operand
"MESSAGE" is given, it will be the size of the complete message.  If the
operand "TEXT" is given, it will be only the size of the text portion of
the message (Message size less the header size and any attachment size).

RESULT: 0       No Current Message
        The size of the Current Message or just the text size.

                                GETSTRING

Syntax: GETSTRING
        GETSTRING title
        GETSTRING title defaultstring

This command brings up the AEMail string requester so you can solicit a
string from the user.

If no operands are provided with this command, the string requester will
have "ARexx Enter String" as the default title in the requester with no
default string.

The second form of this command allows you to provide your own title in
the string requester which may be more descriptive of what purpose you
want the string for.

The third form gives the user the ability to provide both a title and a
default string that will appear in the requester when it is first brought
up.

Be very careful in using this command since this is one that will require
"creative" quoting to insure that you have no more than two operand
strings.  As an example you should use something like this:

    GETSTRING '"Enter a Folder Name"' '"INBOX"'

This will send "Enter a Folder Name" and "INBOX" to AEMail which will
recognize these strings as two separate quoted operands.  Since INBOX is
one word, it does not have to have the special quoting on it but can be
simply 'INBOX'.

RESULT:   NULL or blank if the no string was entered or the requester was
            cancelled.
          The string that was entered in the requester.

                                  GETVAR

Syntax: GETVAR

When you are displaying a message and you double click on a message line,
the Clipboard Window appears.  If you hit one of the function keys to call
an ARexx script, the line currently being displayed in the clipboard
string will be transferred to a special variable.

In your ARexx script you can use GETVAR to extract that string.  If the
string was an email or web address, your script can use the variable thus
obtained to send a message to the email address or to call your web
browser to go to the web address.

RESULT: The string that was in the clipboard line.
                                   LAST

Syntax: LAST
        LAST NEW
        LAST SELECTED
        LAST DELETED

Without an Operand this command selects the last message in the current
selected folder as the current message.

With the NEW operand, this command selects the last un-read (new) message
in the current selected folder as the current message.

If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
message.

With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the last selected
(message marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder
as the current message.

With the DELETED operand, this command selects the last message marked as
deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.

NOTE: The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
This generally means that the last message is the newest message in the
folder.

RESULT: 0       No messages of the particular type in the folder
        1       Last message is now the current message.


                                 MESSAGE

This command is used to set various flags on the Current Message.  After
the execution of this command, the message list, if it is currently being
displayed, will be re-displayed with the changed status.  The forms of
this command are as follows:

Syntax: MESSAGE SELECT

This command marks the Current Message as selected.

RESULT: -1  There is no Current Message.
         0  The Current Message is already marked as selected.
         1  The Current Message is now marked as selected.

***

Syntax: MESSAGE UNSELECT

This command marks the Current Message as un-selected.

RESULT: -1  There is no Current Message.
         0  The Current Message is not marked as selected.
         1  The Current Message is now marked as un-selected.

***

Syntax: MESSAGE DELETE

This command marks the Current Message as deleted.

RESULT: -1  There is no Current Message.
         0  The Current Message is already marked as deleted.
         1  The Current Message is now marked as deleted.

***

Syntax: MESSAGE UNDELETE

This command marks the Current Message as not deleted.

RESULT: -1  There is no Current Message.
         0  The Current Message is not currently marked as deleted.
         1  The Current Message is now no longer marked as deleted.

***

Syntax: MESSAGE READ

This command marks the Current Message as being read.

RESULT: -1  There is no Current Message.
         0  The Current Message is already marked as being read.
         1  The Current Message is now marked as being read.

***

Syntax: MESSAGE MAKE NEW

This command marks the Current Message as unread or new.

NOTE: If the message was marked as deleted, only the "new" flag is set;
otherwise, both the "new" and "unread" flags are set.

RESULT: -1  There is no Current Message.
         0  The Current Message is already marked as unread (new).
         1  The Current Message is now marked as unread.

***

Syntax: MESSAGE SELECT ALL

All messages in the current selected folder are marked as selected.  This
command does not change the Current Message status.

RESULT:  0  There are no messages in the selected folder.
         1  All of the messages in the selected folder are marked as
            selected.

***

Syntax: MESSAGE SELECT NONE
        MESSAGE UNSELECT ALL

This command can be expressed in either form above.

All messages in the current selected folder are marked as un-selected.
This command does not change the Current Message status.

RESULT:  0  There are no messages in the selected folder.
         1  All of the messages in the selected folder are now marked as
            un-selected.

                                   NEXT

This command is used to select the next message in the current folder or
to select the next name string from the list of To:  or cc:  recipients.

***

Syntax: NEXT
        NEXT NEW
        NEXT SELECTED
        NEXT DELETED

Without an operand this command selects the next message, regardless of
it's status, in the current selected folder as the current message.

With the NEW operand, this command selects the next un-read (new) message
in the current selected folder as the current message.

If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
message.

With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the next selected (message
marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder as the
current message.

With the DELETED operand, this command selects the next message marked as
deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.

NOTE:  The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
This generally means that the order of the messages in the folder is that
older messages are before newer messages.

RESULT: 0       No more messages of the particular type are in the folder.
                At the end of the message list.
        1       The next message is now the current message.

***

Syntax: NEXT NAME

This command returns the next name from the header field that was
referenced by the last FIRST command.  A FIRST TONAME, FIRST CCNAME, or
FIRST BCCNAME command must have been issued prior to issuing the first
NEXT NAME command.  Each NEXT NAME command that is issued retrieves the
next name in that header field.  Once the end of the name list is reached,
another FIRST command must be issued before another NEXT NAME command is
issued.  The name can be in one of the following formats:

        email-address (Full Name)
        Full Name <email-address>
        email-address
        addressbook-nickname

Names in the header recipient lists are separated by commas; however, a
comma may be embedded within a real name if the real name is surrounded by
quotes.

If you wish to extract either the Full Name, email-address, or the
addressbook-nickname from the RESULT you can set the RESULT to a variable
and then use the EXTRACT command with that variable as the arguement.

RESULT: -2              The name string has not been started with the
                        FIRST command.
         NULL or blank  You are at the end of the list.  There are no
                        more names in the current header field.
         The next name in the appropriate header.

                                  OKAY1

Syntax: OKAY1 text

This commands presents the AEMail notification requester containing the
supplied text.  If there are any ARexx specific command operators within
the text stream, the stream should be surrounded in quotes.

The notification requester has one button marked "Continue".  Clicking on
this button will terminate the requester and the OKAY1 command.

Warning: Be careful of the size of the text string that you pass to this
command.  If the string is too long without intervening line feeds, the
"Continue" button could be positioned off the screen and you will have no
way to terminate the requester.  This can be particularly true of returned
strings that are being displayed.  It is best to use the ARexx LEFT()
function to insure you have a short enough string.

RESULT: 1           Always returned


                                  OKAY2

Syntax: OKAY1 responses text

This commands presents the AEMail notification requester containing the
supplied text.  If there are any ARexx specific command operators within
the text stream, the stream should be surrounded in quotes.

"responses" provides a list of possible responses to the requester.  Any
number of responses can be provided.  Each response must be separated by
the vertical bar ("|").  The entire response string must be surrounded by
quote marks.

The notification requester has as many buttons as they are responses.  The
wording in these buttons is controlled by the response string.  Clicking
on any of these buttons will terminate the requester and the OKAY2
command.

RESULT: 0           The last response in the response string was selected.
        1           The first response was selected.
        n           The second through nth (last - 1) response was selected.


                                 PREVIOUS
Syntax: PREVIOUS
        PREVIOUS NEW
        PREVIOUS SELECTED
        PREVIOUS DELETED

Without an operand this command selects the previous message, regardless
of it's status, in the current selected folder as the current message.

With the NEW operand, this command selects the previous un-read (new)
message in the current selected folder as the current message.

If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
message.

With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the previous selected
(message marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder
as the current message.

With the DELETED operand, this command selects the previous message marked
as deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.

NOTE:  The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
This generally means that the order of the messages in the folder is that
older messages are before newer messages.

RESULT: 0       No more messages of the particular type are in the folder.
                At the beginning of the message list.
        1       The next previous is now the current message.



                                  QUEUE

Syntax: QUEUE "message-file-name" [MAILTO userid]

The message file indicated by "message-file-name" will be read into the
system and will be placed in the QUEUED folder.  This message must have
correctly formatted headers.  A blank line must separate the headers from
the body of the message.

The "message-file-name" should be the full path name of the message file
and it should be quoted since the path will contain characters that ARexx
will attempt to interpret as operators.  It may also contain embedded
spaces.  If it does contain embedded spaces, double quote pairs must be
used, ie. '"filename string"' or '"'variable'"'.

Any address provided with the To: header can be either an Address Book
nickname or a full email address.  Multiple To: addresses can be provided
as well as multiple cc: or bcc: addresses.

Instead of a To: address provided in the message the optional MAILTO
keyword can be used to provide a userid which can be an Address Book
nickname or an email address.  The MAILTO address will be added to any
addresses provide with a To: header.

If the From: or Reply-To: addresses are not given, these addresses will be
taken from the default From: and Reply-To addresses.

Any Date: header is ignored since the Date: header will be constructed
when the message is sent.

Any other non-standard headers can be supplied in the message file and
they will be included with the message.

Only the To:  header has to be provided unless the MAILTO parameter is
given.  If the MAILTO parameter is used, no headers have to be provided
with the message.  However, if this is done, a blank line MUST be the
first line in the message file.

Additional RC type errors can be received by this command if the
message-file-name is invalid or an error occurred reading in the message
file.  Each of these errors have a severity level of 5 with one of the
following messages placed in the AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable:

    105: Error Opening Passed Message
    106: Error retrieving passed message

No validation is made on the To:  address in the message.  If it is
invalid, either the user will receive an error when the message is sent or
a message will be received indicating "Returned mail:  User unknown".

RESULT: 1:          Message was placed in the QUEUED folder.



                                   QUIT
Syntax: QUIT

This command will terminate AEMail.  It operates silently so no messages
will appear.

After issuing this command, you can not issue any more commands to AEMail
since AEMail and the AEMail ARexx Port will no longer be there to receive
amy commands.

RESULT: None

                                 REPLYTO

Syntax: REPLYTO

This command returns the Reply-To:  header of the current message without
the "Reply-To:  ".  It has no operands.

RESULT: -1              No current message
        NULL or blanks  No Reply-To: header
        Reply-To: header
                                   SAVE

This command can save the current message or selected messages or the text
portion of a message to a file.  The current message or current message
text can also be directly returned in the RESULT variable.  The Current
Message text can also be saved to the clipboard.

The various forms of this command are given below:

Syntax: SAVE MESSAGE

This command will return the Current Message in the RESULT variable. This
will be the complete message including all headers, message body, and all
attachments.

WARNING: This will return only the first 4092 characters of the current
message.  Line Feed characters will be included at the end of each line in
the message.

You can use the GETSIZE MESSAGE command to obtain the size of the message
to see if it will fit.

RESULT: NULL or blank       There is no Current Message
        The message (up to 4092 characters)

***

Syntax: SAVE MESSAGE [TO] filename

This command will save the Current Message to the file whose complete path
and file name is filename.  This should be a quoted variable.  You can
solicit a filename by using the GETFILENAME command before issuing this
command.

The keyword TO is optional.

The message saved is the complete message including all headers, message
body, and all attachments.  Except for available disk space, there is no
limit on the size of the message.  Line Feed characters will be included
at the end of each line in the message.

RESULT:  0      There is no current message
         1      The current message has been saved.

***

Syntax: SAVE SELECTED MESSAGES [TO] filename

This command will save all of the selected messages in the current
selected folder to the file whose complete path and file name is filename.
This should be a quoted variable.  You can solicit a filename by using the
GETFILENAME command before issuing this command.

All of the messages will be saved in the single file specified as a block
of messages.

The keyword TO is optional.

The messages saved include the complete message including all headers,
message body, and all attachments.  Except for available disk space, there
is no limit on the size of the message.  Line Feed characters will be
included at the end of each line in the message.

RESULT:  0      There is no messages selected
         1      The current message has been saved.

***

Syntax: SAVE TEXT
        SAVE TEXT NOLF

This command will return the text body of the Current Message in the
RESULT variable.  This will be only the body text without headers or
attachments.

Normally the text is returned with a line feed separating each line.  If
you use the "NOLF" operand, this line feed will be left off.  This means
that the body lines will be one continuous string of data.  This can be
very helpful if you have a short message generated by a forms command sent
by email in a web page.

WARNING:  This will return only the first 4092 characters of the current
message body text.  Line Feed characters will be included at the end of
each line in the message unless NOLF is specified.

You can use the GETSIZE TEXT command to obtain the size of the message
body to see if it will fit.

RESULT: NULL or blank       There is no Current Message
        The message text (up to 4092 characters)

***

Syntax: SAVE TEXT [TO] filename

This command will save the text body of the Current Message to the file
whose complete path and file name is filename.  This should be a quoted
variable.  You can solicit a filename by using the GETFILENAME command
before issuing this command.

The keyword TO is optional.

The text saved is only the body text without headers or attachments.
Except for available disk space, there is no limit on the size of the
message text.  Line Feed characters will be included at the end of each
line in the message.

RESULT:  0      There is no current message
         1      The current message text has been saved.

***

Syntax: SAVE TEXT [TO] CLIPBOARD
        SAVE TEXT [TO] CLIPBOARD n

The first form of this command will save the text body of the Current
Message to the clipboard unit that is currently active.  The second form
will allow you to save the text to the clipboard unit specified by n.

You can determine which clipboard is currently active by using the GETCLIP
UNIT command.

If you use the "n" parameter, the currently active clipboard unit will be
changed to n after the command is successfully executed (RESULT of 1).
The keyword TO is optional.

The text saved is only the body text without headers or attachments.
Except for available RAM space, there is no limit on the size of the
message text.  Line Feed characters will be included at the end of each
line in the message.

RESULT:  0      There is no current message
         1      The current message text has been saved to the clipboard.

***

Syntax: SAVE "string of text" [TO] CLIPBOARD
        SAVE "string of text" [TO] CLIPBOARD n

The first form of this command will save the string of text passed as a
quoted string to the clipboard unit that is currently active.  The second
form will allow you to save the string to the clipboard unit specified by
n.

You can determine which clipboard is currently active by using the GETCLIP
UNIT command.

If you use the "n" parameter, the currently active clipboard unit will be
changed to n after the command is successfully executed (RESULT of 1).
The keyword TO is optional.

The keyword TO is optional.

The string saved must be quoted to allow for embedded spaces and special
characters.  As an example:

    SAVE '"This is a string of characters"' TO CLIPBOARD 3

will save the string "This is a string of characters" to clipboard number
3.

The string is limited to 119 characters. If a larger string is given it
will be truncated at 119 characters.

RESULT:  1      The string has been saved to the clipboard.

                               SCREENTOBACK

Syntax: SCREENTOBACK AEMAIL
        SCREENTOBACK WORKBENCH
        SCREENTOBACK public-screen-name

This command brings either the AEMail screen, the Workbench screen or
the named public-screen-name to the back of the display.

RESULT: 0   The public-screen-name is invalid or no longer open
        1   The specified screen has been moved to the back.


                              SCREENTOFRONT

Syntax: SCREENTOFRONT AEMAIL
        SCREENTOFRONT WORKBENCH
        SCREENTOFRONT public-screen-name

This command brings either the AEMail screen, the Workbench screen or
the named public-screen-name to the front of the display.

RESULT: 0   The public-screen-name is invalid or no longer open
        1   The specified screen is now the front most screen.


                                 SUBJECT

Syntax: SUBJECT

This command returns the Subject:  header of the current message without
"Subject: ".  It has no operands.

Also, the RE: and (fwd), if present, is stripped from the header string.
You can use the FLAGS command to determine if the current message is a
reply or forwarded message.

RESULT: -1              No current message
        NULL or blanks  No Subject: header
        Subject: header


                                    TO

Syntax: TO

This command returns the To:  header of the current message without the
"To: ".  It has no operands.

RESULT: -1              No current message
        NULL or blanks  No To: header
        To: header

                              Error Messages
                              --------------

When a command returns an RC value other than 0 the RC code represents a
severity code.  Severity codes are usually 5 or 20.  A string error
message will also appear in the AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable.  These errors
can be interrogated and displayed.

The errors that you can expect from AEMail are as follows:

        "100: Unknown command"
        "101: Syntax Error"
        "102: No Operand Required"
        "103: Missing Operand"
        "104: Too Many Operands"
        "105: Error Opening Passed Message"
        "106: Error retrieving passed message"
        "110: Out of Memory"

Additional errors which will not have a error message number associated
with them are:

        "Unable to open input mail file"
        "Error reading input mail file"
        "Unable to open output file"
        "Error writing to output file"

                             X. AEMAIL FILES

The following are the various files used by AEMail.  Normally, they all
reside in the user's mail directory with the exception of the
configuration file and the TCPLOG file.  The configuration file for the
primary user of AEMail normally is called aemail.cnfg and resides in the
S:  directory although it can be named differently or reside anywhere.
Other user's configuration files must be called something different and
may also reside anywhere.  TCPLOG file may reside in any directory
depending on the user's preference.

The mail directory is the directory given in the MAIL_DIR= Tool Type and
you can change the name and location of the aemail.cnfg file with the
CONFIG= Tool Type.

With the exception of the mailcap file, you can begin AEMail without any
of the other files being present.  They will be automatically created as
you process messages or do other AEMail actions.

The mailcap file, if used can be setup prior to executing AEMail or it can
be created or modified using the Viewer Page of the Configuration Setup.
If the mailcap file is setup outside the AEMail environment it can be done
using any text editor.

The following are the AEMail files:

                                 mailcap
                                 -------

The mailcap file is used to establish programs that should be executed to
display MIME attachments.  Use of this file allows AEMail to use any
AmigaDOS operating system 2.1 or above.

The mailcap file is a standard Internet file which is specified in RFC
(Request For Comment) 1524.  Since it is standard, you can use a mailcap
file that was created for another program that specified a display program
for the same media type.  If you use a mailcap file created outside the
AEMail environment it can be copied to the mail directory when AEMail is
installed if you use the expert level of the Install.

AEMail only uses the two required fields of the RFC 1524 standard.  Other
fields are ignored at this time.

Each mailcap file consists of entries that describe the proper handling of
one media type at the local site.  A mailcap file consists of a sequence
of such individual entries separated by LINE FEEDS.  Blank lines and lines
starting with '#' are considered comments and are ignored.  Long entries
may be continued on multiple lines if the line to be continued ends with a
backslash character ('\').  In this event, mutiple lines are to treated as
a single mailcap entry.  Note that for such "continued" lines, the
backslash must be the last character of the line to be continued.

Each mailcap entry consists of a number of fields each separated by a
semicolon (';').  The first two fields are required, and must occur in the
specified order.  The remaining fields are optional and may appear in any
order.  NOTE:  At this time AEMail does not use these optional fields and
if they are present, ignores them.  Because of this, these optional fields
WILL NOT be discussed in this documentation.

The general format of a mailcap entry is:

    content type; view command [; ......] LINE FEED

The first field is the content type, which indicates the type of data this
mailcap entry describes how to handle.  It is to be matched against the
type/subtype specification in the "Content-Type" MIME header (see the ADD
ATTACHMENTS REQUESTER described in section VIII.  AEMAIL WINDOWS above).

If the subtype is "*", it is intended to match all subtypes of the named
content type.

Examples of the content type field are:

    images/gif

which is intended to match only the images/gif type/subtype whereas

    images/*

matches all image types (images/gif, images/jpeg, etc).

The second field, view command, is a specification of how the attachment
meeting the content type specification is viewed.  For any particular
operating system, this would indicate how the program is called.  For
AEMail this would include the entire path name for calling the program and
any parameters that are needed on the command line.  A "%s" is used to
indicate the substitution of the attachment name.  The entire entry should
be surrounded by quotes.  As an example:

    "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"

would call multiview placing the displayed attachment on its own screen
(the "screen" parameter).

If you needed to have the display on the Workbench screen you can add the
keyword "wb;" in front of the program path.  As an example, if you wanted
multiview to open on a window on the Workbench screen, you could use:

    "wb;sys:Utilities/multiview %s"

Note the use of the quotes (") surrounding the parameter.  This is
necessary so that the mailcap interpreter will be prevented from treating
special characters (such as ';') as part of the mailcap syntax.

Also note the absence of the "screen" keyword.  The above call would push
the Workbench screen to the front when MultiView was called and the
Workbench screen would be used for the MultiView window.  The only problem
with this is you would be limited to the number of colors and the
resolution specified for Workbench.  Some other programs, however, might
only be able to open as a window on the Workbench screen and would be
hidden by the AEMail screen when those programs were called unless the
"wb;" parameter was specified.

An example of a complete mailcap entry to use multiview to display all
images would be:

    image/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"

Any image/ type, regardless of the subtype, would be displayed providing
there was an appropriate data type present for that image subtype.

A sample mailcap file is included with the archive which uses MultiView
for text, message, sound, image, and video files.  Since MultiView is a
3.x program using datatypes, this mailcap file will ONLY work with 3.x
systems.  To make it work for 2.x systems, you would need to change the
display programs to your favorite programs that work with 2.x.  You might
also have to be specific as to the subtype for a specific display
type/subtype.  If you install AEMail on a 2.1 system using the provided
installation script, you will be able to create the mailcap file provided
you selected "Expert" mode for the installation "user mode".

The following is the sample mailcap file used for AmigaDos 3.x that uses
MultiView as the display agent.  Please note the use of the "screen"
parameter which tells MultiView to open on it's own screen rather than the
WorkBench screen.  This allows the use of all colors in the image's
palette.

    text/*;  "sys:Utilities/multiview %s"
    message/*; "sys:Utilities/Multiview %s"
    image/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"
    audio/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"
    video/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"


                 General Configuration File (aemail.cnfg)
                 ----------------------------------------

The s:aemail.cnfg file is the General Configuration file for your primary
user.  This file contains various configuration information including the
version and revision number of the AEMail version that was last loaded.  A
special flag in this file indicates whether this file should take
precedence over the Tool Type entries.

You do not have to store this file in the S:  directory nor do you have to
name it "aemail.cnfg".  This is only the default name and location for
this file.  With the use of the CONFIG= Tool Type or the config= parameter
on the shell call for AEMail, you can rename the file and place it
anywhere you want.

Starting with AEMail version 1.13 you can also have multiple configuration
files.  This allows you to set up multiple configurations for different
users of AEMail.  You can select which configuration you want through the
"Project/Configuration/Open" menu item or by executing an AEMail user's
Project icon.  If you use the "Project/Configuration/Open" menu to bring
in a different user's configuration file, that user must have the same
mail directory as the previous user.

If the configuration is never changed with the Configuration Setup, the
Tool Type entries will take precedence.  If either the [SAVE] or [SAVE TO]
gadgets in the Configuration Setup Window is selected, or the
"Project/Configuration/Save" or "Project/Configuration/Save to" menu items
are selected, the General Configuration File will always take precedence.

The s:aemail.cnfg (or CONFIG= Tool Type or config= shell parameter) is
referred as your base configuration file.  You can always return to the
base configuration through the "Project/Configuration/Restore Default"
menu item.

If you display the AEMail General Configuration file with a text editor,
you will find that not all portions of the file are readable as text.  The
only way you can create and update the general configuration file is
through AEMail itself.

As part of this file is your password stored in encrypted format.


                                 .headers
                                 --------

The .headers file provides a list of message headers.  Those that you want
displayed in the message as "minimum headers" are preceded by an asterick
(*); all other headers are preceded by a space.

The .headers file may not be present.  If it is not, the following are
displayed as the "minimum headers":

    Date:
    From:
    Reply-To:
    To:
    cc:
    bcc:
    Subject:

See the discussion on configuring minimum headers in the General
Parameters page of the Configuration Setup Window.


                              folder.config
                              -------------

This file gives the general information about each of the folders
including:

    Flags (long word, 4 bytes): general flags concerning this folder
    Name (9 bytes including ending NULL): short folder name
    Pen (1 byte): pen number for folder tab
    Sort Keys (8 bytes): the permanent sort keys for the folder
    Folder Description (string ending in LINE FEED): the folder
        description.  If this is a folder for one of the pre-set
        folders, this string will be empty (LINE FEED only) unless
        the user has decided to change the folder description.
    Each Filter string ending in a LINE FEED.  Each string begins with 4
        bytes that provide filter parameters as follows:
            1 byte indicating the header to be searched
            2 bytes of flags
            1 byte indicating the compare criteria
    Three successive LINE FEEDS ends each folder config entry.

For those fields that are strings:  if the field is empty there will be a
LINE FEED with no data preceding it.  If filters have been specified, each
filter will have at least 4 bytes followed by the search arguement (if
present) and a LINE FEED.

folder.config files for versions prior to 1.40 can be read by AEMail
version 1.40 or later.  However, once a filter has been added, earlier
versions can not properly read the version 1.40 or later folder.config.
If no filters are added, earlier versions of AEMail can still read the
folder.config file.

It is suggested that you copy your current folder.config file to
folder.config.old before implementing AEMail 1.40.

NOTE:  if for some reason your folder.config file becomes corrupted or is
accidently deleted, you can restore all of the folders and the messages
within them by doing the following:

    delete any current folder.config file (or rename it so it is
        no longer recognized).
    Run AEMail.  Add any additional folders that you previously
        had added.  (INBOX, PENDING, QUEUED and SENT will automatically
        be created).  You must use the exact name you had previously
        used.
    The new folders will show 0 messages.
    Quit AEMail.
    Re-Run AEMail.  The new folders should now show the appropriate
        number of messages provided a valid [folder_Name].config
        file was present for that folder.  The name of the new
        folder must exactly match the [folder_Name] in the
        [folder_Name].config file.


                           [folder_Name].config
                           --------------------

For each of the folders that contain messages there will be a
configuration file which gives information on the messages in that folder.
The name of the file will be the short folder name with ".config" appended
to it.

For this version of AEMail, the [folder_Name].config file contains the
following information for each message in the folder:

    Message Flags (word, 2 bytes): Flags describing the message.
    File Code (long word, 4 bytes): this field is a binary field
        which is used to derive the file name for the message file
        itself.
    Message Size (long word, 4 bytes): size of message.
    Body Displacement (word, 2 bytes): the position where the
        body of the message starts.
    From (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
        From: field in the message header.
    Subject (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
        Subject: field in the message header.  The RE: and FWD:
        headings at the beginning of the Subject header are
        stripped, but indicated by flags in the Message Flags field
        so that the exact subject field can be reconstructed.
    Date (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
        Date: field in the message header.
    To (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
        To: field in the message header.
    Reply-To (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
        Reply-To: field in the message header.
    cc (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
        cc: field in the message header.
    bcc (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
        bcc: field in the message header.

For those fields that are strings:  if the field is empty, there will be a
LINE FEED without any data preceding it.

NOTE:  For AEMail versions prior to 1.42, only the first header line of
any particular header type (ie, To:, cc:, etc.) was saved in the header
strings of the [Folder_Name].config file.  For version 1.42 and later, the
complete header string is saved with all lines of the particular header
type.  Up to 4096 characters can be saved (if there are that many lines
for a particular header type).

This is particularly important for messages that have multiple To: or cc:
recipients.  This means that the complete list of recipients can be
examined in Filter commands and also provides the capability to send
replys to all the recipients of a message.

This does create a problem, however, if the [Folder_Name].config created
by Version 1.42 or later is read by a version of AEMail prior to 1.42.
The Version 1.42 or later [Folder_Name].config file that contains any
message that has long multiple recipient lists (more than one line) can
not be read correctly by versions prior to 1.42.  If you need to revert to
an earlier version of AEMail, you can do the following:

With Version 1.42 or later, export (save) all messages with multiple
recipients that were read by 1.42 or later to a file.  You do not have to
worry about messages read by earlier versions.

Delete all of the messages you just saved.

Then, from the earlier version of AEMail, retrieve from file the messages
you just saved.  The header lines will be truncated by the earlier
version.

The reverse is also possible.  Messages with multiple recipients read by
earlier versions will have their header data truncated.  You can export
(save) the message to a file and then re-read it into AEMail with all
header data intact.


                                .addrbook
                                ---------

This file provides address book information.  Each record looks like this:

    Version (word, 2 bytes): The address book version.  Prior to
        Version 1 of the address book, this and the following field
        did not exist.  The flag $8000 identifies this as a
        legitimate version field to distinguish the addess book
        file from version 0.  NOTE: The Address Book version is
        NOT the same as the AEMail Version.  The Address Book
        version only changes when the format of the Address Book
        changes.
    Flags (word, 2 bytes): Flags describing group actions.  In
        Version 0, the flags field was given in the high order byte
        of the count field which limited the group count to 255.
    Count (word, 2 bytes): If this field is zero, the entry is
        a single user entry.  If this field is greater that zero
        it represents a group entry and indicates the number of
        UserIds in the group.
    Nickname (string ending in LINE FEED): the Nickname for this
        entry (both group or user).
    Real Name (string ending in LINE FEED): the Real Name for
        individual users or the group description for group
        entries.
    UserID (one or more strings ending in LINE FEEDS):  The number
        of UserID fields is determined by the count at the
        beginning of the record.  For individual users, this MUST
        be the UserID and Domain for that user.  For group users
        this can be a Nickname that points to the real user.

For a description of how entries in the Address Book can be created and
displayed see the Section VIII, AEMAIL Windows:  Address Book window.


                                .signature
                                ----------

This is a flat ASCII file that contains the signature block that is to be
appended to any composed messages.  Each line of the signature block must
end in a LINE FEED.

A facility is provided when composing messages to create and or edit this
signature block (see the Compose Message window description in Section
VIII above).

Starting with AEMail Version 1.20, multiple signature files can be used.
These signature files can be named whatever the user wishes and can be
placed wherever the user wishes (Registered Users ONLY).

                                 Messages
                                 --------

Each message is stored as an individual file with a cryptic file name
generated from the File Code in the [Folder_Name].config file.  This name
begins with "AE" and ends with "M" with a number of numeric digits in
between.  The message is stored as a flat ASCII file as it is received
from the POP Server with any CARRAGE RETURNS in a CARRAGE RETURN/LINE FEED
sequences stripped.  This follows the Amiga format for ASCII files.

The complete message is stored along with any attachments as they were
orginally received.  Any particular message can be copied to a named file
anywhere in your system through the "SAVE MESSAGE TO FILE" command.  If
you have an off line program that can process a mime message or a message
with UUENCODED attachments, you can use that program against this file to
extract the attachments or you can save that attachment directly with the
Attachment Requester in the Message Display Window (Section VIII).

If messages are left in the PENDING or QUEUED folders, two additional
files may be created when AEMail terminates.  If attachments were added to
the message when it was created, a file with the same name as the message
file but with "AT" appended to it will be created.  This file contains
information about the attachments.  A second file may be created if
additional headers were created.  This file has "HD" appended to the
original message name.

Both of these files are deleted when AEMail is loaded and the PENDING and
QUEUED message lists are created internally.  The files are re-created if
the messages remain in the PENDING or QUEUED folders when AEMail
terminates normally.

PLEASE NOTE:  if the [folder_Name].config file is deleted you will lose
all capability of retrieving your messages unless you have previously
copied them to named files.


                       TCP Trace Log File (TCPLOG)
                       ---------------------------

This file is present if you have specified

    TCPLOG=name-of-log-file

in the Tool Types parameters or named a "TCP Logging File" in the Default
Path Parameters page of the Configuration Setup Window.  Since
"name-of-log-file" should be the full path name of the log file, this file
may reside in any directory.  If there is no path name, the log file will
reside in you AEMail program directory.

The TCP Trace Log File traces every TCP transaction.  Each time AEMail is
started the following record is written to the file:

    Logging Beginning at DD MMM YR HH:MM:SS

where DD is the day of the week, MMM is the month (Jan, Feb, Mar, etc), YY
is the 2 digit year (97) and HH, MM, and SS are the hour (24 hour clock),
minutes, and seconds.

Each logging record will consist of a 38 byte header and up to 82 bytes of
either descriptive information or actual data received or sent over the
TCP interface.  The header consists of a 21 byte date/time stamp (DD MMM
YR HH:MM:SS) and 16 byte routine name of the routine in AEMail that called
the trace.

If data is displayed, instances of a CARRAGE RETURN will be displayed as
<CR> and of LINE FEEDS as <LF>.  If the data exceeds 82 bytes, <---> will
be placed at the end of the line.

When AEMail terminates, or the TCPLOG file name is changed by the
Default Path Parameters page of the Configuration Setup, the following
record is written to the file:

    Logging Ending at DD MMM YY HH:MM:SS

Each AEMail session is stacked behind the previous one, so that the file
can become quite large.  Periodic purging of the file can occur by
deleting the TCPLOG file in between sessions of AEMail.  Also, a new file
is created when you change the name of the TCPLOG file with the
Configuration Setup.


                     XI. BUG REPORTS AND SUGGESTIONS

Bugs should be reported to:

    [e-mail]

by email.  You can also use the nickname AEMAIL which has been
automatically stored in your address book.

In reporting bugs, be as complete as possible in describing the
circumstances leading up to the bug.  It would be helpful if you indicate
all actions (mouse clicks, etc) that you took before the problem occurred.
If you are having problems connecting to your Internet provider, or
sending or receiving mail, you should activate the TCP Log file (See
Section X, AEMAIL FILES:  TCP Trace Log File) and send a copy of the log
as an attachment to your message.  You might want to block out any
password that is contained in the file before you send it to me, however.
You can do that with any text editor.

I would also appreciate any suggestions that you have for improving
AEMail.  I will not guarantee that I will accept all suggestions or that I
will necessarily implement them in the next release; however, I do take
each suggestion seriously.  In the past I have implemented a number of
suggestions made by my testers.  I will attempt to respond to each
suggestion that is made.

In making suggestions keep in mind some of the restraints that I have
placed on AEMail:

    (1) The program should be able to be run on any version of
        AmigaDos 2.1 or greater, and

    (2) with the exception of TCP/IP stack software (the standard Amiga
        does not come with such software which is required for Internet
        access) or ClassAct, AEMail should not require any extension to
        your system that does not come with a standard AmigaDOS release.
        This effectively rules out MUI although ClassAct is an alternative
        to MUI.

        ClassAct utilizes Boopsi Classes which have been an integral part
        of the Amiga OS since version 2.  ClassAct also allows
        capabilities in AmigaDos 2.1 that the standard gadtools interface
        does not.  The ClassAct classes AEMail requires are provided as a
        part of the AEMail release which means that the user does not have
        to provide anything additional.

        Using an editor of your choice also meets this criteria since you
        can use the standard AmigaDOS editors, ED or MEMACS, which come
        with the standard Amiga systems.

When reporting bugs or making suggestions, please be as complete as
possible in describing the circumstances that brought about the problem or
how the suggestion could be implemented.


                             XII. REFERENCES

A number of software packages are mentioned in this documentation.
Details on how to obtain these packages are given below:

    TCP/IP STACKS

        AmiTCP      A TCP/IP stack for use with the Amiga.  AmiTCP
                    is copyright (c) 1994, 1995 by Network Solutions
                    Development, Inc.

                    AmiTCP was developed by Network Solutions Development,
                    Inc., P.O.  Box 32, FIN-02151 Espoo, Finland.

                    A demo 4.0 version is available on AmiNet sites in
                    countries other than USA or Australia.  It can also
                    be found on many BBS's.

                    The commercial version is distributed by Village
                    Tronic Marketing GmbH, Wellweg 95, D-31157 Sarstedt,
                    Germany, and is available from many Amiga dealers and
                    mail order houses.

                    World Wide Web home page for Network Solutions
                    Development, Inc is:

                        http://www.xgu.fi/biz/NSDI/

                    email addresses: [e-mail]
                                     [e-mail]
                                     [e-mail]

        Miami       A TCP/IP stack compatible with AmiTCP.  This stack
                    is very simple to install and configure.  Miami is
                    copyright (c) 1996, 1997 by Holger Kruse.  It is
                    currently shareware and is available at

                        http://www.nordicglobal.com/miami.html

                    on the WWW or it may be available on local BBS's.
                    Some versions are available on AmiNet, but if you want
                    the latest version consult the web page listed above.

                    email addresses: [e-mail]
                                     [e-mail]

                    If you are using Miami, the "Down when Offline" item
                    in the TCP/IP Settings page for Miami should be
                    checked and your settings saved.  This will prevent
                    Miami from waiting 80 seconds before returning a
                    failure when you try to access the Internet when you
                    are "Offline".

        TermiteTCP  A TCP/IP stack compatible with AmiTCP.  This stack is
                    very simple to install and configure.  TermiteTCP is
                    copyright (c) 1996 by Oregon Research, 16200 S.W.
                    Pacific Hwy, Suite 162, Tigard, OR 97224.

                    This is a commercial product available at many Amiga
                    dealers, mail order houses, or directly from Oregon
                    Research.

                    World Wide Web home page for Oregon Research is:

                        http://www.orres.com/~orres/

                    email address: [e-mail]


    WEB BROWSERS

        IBrowse     Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 by Omnipresence Intl.

                    IBrowse is a commercial product distributed by Oregon
                    Research in the United States and HiSoft in the
                    United Kingdom and can be obtained from Amiga dealers
                    or mail order houses.  A demo version and upgrades can
                    be obtained from the Omnipresence web site at:

                        http://www.omnipresence.com/ibrowse

                    and on AmiNet.

        Voyager NG  Copyright (c) 1995-97 by Oiver Wagner.  Voyager is
                    available for download from AmiNet or the

                        http://www.vapor.com/support

                    web site.

                    email address: [e-mail]

        AWeb-II     Copyright (c) 1996 by AmiTrix Development.

                    Both a public domain demo (AWEB) and a commercial
                    (AWEB II) version is available.  The public domain
                    demo version can be found on AmiNet (AWeb v1.2b),
                    many BBS's, or on the AmiTrix web site:

                        http://www.networkx.com/amitrix/aweb.html

                    The commercial version (AWEB II) can be obtained from
                    Amiga dealers or mail order houses.

                    email addresses: [e-mail]
                                     [e-mail]

                    Mailing address: AmiTrix Development
                                     5312-47 Street
                                     Beaumont Alberta, Canada T4X 1H9


                           XIII. IN CONCLUSION

As payment for receiving and using the unregestered version of AEMail, I
would like any bugs, comments, or suggestions reported to me.  You can
send me email at

    [e-mail]

or use the AEMAIL Nickname created in your Address Book.

You can also register AEMail for a shareware fee of $30.  See the
discussion on REGISTRATION under Section II.  SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.

See the Section X, Bug Reports and Suggestions above for the reporting
procedure.

If you give an unregistered version of this program to anyone else to use
and evaluate, please include the complete archive as distributed.  This
includes the AEMail program, the installation script, and all
documentation and readme files.  DO NOT GIVE A REGISTERED VERSION OF
AEMAIL TO ANYONE!

The complete, unregistered archive may be posted to any BBS.  If it is
posted to any particular BBS, I would appreciate it if the person posting
it to the BBS would send me an email message indicating the BBS it was
posted to.

I have a web site at:

    http://www.calweb.com/~jzachar/

The latest version of AEMail will be posted to this web site.  Major
releases may also be posted on AmiNet.

Whenever a new version of AEMail is available, I will email all users of
AEMail version 2.00 and above for which I have received notification
messages (see Notification Requester in Section II) with a notice of the
new version.  Users of AEMail prior to Version 2.00 who are not registered
users and who have not upgraded will no longer receive this notice.  To
receive these notices it is important that you send the notification
message when you upgrade.

Thanks,

John Zacharias
[e-mail]

www: http://www.calweb.com/~jzachar/